TA2420w SM

TASKalfa 2420w
SERVICE
MANUAL
Published in June 2011
845J0111
5J0SM061
Rev. 1
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE

OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
It may be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste stream. Check with your
local solid waste officials for details in your area for proper disposal.
ATTENTION
IL Y A UN RISQUE D’EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE

DE TYPE INCORRECT. METTRE AU REBUT LES BATTERIES UTILISEES SELON LES
INSTRUCTIONS DONNEES.
Il peut être illégal de jeter les batteries dans des eaux d’égout municipales. Vérifiez avec les
fonctionnaires municipaux de votre région pour les détails concernant des déchets solides
et une mise au rebut appropriée.
Revision history
Revision Date Replaced pages Remarks
1 June 7,2011 Chapter10 -
This page is intentionally left blank.
Safety precautions
This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of
their customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel
are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions
described here before engaging in maintenance activities.
Safety warnings and precautions
Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and
to prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:
DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with warning messages using this symbol.
WARNING: Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance
with warning messages using this symbol.
CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect com-
pliance with warning messages using this symbol.
Symbols
The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific point of attention is
shown inside the symbol.
General warning. Warning of risk of electric shock.
Warning of high temperature.
indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol.
General prohibited action. Disassembly prohibited.
indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol.
General action required. Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.
Always ground the copier.

1. Installation Precautions
WARNING
• Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to
one outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check that
it is adequate for the rated current. .....................................................................................................
• Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire or
electric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause
explosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes, light-
ning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the proper
authorities. ..........................................................................................................................................
CAUTION:
• Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury. .........
• Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. .................
• Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material. This
may cause fire. ...................................................................................................................................
• Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool
as possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ............
• Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. .................................................
• Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this may cause
the copier to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury. ..............................................................
• Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer is accidentally
ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immediately.
If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain medical atten-
tion. .....................................................................................................................................................
• Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier’s
instruction handbook. .........................................................................................................................
2. Precautions for Maintenance
WARNING
• Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly. ................
• Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related
brochures. ..........................................................................................................................................
• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms
and protective circuits. ........................................................................................................................
• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ............................................................................
• Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related brochure
when replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or other serious acci-
dent. ...................................................................................................................................................
• When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a
part, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. ..................................................................
• Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. ...............
• Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. If it
is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. .................................................................
• Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light may
damage eyesight. ...............................................................................................................................
• Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric
shock if handled improperly. ...............................................................................................................
CAUTION
• Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they are safely
secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections. ......................................................................
• Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. ..........
• Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. ..................................
• Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can cause
abnormally high temperatures. ...........................................................................................................
• Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement. ......................
• Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing
them; always hold the plug itself. ........................................................................................................
• Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with a
cable cover or other appropriate item. ................................................................................................
• Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks. ..........
• Remove toner completely from electronic components. .....................................................................
• Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged. ......................................
• After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that were
removed, have been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgotten connector,
trapped wire and missing screws. .......................................................................................................
• Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction
handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary. .......................................
• Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: ......................................
· Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely.
· Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.
· Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the power
switch on.
· Always wash hands afterwards.
• Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to
fire in a furnace, etc. ...........................................................................................................................
• Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outlet immedi-
ately. ...................................................................................................................................................
3. Miscellaneous
WARNING
• Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other than the
specified refiner; it may generate toxic gas. ........................................................................................
• Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or an electric shock
might occur. ........................................................................................................................................
This page is intentionally left blank.
This service manual includes the basic information about TASKalfa 2420w Multi-Function Printer,
which is required when you during field service to maintain the product’s quality and reliability.
Chapter 1 Introduction Overview

(Features, specifications, name of parts and
etc.)
Chapter 2 Installation Installation requirements, method of

installation, connection with PC & printer
Chapter 3 Print / Scan Process explanation for the steps of the print and
scan process
Chapter 4 Electrical Circuit diagrams, image process system,

electric parts location and etc.
Chapter 5 Mechanical Parts replacement and mechanical

disassembly
Chapter 6 Maintenance Field maintenance information
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Problem resolution
Chapter 8 Service Mode / Utility Service Mode settings, Diagnosis and etc.
Chapter 9 Appendix General Circuit Diagram
Chapter 10 Setup Procedure Options and Service Kits
Some of the information included in this manual may be changed by product upgrades. Such
information will be informed to you through Technical Bulletins etc.
Chapter 1
Introduction
page
1. 1 Features 1- 2
1. 2 Specifications 1- 3
1. 2. 1 General 1- 3
1. 2. 2 Printer part 1- 4
1. 2. 3 Scanner part 1- 6
1. 3 Specifications for Originals 1- 7

1. 3. 1 Original - Standard 1- 7
1. 3. 2 Special Documents 1- 7
1. 3. 3 “Do Not Scan” Originals 1- 7
1. 4 Appearance 1- 8
1. 4. 1 Front 1- 8
1. 4. 2 Rear 1- 9
1. 5 Specifications for Scan Original 1-10
1. 6 Specifications for Printing Media 1-13

1. 6. 1 Papers not available to use 1-13
1. 6. 2 Keeping the paper in the custody 1-14
1. 6. 3 Treatment against environmental condition 1-15
1-1
1. 1 Features
(1) TASKalfa 2420w is a Multi-Function Printer for scan, copy and print large format documents.
Some of these features may be optional.
(2) Front loading - front delivery structure saves the installation space.
(3) Various media source; roll media feeding (1 roll), cut sheet manual feeding, Paper Tray multiple
cut sheet feeder (option).
(4) A dedicated printer stand (option) offers easy print handling with the print basket. TASKalfa
2420w is also suitable for your office layout as a desktop MFP.
(5) The operation speed is 40mm/s (2.9 D landscape / 2.8 A1 landscape per minute).
(6) The maximum print width is 914mm / 36” wide, and the minimum one is 210mm or 8.5”.
The maximum print length is 2,400mm (for A0 / 36” inch wide media), and the minimum one is
297mm or 11”.
(7) Up to 600dpi print resolutions with an enhanced scanning system produces the highest quality
images controlled by an advanced Image Process System.
(8) The combination of Contact Development System and mono-component minute toner can
produce a high definition line, distinctive grayscale and consistent solid black.
The HDP(High Definition Print) process generates no Waste Toner.
(9) Easy access to USB port allows users to provide efficient productivity by using “File to Print” /
“Scan to USB” (standard or option).
(10) 2 inch core plain paper support
1-2
1. 2 Specifications
1. 2. 1 General
Subject Specification
Model TASKalfa 2420w
Configuration Console
Power consumption 1500w (US model)
(Maximum) 1600w (Europe/Asia model)
(Including Scanner & Controller Unit)
Power consumption 13w or less (US model)
(Low power mode) 13.5w or less (Europe/Asia model)
Acoustic noise Idling Max. 51db
Printing Max. 60db
(impulse sound excluded) EN ISO 7779
Ozone Max. 0.05ppm (Measurement method under UL Standard)
Dimensions 1245mm (Width) x 833mm (Depth) x 1174mm (Height)
(including Stand)
Weight About 144kg / 318lbs (Stand excluded)
Environmental condition Temperature: 10 to 32 degrees Centigrade / 50 to 89.6 F
for usage Humidity: 15 to 85% RH
Interface Network Interface (10 BASE-T / 100 BASE-TX / 1000 BASE-T)
Rating input power In the US : 120V plus/minus 10%, 50/60Hz, 12A
In Europe : 220-240V plus 6% or minus 10%, 50/60Hz, 6.5A
NOTE
The above specifications are subject to change without notice.
1-3
1. 2. 2 Printer part
Printing method LED Array Electro photography
Photoreceptor Organic Photoconductive Drum
Print speed 40mm per second
(Inch) 1.7ppm/E 2.9ppm/D Landscape
(Metric) 1.6ppm/A0 2.8ppm/A1 Landscape
Print head LED Array
Resolution of print head 600dpi x 600dpi
Print width Maximum 914mm / “36”
Minimum 297mm / “11” for roll media
210mm / “8.5” for cut sheet
Print length Maximum
(Standard) 2,400mm for A0 / 36” wide (plain paper / bond)
or “2 x Standard length” (plain paper / bond)
“1 x Standard length” (plain paper / bond, 2” core roll)
“1 x Standard length” (vellum / tracing paper, film)
(Option) 3,600m
Minimum 297mm / 11”
NOTE
If the print is longer than 2,400mm, its image quality or the
reliability of paper feeding is not guaranteed.
Print size ISO (mm)

(from Paper Tray, option)
Width
Length 420 297 210
594 X
420 X
297 X X
ANSI (inch)
Width
Length
18 17 12 11 9 8.5
24 X
22 X
18 X
17 X
12 X X
11 X X
Warm up time Shorter than 2 minutes 30 seconds

At 23oC, 60%RH, the rated voltage, plain paper
First print time 42 seconds (D Landscape), 41 seconds (A1 Landscape)
At 23oC, 60%RH, the rated voltage, plain paper
(after submission of the concerning plot data)
NOTE
1-4
Media source 1 Roll Deck (3” / 2” core roll)
Manual Feeder (single cut sheet)
Paper Tray (multiple cut sheet, option)
Media (Recommended Roll Media)
- US model:
Bond : 64g/m2 to 80g/m2, US Bond (20# Bond)
Vellum : US Vellum (20# Vellum)
Film : 4MIL (4Mil-2 Xero Film)
- Europe/Asia model:
Plain Paper : 64g/m2 to 80g/m2,
Oce Red Label Paper(75g/m2)
Tracing Paper : Oce Transparent Paper (80g/m2)
Film : Oce Polyester Film
- 2” roll core : HP Universal Bond Paper
(Cut sheet)
Plain Paper / Bond
Storage of consumables (Toner cartridge)
Store the cartridge within the temperature range from 0 to
40 degrees Centigrade and within the humidity range from 10
to 85% RH.
NOTE
1-5
1. 2. 3 Scanner part
Scanning method Contact Image Sensor (CIS)
(5 pieces of A4 sized CIS)
Light source LED (R/G/B)
Setting of original Face up
Starting point of scan Center
Scan width Max: 914.4mm / 36”
Min : 210mm
Scan length Max: 6,000mm / 19.7ft (Including the margin area)
Min : 210mm / 8.5” (Including the margin area)
Margin area 3mm from leading, trailing and both side edges
Optical resolution 600dpi
Digital resolution 200 / 300 / 400 / 600 dpi
Original transportation Sheet through type
Transportable original Max: 1.60mm
thickness Min : 0.05mm
NOTE
If the original is thicker than 0.65mm, its image quality is not
guaranteed.
Scanning speed 60mm per second (mono, 600dpi max)
NOTE
1-6
1. 3 Specifications for Originals
1. 3. 1 Original Standards
(1) The width of original must range from 8.5” to 36” (210mm to 914.4mm).
(2) The length of original must range 8.5” (210mm) to 25,000mm
(3) The thickness of original must range from 0.05mm to 0.65mm.
(4) The shape of original must be square, and it must be standard sized.
(5) The type of original must belong to any of the followings.
Plain paper
Coated paper (High or middle class plain paper is coated with the paint.)
Tracing paper
Pansy Trace Paper (Both sides of the film is sandwiched between Tracing paper.)
Film
Newspaper
Cardboard paper
1. 3. 2 Special Documents
The following kinds of originals are “special”. It is possible to scan them, but the image quality
and feed reliability are not guaranteed.
(1) The type of original is acceptable, but the thickness and type may not be:
Booklets
Original with a Hanger
Cut and Pasted originals
(2) These original may not damage the scanner, but these types are NOT recommended:
following ones.
Cloth
Aluminium Kent Paper
1. 3. 3 “Do Not Scan” Originals

It is impossible to use the following types of originals because they are likely to damage the
scanner.
(1) Metal originals (The Scan Glass may damage)

(2) Slippery originals which is difficult to transport
(3) Irregularly shaped originals (Not square in shape)
(4) Extremely curled originals (Diameter of curl is less than 50mm)
(5) Extremely creased originals
(6) Torn originals
1-7
1. 4 Appearance
1. 4. 1 Front
7 3 5
9
12
1
10
14 11
4 7
13 7
8
6 12
2
No. Name Function

1 Main Switch You can turn on/off the TASKalfa 2420w.
2 Original Guides Feed the original under the Scanner Unit along the Original
Guides.
3 User Interface This is a Touch Screen, and many kinds of user operation are
available.
PLEASE DO NOT push the LCD area too strong.
4 Emergent Stop Button Press this red button when you would like to stop copying or
scanning emergently.
5 Scanner Unit Read the original with this unit when you make scan or copy.
6 Original Table Place the original here and then feed it into the Scanner Unit
when you make scan or copy.
7 Engine Unit Open Lever Push down these blue levers when you open the Engine Unit.
8 Bypass Feeder Feed a cut sheet paper from the Bypass Feeder.
Open here to access Initial Cut Button.
9 Roll Deck Cover Lift up to open the Roll Deck.
A roll media can be loaded in the Roll Deck.
10 Print Basket Receives ejected printed.
11 Stylus Use this to press buttons on the touch screen.
PLEASE DO NOT use any other pointed object to tap on the UI.
12 Print Exit Cover Can access a mis-feed print inside the Fuser Unit.
13 Initial Cut Button Push this button to trim the leading edge of the loaded roll
media.
14 USB port Your USB flash memory storage can be installed here.
5VDC max.
1-8
1. 4. 2 Rear
2
7: behind 7
No. Name Function

1 Toner Cover Open here to access toner supply system.
2 Original Guide These trays catch the original ejected from the Scanner
Unit.
3 LAN Port Connect the LAN Cable to connect the TASKalfa 2420w to
the network. (Do not connect a telephone line)
4 USB Port Service Use, 5VDC max.
5 Breaker It is possible to shut off supplying the AC power.
6 Inlet Socket Connect the Power Cord here.
7 Dehumidify Heater Switch Turn on the Dehumidify Heater with this switch when you
(Option) would like to dry the paper in the humid season.
1-9
1. 5 Specifications for Scan Original
A scan original must satisfy the following specifications.
Thickness 0.05mm to 0.6mm

Width 210mm to 914.4mm
Length 210mm to 6,000mm
(If an original is thicker than 0.6mm, its image quality is not guaranteed even it is transported.)
Do not scan the following kinds of original, because you may damage the original or scanner itself!
Sticked with paste
Paste
Torn
Folded (Leading edge)
So much curled
(Diameter is smaller than
50mm.)
1-10
Not square
Wet image
Wet
Made of metal or fabric

Metal Fabric
Patched
Clipped or stapled
Clipped Stapled
1-11
The following kinds of originals can be read with using a carrier sheet.
Image quality or the reliability of paper feeding for them is not guaranteed.
Rough surface
(Carbon paper for example) Rough surface
Punched
1-12
1. 6 Specifications for Printing Media
1. 6. 1 Papers not available to use

Do not use the following kinds of printing paper because you may damage the print engine!
Excessively curled
(a diameter of 50 mm or
less)
Folded
Creased
Torn
Punched
1-13
Paper that has already been
used for printing
Extremely sticky
Extremely thin and soft
Extremely slippery
OHP Film
CAUTION
Do not use the paper with staple, or do not use such conductive paper as aluminium foil and
carbon paper.
Such paper may become cause for the fire.
NOTE
(1) Print image may become light if printed on a paper of rough surface.
(2) Print image may become defective if the print paper is much curled.
(3) It will become a cause for paper mis-feed, defective print image or crease of paper if you
use a paper that does not satisfy the specification.
(4) Do not use a paper of which surface is very special, such as thermal paper, art paper,
aluminium foil, carbon paper and conductive paper.
(5) Do not use papers with unpacked (exposed in high / low temperature & humidity) in a
long period. Such papers may result in mis-feed, defective image or paper creasing.
(6) Tracing paper exposed to air over a long period tends to defective printing.
Removing one round on the surface of the tracing roll paper from the beginning is
recommended.
(7) Initial cut for the leading edge before making a long print is recommended.
1. 6. 2 Keeping the paper in the custody

Keep the paper in the custody taking care of the following matters.
1. Do not expose the paper to the direct sunlight.

2. Keep the paper away from high humidity. (It must be less than 70%)
3. Put the paper on a flat place
4. If you will keep the paper in the custody, which you have already unpacked, put it into the
polyethylene bag to avoid the humidity.
1-14
1. 6. 3 Treatment against environmental condition
Humidity(%) Possible problem Necessary treatment

Low “Void of image”, “crease of paper” and 1. Install an humidifier in the room, and
other problems occurs when you print humidify the room air.
with plain paper and tracing paper. 2. Remove the paper from the machine
right after the completion of print, and
keep it in a polyethylene bag.
“Void of image” occurs when you print If you will not make print soon, remove
with tracing paper. the tracing paper from the machine and
40% Remove the paper from the machine after
everyday use, and keep it in a
polyethylene bag.
70% “Void of image” occurs when you print If you will not make print soon, remove
with plain paper and tracing paper. the tracing paper from the machine and
“Void of image”, “crease of paper” and 1. Use a dehumidifier or such equipment.
other problems occurs when you print 2. Remove the paper from the machine
with plain paper and tracing paper. right after the completion of print, and
High
NOTE
(1) Using a dehumidifier in high humidity environment (75% or higher) is recommended.
(2) “Void of image” and “crease of paper” will occur in case of extremely high or low humidity.
Normal Print Crease of paper
If the media is humidified;
Normal Print Void of image
If the media is humidified;
Cofee & Foods Cofee & Foods
ABC Cafe ABC Cafe
1-15
Chapter 2
Installation
The machine had passed our strict inspection after careful adjustment in the factory, and
then it was packaged and shipped. Installation is an important work to make the machine
work at customer’s site as same as it has passed our strict inspection before shipment.
A service engineer has to understand machine’s function very well. Install the machine in a
good environmental place in a correct way, and then check that it works perfectly.
Page
2. 1 Unpack 2- 1
2. 2 Installation Requirements 2- 3
2. 3 Accessory List 2- 4
2. 4 Stand Setup 2- 5
2. 5 Scanner Part 2- 6
2. 6 Roll Deck 2- 6
2. 7 Inner Feeder Unit Setup 2- 7
2. 8 LED Head Assy Setup 2- 8
2. 9 Developer Unit Setup 2-10
2. 10 Process Unit Setup 2-11
2. 11 Installing Accessory 2-13
2. 12 Supplying Initial Toner 2-13
2. 13 Creating Backup 2-15

2. 1 Unpack
The next page shows the unpacking procedure. This is printed on the outside of the product carton.
2-1
NOTE NOTE / ᵈᗧ
(1) When this printer is installed in winter, if a printer that has been kept in (2) Handle with great care when you unpack or install
NEVER use a forklift to unload
a cold warehouse is moved to a warm room and is unpacked, it may the printer because its net weight is about 180Kg.
the machine.
cause several troubles since each part of the printer will be dewed.
(3) The printer package does not include printing paper.
In this case, leave the printer in the room for 6 hours or longer before
So ask it separately before installing the printer.
it is unpacked, then start installation work.

1. Cut the Bands (1), and then remove the Top Board (2). 2 7. Remove the Front Pad (9), Rear Pad (10). Open and draw down the plastic bag (11) to the bottom.
1

2. Open the plastic sheet (3) on the outer packing. 8. Take out the Slope R/L (13), Coasters (14: Large) (15: small)
9
and the wrench (16) from the accessory box (12).
3. Remove Lid (4). 3 11
10
4. To open the Tray (5), make a cut on each corner.
4
12
12
8
5. Remove 6 Joints (6).
8
7 13
6. Remove Outer Cardboard Box (7) to remove 7
Side Pads(8).
6 15
6 14
16
1 Turn Left 2 Pull out
8 pieces each
Open 5
Open
9. Put 2 pieces each of Coaster (14: large) (15: small) 11. Turn Adjusters (17) counter-clockwise until 13. Cut the tray (5) along the perforation lines for Slopes. Remove
beneath Adjusters (17) and Casters (18). Casters (18) touch Coarsters (14). excessive areas of the plastic sheet (3) / plastic bag (11) for ease
19
Note that the Coarsters (14) (15) should be of subsequent operation.
located under the plastic bag (11). (Note that Slopes are available on either side)
12. After Casters touch Coarsters (14), remove ˴
Coarsters (15).

17 11
10. Turn the front / rear Adjusters (17) on one side
clockwise to lift up the machine, and remove the 18
pad (19). Do the same way for the pad (20).
20 14
(no paticular order of right / left)

5
16 Cut
17 18 Cut
17 Cut
11 15 14
15 14
3
14. Attach Slopes to the tray (5) with the 15. Raise the tray (5) with Joints (6) removed on step 5. 16. Pull the machine by using Slopes until one side 17. Last, push the machine to unload ot from the pallet.
double-sided tapes. comes down to the floor and stop.

NOTE
Push Carefully. Casters should keep the center
5 STOP HERE ! of Slopes.
6
5 13 13
2-2
2. 2 Installation Requirements
The following conditions are required for the installation of the equipment.
1. Power source should be rated as:

U.S.A: 120V +/-10%, 50/60Hz, 15A or higher
Europe: 220-240V +6% or -10%, 50/60Hz, 10A or higher
2. The equipment must be on a dedicated circuit.
3. The outlet must be near the equipment and easily accessible.
1. Make sure to connect this equipment to a properly grounded outlet.

2. The outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible.
Site Environmental Conditions

Temperature Range : 10 °C to 32 °C / 50 °F to 89.6 °F
Humidity Range : 15% to 85% RH. (NON CONDENSING)
Keep the printer away from water sources, boilers, humidifiers or refrigerators.
1. The installation site must not have any open flames, dust or ammonia gases.
2. The equipment must not be exposed to the air vents from heating/cooling systems.
3. The equipment should not be exposed to the direct sunlight. Please draw curtains to
block any sunlight.
When you open the printer (Upper Half), do not expose the Photoconductive Drum to
strong (intense) light as this will damage the Drum.
Ozone will be generated while this equipment is in use, although the quantity generated is
within all safe levels. (see certifications)
Ventilate the room, if so required.
Keep ample space around the equipment to ensure comfortable operation.

The floor must be level and the strength must be ample to sustain the weight of the equipment.
20cm/8” or larger with no option
(Rear)
10cm/4” or larger 10cm/4” or larger

Main Body
(Front)
20cm/8” or larger
2-3
2. 3 Accessory List
Confirm the following parts are attached to the product.
Guide Cap Assy Flange
Power Cable Shading Sheet

Toner Bottle
Shaft
Rear Stay
Swing Arm Assy
Sheet Assy
Thumb Screw Wrench
DVD ROM User’s Manuals Hardware Setup

Product Library Procedure
(This leaflet)
NOTE
The Wrench is designed for only installing / uninstalling the TASKalfa 2420w. Use only for intended
2-4
2. 4 Stand Setup
1. Pass Rear Stay (1) through the loop at the 2. Fix Swing Arm Assy (3) to the bottom plate of Stand with
end of the cloth of Sheet Assy (2). Thumb Screw (4).
2
3 4
4
3
1
3. Put the end of Rear Stay (1) on the Bracket (5).

Make sure to face the holes on the L-shape toward the floor.
5
1
4. Insert the L-shape end of Sheet Assy (2) to Swing Arms (3).
L-Shape
2
5
Insert Swing Arm (3) into L-shape until it

comes to the second hole on L-shape.
Make sure to face the holes toward the floor.
5.Put Shaft (6) on the Sheet Assy, and insert both ends to the slits (7)
on the side panel so that Shaft gives tension to the Sheet.
6
6. Rotate the Adjust Bolt (8) until the distance between
7 the floor and Caster (9) becomes approx. 5mm.
8
7
Approx. 5mm
2-5
2. 5 Scanner Part
1. Press the levers (1) up to open the Scanner Unit.
2. Remove the protection mat (2) and the Protection 3
Sheet (3).
3. Gently press both sides of the Scanner Unit down

to firmly close it.
2. 6 Roll Deck
1. Remove 4 tapes (1), (2).
1 1
2-6
2. 7 Inner Feeder Unit Setup
1. Press down the blue levers (1) on both sides to unlock and open the Upper Unit.
1 1
2. Remove the shock absorber (2), (3) on both sides.
3 3
2 2
3. Remove the tape (4) to release the drive belt (5).
4. With holding the Corona Blocks (6) on both sides of the Transfer / Separation Corona (7), lift it up and
take it out from the machine.
6 6
7 7
2-7
5. Open the Guide Plate (8), and remove the shock absorbers (9) and tags (10) on both sides.
10 10
9
9
6. Close the Guide Plate (8). Return the Transfer / Separation Corona (7) in position.
2. 8 LED Head Assy Setup

1. Remove 2 tapes. (1)
2. Loosen the thumb screws (2) on both sides to release LED Head Assy.
1 1
2 2
2-8
3. Pinch and hold the dotted area in the picture. NEVER touch the LED Array (3) and the LED Head
Bracket (4). Slightly lift up the LED Head Assy to remove Fixing Plate (5).
The pictures on this step show the right side. Please do the same way for the left side too.
3 4 Do not touch
4. Firmly tighten the thumb screws (2) loosened on step 2.
2
2
2-9
2. 9 Developer Unit Setup
1. Remove 2 thumb screws (1) to remove the red brackets (2) on each side. The brackets (2) are no longer
required.
2 2
1 1
2. Remove the stickers (3) on the “flap areas” on the top of

the black sheet (4).
4
3. Pinch the side tabs (5) of the sheet (4) on both sides, and gently pull it to the front.
First, only the flap areas should go back and front again, then next the bottom part.
4 4
5 5
flap
NOTE
Never pull the flap area!
2-10
2. 10 Process Unit Setup
NOTE Direct this face up.
1. Please handle the Process Unit with great care as it

is equipped with the Drum. Rough handling may
damage the Drum.
2. Please confirm the table is flat when you put the

Process Unit on it. And be sure to put it by correct
direction as the following photo.
1. With holding both handgrips (1), take out the

Process Unit from the packaging box. 1
2. Put the Process unit on a flat table.

Remove Dry Silica Gel (2), and remove 2 tapes (3)
3
on the corona.
3. Remove the black shading paper (4).
2-11
4. With fitting the square holes (5) to the pins (6), install the Process Unit to the Upper Unit of printer.
6 6
5 5
Process Unit
6
5. Secure the Process Unit by tightening 4 thumb screws (7).
7 7
6. Fit the belt (8) into the pulley (9) for engagement. 7. Finish the setup of Process Unit by closing the
Upper Unit.
Hold Here.
9
2-12
2. 11 Installing Accessory
2
Remove 2 tapes (1).
Fit 2 Guides (2) into the slots on the rear cover of printer.
2. 12 Supplying Initial Toner

1. Open the Toner Hatch (1) on the rear cover of the printer.
(Not necessary to remove the Guide) from right
1
2. Shake the Toner Bottle (2) several times to loosen the toner.
NOTE 2
After you shake the Toner Bottle well, proceed the later step 3
and 4 as soon as possible.
Having a pause after step 2 may reduce smoothness of the toner.
This would disturb a smooth toner supply from the Toner Bottle to
the printer.
2-13
3. Put the dent area (3) under the holder (4) to firmly seat the bottom plate of the Toner Bottle to the toner
supply position.
3
from front from front
from right
4
4. With pressing down the Toner Bottle, slide from right

the green lever (5) to the arrow direction
until it stops. When it stops, wait 10 2
seconds as it is.
NOTE
Gently press down the Toner Bottle. Pressing too
much makes the lever (5) much heavier. 5
5. Slide the lever (4) back to its original

from right
position, and remove the Toner Bottle.
NOTE
It is impossible to remove the Toner Bottle unless the lever (5) completely moves to the original
position. Do not attempt to remove the Toner Bottle by force if the lever is not at the original position.
Doing so may damage toner supply system.
2-14
6. Connect the Power Cable and turn on the printer.
For power source requirements, see page 1.
The UI screen shows “Setup Wizard”.

It will prompt you to enter several settings.
Follow the wizard for the rest of the setup.
2. 13 Creating Backup
1. Press [? HELP] on the Home screen.
2. Press [Service]. Input “8495107” and press [Enter].
2-15
3. Service Configuration screen will appear. Press the arrow keys to move to page 5/7.
On 5/7 page, press [Launch]. Use the arrow keys to open [5/7 IPS Setup].
4. A confirmation dialog appears. Press [Yes].

Press [Login] to log in Service Mode.
5. Press [Adjustment] in Service Mode Home.

Press [Export].
2-16
6. Entry Serial Number screen will appear.
Input the serial number and press [Enter].
7. Install a USB storage device to the printer. Locate “Removable Disk” and press [Save].
The current setting parameters are saved as *.RAM and *.txt in a folder (automatically created) at this time.
If you do not have one, please locate a folder in the HDD of the controller.
USB storage
NOTE
IMPORTANT: The created RAM file can be used as a BACKUP of the initial configuration of this machine.
Store the RAM file in the event of an attempt to restore the initial configuration.
You can check the contents (setting values) in the TXT file as understandable texts.
Reference
It is better to create RAM file in both USB storage and the HDD just in case.
8. A dialog appears. Press [No] this time.
2-17
9. When RAM file is created in a USB storage, follow the instruction in another dialog.
Press [Yes] and [OK] before you remove it.
10. Press [Back], [Logout] then [Close] to cancel Service Mode.
11. UI screen will display Home screen in a short time.
2-18
Chapter 3
Print / Scan Process
Page
3. 1 Print Process 3- 2
3. 1. 1 Characteristic of toner 3- 2
3. 1. 2 Each step of the print process 3- 3
3. 1. 2. 1 Erasing (Removal of negative electric charges) 3- 5
3. 1. 2. 2 Charge of Drum 3- 6
3. 1. 2. 3 Exposure 3- 7
3. 1. 2. 4 Development 3- 8
3. 1. 2. 5 Transfer 3-10
3. 1. 2. 6 Separation 3-12
3. 1. 2. 7 Drum Cleaning (Removal of remained toner) 3-13
3. 1. 2. 8 Fusing 3-14
3. 1. 3 Controlling the movement of toner in the Developer Unit 3-15
3. 1. 4 Toner Collection Process 3-18
3. 1. 5 Density Compensation Process 3-21
3. 2 Scan Process 3-22

3. 2. 1 Data flow in scan and copy 3-22
3. 2. 2 Positioning process of Image Block 3-23
3-1
3. 1 Print Process
3. 1. 1 Characteristic of toner
The toner used for TASKalfa 2420w has a characteristic to be charged “negative”, which tends to
be attracted to a more “positive” object.
Suppose that there are objects A and B, and the situation is as follows.
1. Electric potential of the object B is higher than that of object A.

2. Toner exists on the object A.
Comparing the potential of both objects, it can be said that the object B is relatively “positive” and
the object A is “negative”. (In another word, object B is more “positive” than the object A.)
As the toner is “negative”, it is attracted to the object B that is more “positive”.
If you move the object B close to the object A, therefore, the toner moves onto the object B.
Object A with low potential A

(Relatively negative) A A
Toner moves from A to B.
Object B with high potential B B

B
(Relatively positive)
On the contrary, suppose that the toner exists on the object B of which electric potential is higher
than the object A.
Even if you move the object A close to the object B, the toner continues to stay on the object B
because negative toner and relatively negative object A repel each other.
Object A with low potential A

(Relatively negative) A A
Toner stays on B.
Object B with high potential B B

(Relatively positive) B
Thus, the toner has a characteristic to move from one place with a lower potential to another place
with a higher potential.
If we control the electric potentials, it is possible to move the toner from one place to another as we
intend, or it is also possible to remove the toner from an unwanted place.
TASKalfa 2420w controls the electric potentials properly working each part as Drum, Corona Units,
Lamps, Developer Unit and Cleaning Roller.
The movement of toner is controlled correctly and several processes as Development, Toner
Transfer, Drum Cleaning and etc. are performed.
3-2
3. 1. 2 Each step of print process
One cycle of print consists of the following 8 processes.
1. Erasing (Removal of negative electric charges)

2. Charge of Drum
3. Exposure
4. Development
5. Transfer
6. Separation
7. Drum Cleaning (Removal of remained toner)
8. Fusing
Regulation Roller
Image Corona
Grid Plate
Eraser Lamp
LED Head
Fuser Roller
Toner Supply Roller

Developer Roller
Cleaning Roller
Density Sensor
Pressure Roller
Photoconductive Drum Transfer Corona
Separation Corona
3-3
Processes from 1 to 8 are related with the control of the electric potentials.
The following graphic shows the electric potential at each process and the movement of toner.
+700V Voltage of
Transfer Corona
+600V
+500V
+400V
Voltage of
+300V
5 7
Cleaning Roller
+200V
+100V
0V
-100V SP1
-200V
3 4
-300V Voltage of
1 1 Developer Roller
-400V
-500V 6
-600V 2
-700V SP2
Surface Potential of Drum

SP1 : For black image / SP2 : For white image
Name of part Voltage (Current) during Print Cycle Voltage during Toner Collection Process
Image Corona Wire -1.3mA +/-0.05mA -
Grid Plate -630V +/-30V -
Developer Roller -230V +/-5V +350V +/-5V
Regulation Roller -80V +/-5V against the Developer Roller Bias -80V +/-5V against the Developer Roller Bias
(Center)
Regulation Roller 0V (Connected to the ground) 0V (Connected to the ground)
(Both sides)
Toner Supply Roller The same voltage with Developer Roller Bias The same voltage with Developer Roller Bias
Transfer Corona +1.0mA +/-0.05mA -
Separation Corona AC (5.0KV) + DC (-250V +/-5V) -
Cleaning Roller +450V +/-5V -550V +/-5V
Reference
When the printer is going to stop after printing, or when the used Roll Deck is changed with
other one, the TASKalfa 2420w will take the “Toner Collection Process” to remove the
remained toner and place back into the Developer Unit.
Refer to [3.1.4 Toner Collection Process].
3-4
3. 1. 2. 1 Erasing (Removal of negative electric charges)
As the first step of print cycle, it is necessary to remove the negative electric charges from the
Drum, which have remained there after the former print cycle.
The Drum has a characteristic to lose the negative electric charges if it is exposed to the light.
So the Drum is rotated and evenly exposed to the light from the Eraser Lamp.
The electric potential on the Drum becomes 0V (residual potential) by this process.
Eraser Lamp
Drum
Negative electric
charges
3-5
3. 1. 2 .2 Charge of Drum
The Image Corona discharges negative electric charges which are given to the Drum.
The surface of Drum becomes about -630V evenly as a result, which corresponds to the white
area of the printed image pattern.
The Grid Plate is also connected to the High Voltage Power Supply individually.
Current and Voltage supplied to the Image Corona Wire is as follows.
Corona Wire -1.3mA +/-0.05mA
Corona Wire Image Corona
Grid Plate
Drum
3-6
3. 1. 2. 3 Exposure
According to the printed image pattern, the LED Head throws the light (740nm) onto some part of
Drum which corresponds to the black area of printed image pattern.
As the Drum has a characteristic to lose the negative electric charges if it is exposed to the light,
this part of Drum surface loses the charges and its potential becomes about -20V. (This potential is
not constant but is variable by the environment.)
The other part of Drum surface, which was not exposed to the light from the LED Head, keeps
-630V of potential which the Image Corona has given.
An invisible electric image pattern that consists of -630V area and the -20V area is formed on the
surface of Drum as a result. (This is called “Electrostatic Latent Image”.)
LED Head
Drum
(Distribution of electric potentials after the Exposure)
-20V -630V
(see the next page)
3-7
Reference
(1) Even if the toner remains on the Drum, it will not block the light from the LED Head as the
diameter of toner (9 micrometers) is much smaller than that (42 micrometers) of 1 pixel of
LED. The electric charges on the Drum are removed as needed.
(2) The TASKalfa 2420w’s LED Head Unit consists of 3 blocks.
Block A / C
Block B
Block B
Block A Block C
Printing Direction
3-8
3. 1. 2. 4 Development
The Developer Roller, which is evenly covered with the toner, is contacted to the Drum because
the Developer Unit is pressed to the Drum. (The width of contact point is about 5mm.)
The Developer Roller is supplied with -230V during the print cycle.
And both -630V area and -20V area exist on the Drum because the Electrostatic Latent Image has
been formed in the former Exposure process.
Seen from the voltage of Developer Roller Bias (-230V), the -20V area on the Drum is relatively
“positive”. So the toner moves from the Developer Roller to the -20V area of Drum.
On the other hand, the -630V area is relatively “negative” seen from the Developer Roller.
So the toner does not move to the -630V area but stays on the Developer Roller.
A visible toner image is formed on the Drum as a result.
Drum Developer Roller Developer Roller
Drum
Before Development After Development : Toner moves

only to -20V area.
-20V -630V
(Invisible Electrostatic Latent Image) (Visible toner image)
3-9
Even if some toner has not been removed by the Cleaning Roller but remained on the -630V area
of Drum (It corresponds to the white area of the print) in the later [3.1.2.7 Drum Cleaning], this
toner is removed at the time of Development because it moves to the Developer Roller of which
potential (-230V) is higher than that of Drum (-630V).
So there will be no case that unnecessary black spot is printed on the white area of the print.
The remained toner that moved to the Developer Roller is carried into the Developer Unit and then
reused.
1. Toner remained on the Drum

2. Toner moves from the Drum to the Developer Roller.
3. Developer Roller carries the toner toward the Toner Supply Roller
4. Toner is shifted to the inside of the Developer Unit by the revolution of Toner Supply Roller.
5. Toner is reused.
Before Development After Development

(Toner is remaining on the white area.) (Toner is removed from the white area.)
-20V -630V
Reference
The Developer Unit has not only the Developer Roller but also 2 more rollers inside which
are also supplied with the individual voltages.
The Developer Unit controls the movement of toner in the unit taking advantage of the
difference of potentials among these rollers, and covers the Developer Roller with the toner
in the end.
Refer to [3. 1. 3 Controlling the Movement of Toner in the Developer Unit] to know how the
Developer Unit controls the movement.
3-10
3. 1. 2. 5 Transfer
The printing paper is charged positively as the Transfer Corona discharges positive electric
charges from under the paper.
The toner existing on the -20V area on the Drum will move to the printing paper because the
potential of the paper comes to be higher than the Drum by the Transfer Process.
The voltage supplied to the Transfer Corona Wire is as follows.
Transfer Corona Wire: +1.0mA +/-0.05mA

(When the Insulated Drum is used.)
Print Media
Transfer Corona Positive electric charges
3-11
3. 1. 2. 6 Separation
The printing paper is attracted to the Drum after the Transfer because the potential of paper is
positive and that of Drum is negative.
It is necessary for avoiding the jam to separate the paper from the Drum by removing the static
force between them.
The Separation Corona takes AC discharge being supplied with the AC voltage and the DC
voltage.
AC voltage : 5.0KV
DC voltage : -250V
As the AC voltage is compensated by the negative DC voltage, the negative charges are
generated more than positive ones, which mainly results in removing the positive charges of the
printing paper.
The static force between the printing paper and the Drum is reduced as a result, and the paper is
separated from the Drum by its weight.
Drum
Separation Corona Positive charges of the paper are

removed by the AC discharge.
3-12
3. 1. 2. 7 Drum Cleaning (Removal of remained toner)
Some amount of toner that has not been transferred onto the printing paper is remaining on the
Drum.
This remained toner will be removed by the Cleaning Roller.
The Cleaning Roller is supplied with +450V (+/-5V), and there are some negative electric charges
on the Drum at this time.
As the Cleaning Roller is relatively “positive” and the Drum is “negative”, the toner moves from the
Drum to the Cleaning Roller.
Cleaning Roller
Drum
Remained toner Negative

electric charges
NOTE
If too much toner exists in a small area (like a trace of solid black image) the Cleaning Roller
may not be able to remove all of them.
But this toner is removed from the Drum in the Development Process.
3-13
3. 1. 2. 8 Fusing
After Transfer / Separation Processes, the printing paper is transported to the Fuser Unit.
The Fuser Unit mainly consists of the Fuser Roller and the Pressure Roller.
The Fuser Roller is very hot, and the Pressure Roller is strongly pressed to the Fuser Roller by the
spring.
The toner is firmly fused onto the printing paper by the heat and the pressure when the paper
passes through between these rollers.
Fuser Roller
Pressure Roller
3-14
3. 1. 3 Controlling the movement of toner in the
Developer Unit
There are 3 kinds of rollers called “Developer Roller”, “Regulation Roller” and “Toner Supply
Roller” in the Developer Unit.
Each roller is supplied with its own voltage.
In the following list, the voltage of the Developer Roller (-230V) is measured against the ground.
The other voltages mean the difference against the voltage of Developer Roller Bias.
Name of roller Supplied voltage

Developer Roller -230V +/-5V against the ground
Regulation Roller (Center) -80V +/-5V against the Developer Roller Bias
Regulation Roller (Both sides) 0V (Connected to the ground)
Toner Supply Roller The same voltage with the Developer Roller Bias
(Developer Roller and Toner Supply Roller are short circuited
being connected with the plate.)
Regulation Roller : Both sides Insulator Regulation Roller : Center

(0V : Connected to GND) (-80V against the Developer Roller Bias)
Developer Roller
(-230V against GND)
Toner Supply Roller

(Same voltage with the Developer Roller Bias)
NOTE
The Regulation Roller is divided into central area and both side areas by the insulator, and
individual voltage is supplied to each area.
3-15
Taking advantage of the difference of potentials among these rollers, the movement of toner is
controlled in the Developer Unit as follows.
1. The Toner Supply Roller carries the toner toward the Developer Roller.
2. When the toner reaches the contact point of these rollers, therefore, it moves onto the
Developer Roller.
Then the Developer Roller carries the toner toward the Regulation Roller.
3. The Regulation Roller is strongly pressed to the Developer Roller by the spring, and these
2 rollers move to the opposite direction each other at the contact point.
Even if the Developer Roller carries more toner than required, the Regulation Roller limits
the amount of toner that can pass through between 2 rollers. So very small amount of toner
can pass through between rollers and the rest is returned back to the inside.
As the voltage of Developer Roller is 80V higher than that of Regulation Roller (Center), the
toner which has passed through between rollers is firmly attracted to the Developer Roller.
Very thin layer of toner is evenly formed on the surface of Developer Roller as a result.
4. Much toner sticks onto the Regulation Roller when it is returned back to the inside.
This toner is scraped off by the Scraper which is contacted to the Regulation Roller.
Regulation Roller : Center Scraper

(-80V against the Developer Roller Bias)
Developer Roller Toner Supply Roller

(-230V against GND) (Same voltage with the Developer Roller)
3-16
5. The voltage of both sides of Regulation Roller is 0V as these parts are connected to the
ground.
It is higher than that of Developer Roller (-230V).
When the toner reaches the contact point of these rollers, therefore, it moves onto the
Regulation Roller.
The side areas of the Developer Roller are not covered with the toner as a result, so it is
possible to avoid the toner drops into the machine from the side.
Regulation Roller : Both Sides

(0V : Connected to GND)
Developer Roller
(-230V against GND)
Regulation Roller : Center

(-80V against Developer Roller voltage)
Toner area
Regulation Roller : Both sides Non-toner area

(0V : Connected to GND)
Developer Roller
(-230V against GND)
3-17
3. 1. 4 Toner Collection Process
As explained in [3.1.2.7 Drum Cleaning], the Cleaning Roller is supplied with +450V to remove the
remained toner from the Drum during the print cycle.
This toner gathered by the Cleaning Roller is returned to the Developer Unit in the following 3
cases.
(1) When the printer has finished printing out all the accumulated print jobs and then going to
stop.
(2) When the used roll paper is ended and changed with another one.
(3) When the used roll paper is changed from one to another because the print size specified in
the job is different.
This process to return the toner is called “Toner Collection Process”.

When the trailing edge of the last sheet passes over the Separation Area, the printer will take the
Toner Collection Process as follows rotating the Drum for 2 revolutions.
1. The Eraser Lamp throws light onto the Drum to remove the negative electric charges from
the Drum. The potential of Drum becomes 0V.
2. The voltage supplied to the Cleaning Roller is changed to -550V in the Toner Collection
Process.
As the potential of Drum becomes higher than that of Cleaning Roller, toner on the Cleaning
Roller moves onto the Drum.
Drum
Remained toner
Cleaning Roller
3-18
3. The voltage supplied to the Developer Roller is also changed to +350V (+/-5V) in the Toner
Collection Process.
As the potential of Developer Roller becomes higher than that of Drum, toner on the Drum
moves onto the Developer Roller.
Then the toner is carried into the Developer Unit by both the Developer Roller and the Toner
Supply Roller.
Remained Toner
Drum
Developer Roller
3-19
Reference
Voltages supplied to Regulation Roller and Toner Supply Roller are changed also as follows.
Name of roller Supplied voltage

Developer Roller +350V +/-5V against the ground
Regulation Roller -80V +/-5V against the Developer Roller Bias
(Center)
Regulation Roller 0V (Ground)
(Both sides)
Toner Supply Roller Same voltage with the Developer Roller Bias
Regulation Roller : Both sides Regulation Roller : Center

(0V : Connected to GND) (-80V against the Developer Roller Bias)
Developer Roller Toner Supply Roller

(+350V against GND) (Same voltage with the Developer Roller Bias)
3-20
3. 1. 5 Density Compensation Process
On rare occasion, loss of image density may occur under a special usage. TASKalfa 2420w has
the ability to reduce such loss of image density and this enables to maintain a satisfactory image
quality regardless of the machine usage.
Density Compensation Process will adjust Regulation (Developer) Bias according to their condition
to reduce loss of image density in such situation.
In Density Compensation Process, toner density on the surface of Photoconductive Drum is

measured by Density Sensor at regular time intervals. According to the result, Regulation
(Developer) Bias will be automatically adjusted to compensate image density.
Density Measure starts at regular intervals of 2 hours of Main Motor operating time, after the
completion of the current print queue.
1. Several solid toner patches are created on the surface of Photoconductive Drum as follows.
solid toner patch
Photoconductive Drum
Density Sensor
2. Density of all the patches is measured by Density Sensor (Density Measure). The average of
the patches (Density Value) is calculated.
3. If the Density Value does not meet Target Density, Regulation (Developer) Bias will be
automatically adjusted based on the current Adjustment Level.
 If the current Density Value is judged “not enough” (lighter than required), the next level will
be applied.
 If the current Density Value is judged “adequate”, the current level remains.
 There is possibility for the Density Value to be judged “too much enough” (darker than
required), then the previous level will be applied.
Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment Adjustment

Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
(default)
Developer Bias -180V -230V -230V -230V
(Negative)
Regulation Bias -80V -80V -120V -160V
against Developer Bias
4. The adjustment allows image density to stabilize for a satisfactory image quality regardless of
the machine usage.
NOTE
An applied Adjustment Level should be set to “1” every after replacing Developer Unit. For
further information, see [5.1.4 Developer Unit] [8.11 Special Operation Mode].
3-21
3. 2 Scan Process
3. 2. 1 Data flow in scan and copy

There are CIS Units, CIS Controller PCB (SVC CIS BD) and Main Board (SVC Main BD K) in the
scanner unit, which take image reading and processes the data.
1. The CIS Units read the image pattern of original, and then send the analog data to the CIS
Controller PCB.
2. The CIS Controller Boards converts the analog data into digital data, and then send to the Data
Controller PCB.
3. The Main Board takes the correct image process according to the UI setting.
Then it outputs the image data to the IPS through the USB 2.0.
4. The IPS output the image data to the printer part of TASKalfa 2420w through the Interface 8 in
case of “copy”, or it outputs to the Network PC through the LAN cable in case of “scan to file”.
CIS CIS CIS CIS CIS
Analog data
CIS Controller PCB CIS Controller PCB CIS Controller PCB CIS Controller PCB CIS Controller PCB
(A/D Conversion) (A/D Conversion) (A/D Conversion) (A/D Conversion) (A/D Conversion)
Digital data
Main Board
(Several image process)
USB 2.0
IPS (Controller)
Interface 8 LAN
Printer part Network PC
Printing out Saving as an

of the Copy image file
3-22
3. 2. 2 Positioning process of Image Block
The scanner part of TASKalfa 2420w reads the image of original with 5 - CIS (Contact Image
Sensor).
As these CIS are arranged in 2 rows, there occurs a vertical gap of image among the image blocks.
So it is necessary to remove this gap by vertical positioning process (Y offset).
Also the reading area of these 5 pieces of CIS overlaps each other some degree. It means some
image pixels are commonly included in the neighboring two Image Blocks. It is very hard to
recognize the image because many images are duplicated. To prevent this kind of problem, it is
necessary to remove the duplication of image pixels by horizontal positioning process (X overlap).
The Main Board performs these positioning processes.
NOTE
The TASKalfa 2420w performs these positioning processes (X overlap & Y offset) according
to the setting specified through Scanner Utility.
[Explanation]
5 pieces of CIS are arranged in 2 rows as the following illustration, with some amount of their
reading area overlapping each other.
So the reading data initially inputted to the Main Board is as follows.
(1) There occurs a vertical gap of image among the image blocks.
(2) Some image pixels are commonly included (duplicating) in the neighboring two Image
Blocks.
Reading areas
CIS
The image data before the positioning process
3-23
The Main Board removes the vertical gap among the Image Block according to the positioning
setting (Y offset) specified through Scanner Utility.
The image data before the positioning process
The image data after the positioning process (Y offset)
3-24
Also the Main Board removes the duplication of image pixels among the Image Blocks according
to the positioning setting (X overlap) specified through Scanner Utility.
The image data after the positioning process (Y offset)
The image data after the positioning process (X overlap)
3-25
Chapter 4
Electrical
page
4. 1 General information 4- 1
4. 2 Electrical Component Location 4- 2

4. 2. 1 Right 4- 2
4. 2. 2 Left 4- 3
4. 2. 3 Rear 4- 4
4. 2. 4 Front 4- 5
4. 2. 5 Process Frame / LED Head 4- 6
4. 2. 6 Main Frame 4- 7
4. 2. 7 Sensor on Media Path 4- 8
4. 2. 8 Cutter Unit 4- 9
4. 2. 9 Developer Unit 4-10
4. 2. 10 Fuser Unit 4-11
4. 2. 11 Scanner Unit 4-12
4. 3 Check & Adjustment of Analog Output from HV Power Supply 4-14

4. 3. 1 Situations necessary to check the analog output 4-14
4. 3. 2 Analog Voltage to Image Corona 4-15
4. 3. 3 Analog Voltage to Transfer Corona 4-17
4. 3. 4 AC Component to Separation Corona 4-19
4. 3. 5 DC Component to Separation Corona 4-21
4. 3. 6 Negative Developer Bias to Developer Roller 4-23
4. 3. 7 Positive Developer Bias to Developer Roller 4-25
4. 3. 8 Bias gap between Developer Roller and Regulation Roller 4-27
4. 3. 9 Positive Cleaning Roller Bias (Print Cycle) 4-29
4. 3. 10 Negative Cleaning Roller Bias (Toner Collection Process) 4-31
4. 1 General Information
This machine is mainly controlled by a microcomputer, which is located on DC Controller.
This microcomputer reads input signals from sensors, and outputs the operation signals to
motors, SSRs, solenoid, clutches and blowers on programmed timing.
Sensor Micro Computer Driver DC Load

(CPU & ROM)
DC Controller has an LED, meaning that 5VDC is applied on this DC Controller safely.
Generally the color of wiring is separated depends on the voltage.

0VDC Blue
5VDC Yellow
12VDC Brown
24VDC Orange
Signal in to DC Controller (sensors) Purple
Signal out from DC Controller Gray
CAUTION
There is a battery (CR2032) on the Motherboard of the controller.
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
As for the waste disposal of battery, dispose in accordance with local state and federal
relations.
4-1
4. 2 Electrical Component Location
4. 2. 1 Right
10
9
6
8
7
1
4 5
Item Symbol Signal name Name Type Function

1 SW1 - Switch AJ8R2004BBCF Switches ON/OFF the machine
(Power Switch)
2 MS1 - Switch FA1L-CA22 Shuts off the AC power to the
(Upper Unit Switch) DCP1 when the Upper Unit is open
4 LF1 - Noise Filter Removes the noise from the AC
line
120V model only
5 CB1 - Breaker X28-XQ1A-15 Protects the AC line from the over-
(for 120V model) current
X28-XQ1A-10
(for 230V model)
6 INLET - Noise Filter Assy 120V model Inputs the AC Power from a wall
Inlet Assy 230V model outlet
7 CL3 R1FD_CL Clutch MCA-30A Picks up the roll media’s leading
(Roll Feed Clutch) edge to wait position
8 CL2 FEED_CL Clutch MCA-30A Feeds the roll media
(Feed Clutch)
9 CL1 REGIST_CL Clutch (Registration MCA-30A Meets the image head and the
Clutch) leading edge of media
10 CL4 GUIDE_CL Clutch DSTC-40G Pushes up the guide plate (just
(Guide Clutch) after Tr/Sp) to control the LE
approach to Fuser Entrance Plate.
4-2
4. 2. 2 Left

1 BL3 FEED_BL Fan ASFN60372 Assists to transport media
(EXT_FAN) (Feed Blower)
2 HV1 HV_IM HV Power Supply EUK1MGA60HA Outputs the high voltage to each of
HV2 HV_TR the following components.
HV3 HV_AC
HVP4 (1) Image Corona (HV1)
OUTPUT2 BIAS_TRG (2) Transfer Corona (HV2)
OUTPUT3 BIAS_SW (3) Separation Corona (HV3)
OUTPUT5 (4) Developer Roller (OUTPUT2)
(5) Regulation Roller (OUTPUT3)
(6) Cleaning Roller (OUTPUT5)
NOTE
Developer Bias (OUTPUT 2, 3) is outputted (or stopped) by the signal “BIAS_TRG”.
The polarity of Bias is decided by the signal “BIAS_SW”
4-3
4. 2. 3 Rear
3 4
6
5
10
9
11 8

1 LF1 - Line Filter RG-208F2 Removes the noise from the AC
line
230V model only
2 M1 MAIN_TRG DC Motor DRG-6236-226 Drives the Drum, Developer Unit,
(Main Motor) Fuser Unit and media feeding
section
3 BL4 - Fan ASFN90372 Cools the IPS and other
(IPS Cooling Fan) components near the IPS
4 Image Process - IPS Image Process System for copy /
Assembly STF / plot
5 PW11720 - PW11720 PCB Assy PW11720 Overall sequence control
6 PW11724 - PC Controller PCB PW11724 - Lightning surge protector
- Shuts down the IPS
7 DCP1 - DC Power Supply ZWD225PAF- Outputs 24VDC, 5VDC, 0VDC
0524/J
8 DCP2 - DC Power Supply ZWS75AF- Supplies 12VDC to the UI and
12/J the PW11724
9 SSR1 HEAT1 Solid State Relay AQJ416V ON / OFF control of the Fuser
(120V) (H1)
AQJ426V
(230V)
10 RY1 HEAT-RY Relay G7L-2A-TUB - Supplies power to the Lamp
(DC24V) (H1)
- Stops power supply to the
Lamp when Thermostat (TS1) is
open
11 F1 - Fuse Protects the 24VDC from the
Walter
over-current
TSC3.15AH Use the designated fuse only.
4-4
4. 2. 4 Front
4
3

1 Touch - Touch Panel LCD Unit SLP0832-ETT- Touch Screen User Interface
Screen (UI) A02
LCD
2 MS5 DOOR_OPN Switch (Roll Deck AM51612C53 Detects Roll Deck Cover open
Cover open) N-A
3 MS6 HAND_DOOR Switch (Manual Feed CS1A-B2CA Detects Manual Feeder Table
Table open) open
4 MS7 SAMP_CUT Switch CS1A-B2CA - Starts an initial cut by a short
(Initial Cut Switch) press
- Starts a test print by a press in
3 seconds or more
4-5
4. 2. 5 Process Frame / LED Head
1
1
1
3 4

1 LED HEAD - LED HEAD UNIT 53TRC Creates latent Images on Drum
2 PW6693 - HV-ZD Assy PW6693 - Keeps the Grid Voltage
constant
- Controls the surface potential of
Drum
3 PW11755 - PW11755 Assy PW11755 Interface of LED Head Cable
from PW11720
4 PW6631 ER1 Eraser PCB A PW6631 Lights LED lamps to remove the
negative electric charges from
the Drum at the beginning of the
Print Process
4-6
4. 2. 6 Main Frame

1 PH8 DENS_S Sensor GP2Y40010K0 Detects the toner density on the
(Toner Density Sensor) F drum surface
Outputs analog voltage to
PW11720

2 BL1 / BL2 HEAT_BL Blower D12F-24BL 05 Exhausts the inside air
(equipped with the Ozone Filters)
3 MS2 - Switch FAIL-CA22 Shuts off the AC power to the
(Exit Cover Switch) DCP1 when the Exit Cover is
open
4-7
4. 2. 7 Sensor on Media Path
7
8
6
4
5
2
1

1 PH5 R1_SET_S Sensor PS119ED1 Detects whether the leading
(Roll Set Sensor) edge is at set position
2 PH4 RENC_S Sensor LG248NL1 Detects the distance of the roll
(Feed Encoder) media feeding
3 PH6 R_EDGE Sensor PS117ED1 Detects roll media feeding at the
(Feed Sensor) Roll Deck region
4 PH7 MANIN_S Sensor PS117ED1 Detects a cut sheet set
(Manual Feed Sensor)
5 PH1 REGIST_S Sensor PS117ED1 Detects media feeding at the
(Registration Sensor) Registration region
6 PH2 SEPS_S Sensor (Strip / LG248NL1 Detects media feeding at the
Separation Sensor) Separation region
7 PH9 GUIDE_S Sensor LG248NL1 Detects the Guide Plate’s
(Guide Plate Sensor) position
8 PH3 HEAT_EXIT Sensor LG248NL1 Detects media feeding at the
(Exit Sensor) Fuser region
4-8
4. 2. 8 Cutter Unit

1 M4 MCUTL Motor - Slides the cutter blade
MCUTR (Cutter Motor)
2 MS8 MSCUTL Switch (Cutter Home - Detects whether the cutter blade
MS9 MSCUTR Position Sensor) exists at the home position
4-9
4. 2. 9 Developer Unit

1 TLS1 TONER_S Sensor TSP15DA10C- Detects whether the toner exists
(Toner Sensor) 01 in the Developer Unit
2 M3 TONER_M DC Motor DMA-3150A Drives the Toner Hopper to
(Toner Supply Motor) supply the toner to the Developer
Unit
4-10
4. 2. 10 Fuser Unit

1 TS1 - Thermostat CH-152-35- Prevents over-heat
170
2 TH1 TH1 Thermistor 1 FS-K0120 Detects the temperature on the
central area of Fuser Roller
3 TH2 TH2 Thermistor 2 FS-K0121 Detects the temperature on the
Fuser Roller on the left
4 PH3 HEAT_EXIT Sensor LG248NL1 Detects the media at the exit
(Exit Sensor) area

5 H1 - Lamp US: 120V 1300w Heats up the central part of
EU: 230V 1300w Fuser Roller
4-11
4. 2. 11 Scanner Unit
3
2

1 - - Main Board (117) - Makes image processes to the
(data controller) digital data sent from SVC CIS BD
And then it sends the processed
image data to the controller
2 - - CIS Board (117) - Converts the analog data read by
(CIS controller) the CIS to the digital data
3 - - Switch CS1A- Emergency stop button
B2CA
4
4 4

4 - - Switch - Detects whether the Scanner
(Scanner Open Switch) Upper Unit is open
4-12
6 7 8 9 10
5
11

5 - - Sensor PS117ED1 - Detects the insertion of original
(Original Set Sensor) - Detects original widths A4
(Size Sensor A4) (Portrait), 8.5”, 9”
6 - - Sensor PS117ED1 Detects original widths A4
(Size Sensor A3) (Landscape), A3, 11”, 12”
7 - - Sensor PS117ED1 Detects original widths A2, 17”, 18”
(Size Sensor A2)
8 - - Sensor PS117ED1 Detects original widths A1, 22”, 24”
(Size Sensor A1)
9 - - Sensor PS117ED1 Detects original widths A0, 30”
(Size Sensor A0)
10 - - Sensor PS117ED1 Detects original widths 34”, 36”
(Size Sensor 914)
11 - - Sensor PS117ED1 - Detects the original mis-feed
(Original Sensor) - Detects the original’s leading edge
when the original is returned.
12
12
12
13

12 - - CIS Unit - (1) Reads the image of original
(CIS Class A/B/C/D) (2) Sends the analog data to the
SVC CIS BD
13 M6 - Motor Assembly - Transports originals
(Scanner Motor)
14 - - Power Board - - Converts the 24VDC to 12VDC,
(Scanner Power 5VDC, 3.3VDC.
Supply) - Driver Circuit of the Motor.
4-13
4. 3 Check & Adjustment of Analog
Output from HV Power Supply
4. 3. 1 Situations necessary to check the analog

output
It is necessary to check the analog output from High Voltage Power Supply after replacing the
following parts.
PW11720 PCB (DC Controller)

HV Power Supply PCB (EUK1MGA60HA)
Please check the analog output for each of the following part, and please adjust if it is out of the
specified range.
Each “Reference page” in the list shows how to check and adjust each item.
Check Item Reference page

Analog Voltage to the Image Corona 4-15
Analog Voltage to the Transfer Corona 4-17
AC Component to the Separation Corona 4-19
DC Component to the Separation Corona 4-21
Negative Developer Bias to the Developer Roller 4-23
Positive Developer Bias to the Developer Roller 4-25
Bias gap between Developer Roller and Regulation Roller 4-27
Positive Cleaning Roller Bias (Print Cycle) 4-29
Negative Cleaning Roller Bias (Toner Collection Process) 4-31
Reference
Please try to replace the PW11720 PCB or HV Power Supply PCB if you have the following
kinds of problem.
PW11720 PCB
(1) When the UI indicates abnormal indication although the UI has no problem.
(2) When the electric component such as motor or lamp does not work properly although
such component has no problem.
HV Power Supply PCB (EUK1MGA60HA)

When the output to Image Corona / Transfer Corona / Separation Corona / Developer Roller
/ Toner Supply Roller / Regulation Roller / Cleaning Roller is abnormal.
4-14
4. 3. 2 Analog Voltage to Image Corona
The standard value of the voltage outputted from the HV Power Supply PCB to the Image Corona
is 1.30 +/-0.05V.
Check and adjust the output current in the following way.
1. Connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to the “CP11” pin on the HV Power Supply PCB
(EUK1MGA60HA).
Also connect the “-” one to the “CPCOM”.
And then, select the DC volt range on the multi-meter.
CPCOM
CP11
multimeter
(DC)
2. Make a Test Print making reference to [8. 9 Test Print Mode] .

As the high voltage is supplied to the Image Corona during the Test Print, check the voltage
with the multi-meter.
Standard value of the output voltage to the Image Corona is 1.30 +/-0.05V.
4-15
3. Adjust the output voltage if it does not satisfy 1.30 +/-0.05V.
To adjust it, rotate the VR101 with a screwdriver.
VR101
multimeter
(DC)
4-16
4. 3. 3 Analog Voltage to Transfer Corona
The standard value of the voltage outputted from the HV Power Supply PCB to the Transfer
Corona is specified as follows.
Plain paper 1.00 +/-0.05V

Tracing paper 1.00 +/-0.05V
Film 1.00 +/-0.05V
Check and adjust the output current in the following way.
NOTE
The above values are just the standard values we have adjusted at the time of shipment.
Of course you may change these values according to the usage condition.
(EUK1MGA60HA).
Also connect the “-” one to the “CP22” pin.
CP22
CP21
multimeter
(DC)
4-17
2. Select the Test Print Mode, and make a test print using each type of paper (plain
paper, tracing paper & Film) making reference to [8. 9 Test Print Mode].
As the high voltage is supplied to the Transfer Corona during the Test Print, check the voltage
Standard values of the output voltages to the Transfer Corona are:

Plain paper 1.00 +/-0.05V
Tracing paper 1.00 +/-0.05V
Film 1.00 +/-0.05V
3. Adjust the output voltage if it does not satisfy the above specifications.
Select the Adjustment Mode, select each of following Sub Mode Numbers, and change the
setting value so that the output voltage satisfies the above specifications.
Refer to [8.6.3 029 to 034 Transfer Voltage] for the detail.
Sub Mode No. Contents

029 Transfer Voltage (Plain paper)
030 Transfer Voltage (Tracing paper)
031 Transfer Voltage (Film)
032 Transfer Voltage (Plain paper : Special)
033 Transfer Voltage (Tracing paper : Special)
034 Transfer Voltage (Film : Special)
4-18
4. 3. 4 AC Component to Separation Corona
The standard value of the AC Component outputted from the HV Power Supply PCB to the
Separation Corona is 5.00 +/-0.05V.
Check and adjust the AC Component in the following way.
(EUK1MGA60HA).
Also connect the “-” one to the “CPCOM” pin.
CP31
CPCOM
multimeter
(DC)
2. Make a Test Print making reference to [8. 9 Test Print Mode].

Standard value of the AC Component to the Separation Corona is 5.00 +/-0.05V.
4-19
3. Adjust the AC Component if it does not satisfy 5.00 +/-0.05V.
VR302
multimeter
(DC)
4-20
4. 3. 5 DC Component to Separation Corona
The standard value of the DC Component outputted from the HV Power Supply PCB to the
Separation Corona is -250 +/-5V.
Check and adjust the DC Component in the following way.
(EUK1MGA60HA).
Also connect the “-” one to the ground.
CP33
multimeter ground
(DC)

Standard value of the DC Component to the Separation Corona is -250 +/-5V.
4-21
3. Adjust the DC Component if it does not satisfy -250 +/-5V.
VR303
multimeter ground
(DC)
4-22
4. 3. 6 Negative Developer Bias to Developer Roller
The Negative Developer Bias means the voltage supplied to the Developer Roller during the Print
Cycle.
The standard value of the Negative Developer Bias is as follows for each type of paper.
Plain paper -230 +/-5V against the ground

Tracing paper -230 +/-5V against the ground
Film -230 +/-5V against the ground
Check and adjust the Negative Developer Bias in the following way.
NOTE
The above values are just the standard values we have adjusted at the time of shipment.
Of course you may change these values according to the usage condition.
1. Connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to the “OUTPUT2” pin on the HV Power Supply PCB
(EUK1MGA60HA).
OUTPUT 2
multimeter ground
(DC)
4-23
As the Negative Developer Bias is supplied to the Developer Roller during the Test Print, check
the voltage with the multi-meter.
The standard value of the Negative Developer Bias for each type of media is:
Plain paper -230 +/-5V against the ground

Tracing paper -230 +/-5V against the ground
Film -230 +/-5V against the ground
If the above values are not satisfied, go to the next step.
3. If the value (voltage) is -180 +/- 5V, Developer Bias may be automatically adjusted by Density
Compensation Process. (normal operation in such a case)
Enter Special Operation Mode and then “0006 Dev. Clear”.
The voltage “-180V +/- 5V” is correct when the above 7-digit value shows “0000000”.
7 digits (current Auto Supposed

Adjustment Level) Developer Bias
0000000 -180 +/-5V
0000001 / 0000002 / 0000003 -230 +/-5V
Refer to [8.11.3 Reset of Bias Adjustment by Density Compensation Process] for checking the
current Auto Adjustment Level.
If not satisfied, go to the next step for manual Developer Bias adjustment.
4. Select the Adjustment Mode, select each of following Sub Mode Numbers, and change the
setting value so that the output voltage satisfies -230 +/-5V against the ground.
Refer to [8.6.3 022 to 027 Developer Bias] for the detail.
Sub Mode No. Contents

022 Developer Bias (Plain paper)
023 Developer Bias (Tracing paper)
024 Developer Bias (Film)
025 Developer Bias (Plain paper : Special)
026 Developer Bias (Tracing paper : Special)
027 Developer Bias (Film : Special)
4-24
4. 3. 7 Positive Developer Bias to Developer Roller
The Positive Developer Bias means the voltage supplied to the Developer Roller during the
Cleaning Cycle.
The standard value of the Positive Developer Bias is 0.350 +/-0.005V against the CP42.
Check and adjust the Negative Developer Bias in the following way.
1. Connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to “CP41” pin on the HV Power Supply PCB
(EUK1MGA60HA).
Also connect the “-” one to “CP42”.
CP42
CP41
multimeter
(DC)
4-25
The Positive Developer Bias is supplied to the Developer Roller for some seconds after the
printed paper has been ejected.
Check the voltage with the multi-meter during that period.
The standard value of the Positive Developer Bias is 0.350 +/-0.005V against the CP42.
If this is not satisfied, go to the next step for the adjustment.
3. Adjust the Positive Developer Bias rotating the VR401, so that it should satisfy
0.350 +/-0.005V against the CP42.
VR401
multimeter
(DC)
4-26
4. 3. 8 Bias gap between Developer Roller and
Regulation Roller
The standard value of the Bias gap between Developer Roller and Regulation Roller is 80 +/-5V.
Check and adjust it in the following way.
1. Connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to the “OUTPUT3” pin on the HV Power Supply PCB
(EUK1MGA60HA).
Also connect the “-” one to the “OUTPUT2” pin.
OUTPUT 3
OUTPUT 2
multimeter
(DC)

As the Bias is supplied to both the Developer Roller and the Regulation Roller, check the
Bias gap between them with the multi-meter.
The standard value of the Bias gap between Developer Roller and Regulation Roller is
80 +/-5V.
If the above value is not satisfied, go to the next step 3 for the adjustment.
4-27
3. If the value (voltage) is “120 +/-5V” or “160 +/- 5V”, Regulation Bias may be automatically
adjusted by Density Compensation Process.
Enter Special Operation Mode and then “0006 Dev. Clear”.
The voltage “120V +/- 5V” is correct when the above 7-digit value shows “0000002”.
The voltage “160V +/- 5V” is correct when the above 7-digit value shows “0000003”.
7 digits (current Auto Supposed

Adjustment Level) Bias Gap
0000000 / 0000001 80 +/-5V
0000002 120 +/-5V
0000003 160 +/-5V
Refer to [8.11.3 Reset of Bias Adjustment by Density Compensation Process] for checking the
current Auto Adjustment Level.
If not satisfied, go to the next step for manual Regulation Bias adjustment.
4. Select the Adjustment Mode, select Sub Mode No.622, and change the value so that the
output voltage satisfies 80 +/-5V.
Refer to [8.6.3 622 Regulation Bias] for the detail.
4-28
4. 3. 9 Positive Cleaning Roller Bias (Print Cycle)
The Positive Cleaning Roller Bias means the voltage supplied to the Cleaning Roller during the
Print Process.
The standard value of the Positive Cleaning Roller Bias is +450 +/-5V.
1. Connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to the “OUTPUT 5” pin on the HV Power Supply PCB
OUTPUT 5
multimeter ground
(DC)

As the Positive Cleaning Roller Bias is supplied during the Test Print, check the voltage value
Standard value of the Positive Cleaning Roller Bias is +450 +/-5V.
4-29
3. Adjust the Positive Cleaning Roller Bias if it does not satisfy +450 +/-5V.
VR001
multimeter ground
(DC)
4-30
4. 3.10 Negative Cleaning Roller Bias
(Toner Collection Process)
The Negative Cleaning Roller Bias means the voltage supplied to the Cleaning Roller during the
Toner Collection Process, which is done after the completion of Print Process.
The standard value of the Negative Cleaning Roller Bias is -550 +/-5V.
1. Connect the “+” cable of the multi-meter to the “OUTPUT 5” pin on the HV Power Supply PCB
OUTPUT 5
multimeter ground
(DC)

The Toner Collection Process works for some seconds after the printed paper has been
ejected.
Check the voltage value with the multi-meter during that period.
Standard value of the Negative Cleaning Roller Bias is -550 +/-5V.
4-31
3. Adjust the Negative Cleaning Roller Bias if it does not satisfy -550 +/-5V.
VR002
multimeter ground
(DC)
4-32
Chapter 5
Mechanical
page
5. 1 Periodic Replacement 5- 1
5. 1. 1 Image Corona Unit 5- 1
5. 1. 2 Transfer / Separation Corona Unit 5- 6
5. 1. 3 Filters 5- 8 1476
5. 1. 4 Developer Unit 5-12 3424
5. 1. 4. 1 Replacement Procedure 5-12
5. 1. 4. 2 Using Wizard 5-33
5. 1. 5 Process Unit 5-38 3571
5. 2 Fuser Unit 5-43

5. 2. 1 Removing Fuser Unit 5-43
5. 3 Scanner Unit 5-50

5. 3. 1 Scan Glass Assy 5-50
5. 3. 2 CIS 5-51
5. 4 LED Head Unit 5-63

5. 4. 1 Replacing LED Head Unit 5-63
5. 4. 2 Focus Adjustment 5-74
5. 1 Recommended Periodic Replacement
This section describes the procedure of replacing some units that are recommended replacement
for preventive maintenance.
There are “light blue” stickers that show the “access point” for Periodic Replacement.
For detailed information of the Service Kit contents, see Chapter 6.
5. 1. 1 Image Corona Unit

1. Press the blue lever (1) on both sides to open the Upper Unit.
1
1
2. Release the belt (2) from the pulley (3).
5-1
3. Loosen 4 thumb screws (4) to release the Process Unit (5).
4
4
4 4
4. Hold the handgrip (6) on both sides. Pull the Process Unit (5) to the arrow direction to remove it
from the machine.
6
6
NOTE
THIS SIDE UP
(1) Gently place the Process Unit (5) on a flat
surface in the correct direction. Not doing so
may damage the Photoconductive Drum (7)
(shiny green cylinder). 7
(2) The Photoconductive Drum is one of the most important components for the printer to
obtain a satisfactory print image quality.
- Never touch the shiny green area of the Photoconductive Drum with a bare hand.
- Do not expose the Photoconductive Drum to light. It is recommended to shade the
whole Process Unit with a piece of plain bond roll paper.
5-2
5. Pick the plastic area (8) on both sides. Release the pins (10) from the hook.
Pull and remove the Image Corona Unit (9) from the Process Unit.
8 8
10
9
6. Install both the pins (10) to the hooks to seat the new Image Corona Unit in position.
NOTE
8
Again hold the plastic area (8) on both ends to
carry the Image Corona Unit.
Grabbing in the middle may deform the housing
and cause image defect.
8
5-3
7. Hold the handgrip (6) on both sides. Slightly tilt the Process Unit downward. Put the square
holes (11) onto the tapered edges of the positioning pins (12). Before inserting completely, pivot
the unit upward to face each other. Finally push the unit into the machine
12 12
11 11
6 6
11
8. Completely push the Process Unit in the machine to be reseated in position.

Then secure the thumb screws (4) to fix the Process Unit to the machine.
4
4
4 4
5-4
9. Return the belt (2) to the pulley (3).
10. Put your hands on the rear rim of the scanner unit just as you hold the Upper Unit.
Push the entire unit down to the arrow direction.
Hold here
Hold here
5-5
5. 1. 2 Transfer / Separation Corona Unit
1
1
2. Pick the plastic area (2) on both sides.

Pull and remove the Transfer / Separation Corona Unit (3) from the machine.
2 3 2
3. Pick the plastic area (2) on both sides of the new Transfer / Separation Corona Unit.
Lower it in the machine and place it in position.
NOTE
Again hold the plastic area (2) on both ends to carry the Transfer / Separation Corona Unit.
Grabbing in the middle may deform the housing and cause image defect.
5-6
Hold here
Hold here
5-7
5. 1. 3 Filters
1. Remove 3 Bind Head Screws (M4x6) (1) on each side.
1 1
1
1
2
2
3. Slightly lift Side Cover R (3) / Side Cover L (4) up to the arrow direction to remove then from the
machine.
4
3
5-8
4. Replace Filter A (5) in Side Cover L (4) with a new one.
5
4
5. Replace Filter B (6) in the duct of the machine with a new one.
6. Replace Filter C (7) in the duct of the machine with a new one.
5-9
7. Make sure that the Upper Unit is open.
Return Side Cover R (3) and Side Cover L (4) to the machine.
Note that the hook part (8) should be seated in the square hole (9) of the machine.
8. Reinstall 4 of 6 screws (1) to loosely fix Side Cover R (3) and Side Cover L (4).
1
1
NOTE
Do not tighten the 4 screws (1) completely at this time.
5-10
Hold here
Hold here
NOTE
The small top tab parts (10) should fit inside of Side Cover R (3) and Side Cover L (4).
10
10
10. Reinstall the rest 2 screws (1) and tighten all the screws (1) to secure Side Cover R (3) and
Side Cover L (4).
3 4
1 1
1
1
5-11
5. 1. 4 Developer Unit
Reference
You can check what to do in step by step with using “Developer Replacement Wizard” on the
touch screen. For better understanding, first please read [5.1.4.1 Replacement Procedure]
before running the wizard.
Example of use of the wizard is shown on [5.1.4.2 Using Wizard].
5. 1. 4. 1 Replacement Procedure
1. Remove 2 Bind Head Screws (M4x6) (1) to remove Cover 31 (2).
5-12
2. Remove 6 Bind Head Screws (M4x6) (3) to remove Cover 32 (4).
3
3
5-13
3. Disconnect 1 connector (5).
4. Remove 1 Bind Head Screw (6) on each side to remove the rail blocker R (7) / L (8).
7 7
9
9
NOTE
Be sure to open the Upper Unit. This will release the engagement between the Developer
Unit and the driving system. Removing the Developer Unit with the Upper Unit closed may
damage the drive gears.
5-14
6. Hold the handgrip (10) on both sides. 10
10
Pull the Developer Unit (11) to the arrow direction
to remove it from the machine.
11
7. Disconnect the ground wire (12) and 1 connector (13).
13
12
5-15
8. Release 3 tabs (14) on the front. Turn the Hopper Unit (15) to the arrow direction to remove it
from the DEVELOPER ASSY (11). Cover the toner supply hole (16) on the Hopper Unit with a
plastic bag (17) at this time to avoid scattering toner.
Replace the Developer Unit with a new one.
15
front 14 rear
11
17
15
16
Reference
17
The plastic bag that contains the Pads and the Nail Cleaning
tool can be used as a cover (17).
18
NOTE
The old Developer Unit should be packed with
the empty plastic bag (18) included in the kit.
Dispose of the unit according to local
regulations.
5-16
9. Remove the sticker (19) and the protection sheet (20) from the new Developer Unit.
Pinch tab area
20
19
19
Pinch tab area

Never pull here
10. Return the Hopper Unit (15). Again, cover he toner supply hole (16) on the Hopper Unit with a
plastic bag (17) to avoid scattering toner.
Insert the hook parts of the Hopper Unit into the square holes of the DEVELOPER ASSY. Make
sure that the Hopper Unit (15) is held on the DEVELOPER ASSY by the tab parts (14).
15
17
15
Hook & square holes

14
(See the next page)
5-17
NOTE
Be sure to confirm the followings after reinstalling the Hopper Unit to the Developer Unit.
- The hook parts (21: 2pcs) fit in the square holes (22).
- The tab parts (14: 3pcs) catch the frame’s rim. (Press the entire Hopper Unit)
22
21 14
11. Reconnect the ground wire (12) and the connector (13).
13
12
5-18
12. The Upper Unit should be open.
Hold the handgrip on both sides. Place the wheel (23) on the rail of the drive side (left hand).
Push the Developer Unit in the machine until it stops.
rail 23
23
rail
13. Slide the Developer Unit to the arrow direction (to your right hand).
5-19
14. Secure the rail blocker R (7) to the rail opening with the screw (6).
7
7
NOTE
Fully insert the rail blocker R (7). If it does not
go into the opening completely, please follow
the instruction(s) below to seat the Developer 7
Unit in position.
not fit in
1. Swing the Developer Unit up and down. This

allows the gears between the engine and the
Developer Unit to be engaged.
gear gear
(engine side) (Developer Unit)
2. Hold the handles on both sides of the Developer Unit to slide it to your right hand.
5-20
15. Secure the rail blocker L (8) to the rail opening with the screw (6).
8 8
16. Reconnect the connector (5).
Hold here
Hold here
5-21
18. Return Cover 32 (4) and Cover 31 (2).
4
NOTE
After replacing Developer Unit, you must set bias adjustment by Density Compensation
Process to “1”.
Otherwise a darker image appears because the adjusted values are too high voltage for the
refreshed Developer Unit.
19. Open the Toner Hatch (24) on the rear top.

You do not have to remove the Original Guide.
24
20. Shake the Toner Bottle (25) several times to

loosen the toner.
25
NOTE
After you shake the Toner Bottle well, proceed the later steps as soon as possible.
Having a pause after this may reduce smoothness of the toner. This would disturb a smooth
toner supply from the Toner Bottle to the printer.
5-22
21. Put the dent area (26) under the holder (27) to firmly seat the bottom plate of the Toner Bottle
(2) to the toner supply position.
from front
26
27
from right
25
27
from front
5-23
22. With pressing down the Toner Bottle (25), slide the green lever (28) to the arrow direction until
it stops. When it stops, wait 10 seconds as it is.
Gently tap the top of the Toner Bottle several times.
25
28
from right
NOTE
Gently press down the Toner Bottle. Pressing too much makes the lever (28) much heavier.
23. Slide the green lever (28) to the original position. Remove the Toner Bottle.
28
from right
NOTE
It is impossible to remove the Toner Bottle unless the lever (28) completely moves to the
original position.
Do not attempt to remove the Toner Bottle by force if the lever is not at the original position.
Doing so may damage toner supply system.
5-24
24. Add toner with the other spare Toner Bottle.
from right
25. Close the Toner Hatch (1).
26. Press “? - Help” on Home screen.
5-25
27. Press [Service].
28. On-screen Keypad appears.

Input “8495107” and press [Enter].
29. Service Configuration screen will appear.
5-26
30. Use the arrow keys to open [5/7 IPS Setup]. Press [Launch] in “IPS Service Software”.
31. Press [Yes].
32. Press [Login] to log in Service Mode.
5-27
33. Press [Special Operation] in Service Mode Home.
Operation Target screen appears.
34. Select [0006 Dev. Clear] from Name of mode menu. Press [Enter].
0006 Dev. Clear Initializes Developer / Regulation Bias adjusted with

Density Compensation Process
5-28
35. Confirmation screen appears.
Press [EDIT] to enter the input screen.
36. Input screen appears.

Input “1” with On-screen Keypad.
5-29
37. The value is displayed in “Count” area.
[Rewrite] will be activated.
Press [Rewrite] to apply the new value to the printer.
The value in “Reading” area will be changed to the new value.
38. Press [RETURN] to go back to Operation Target screen.

Select [0007 Toner Supply1] and press [Enter].
5-30
39. Confirmation screen appears. Press [Agree].
Toner supply / agitation starts. This will take 10 minutes to complete.
40. Once you press [Agree], it will turn deactivated. Press [Return].
5-31
41. The screen goes back to Operation Target Screen. The status window shows “warm up” during
toner supply / agitation.
After the completion, it changes to “standby”.
42. Do the same way on step 38 to 41. (twice in a row for 2 Toner Bottles)
5-32
5. 1. 4. 2 Using Wizard
This subsection describes only the summary of replacing procedure of Developer Unit.
For further details, see [5.1.4.1 Replacement Procedure].
2. Press [Service].

5-33
6. Press [Yes].
5-34
8. Press [Wizard].
9. Press [Developer Replacement Procedure].
5-35
10. Press [Login Hold].
11. The screen shows the procedure step by step. Press [] button to turn the pages.
Press [►] to start the slide show style.
Follow the instructions and replace Developer Unit.
12. Page 23/23 is the end of the procedure. Press [Login Hold].
13. Press [Reset] on the left.
5-36
14. Supply toner in 2 Toner Bottle in the kit.
from right
15. Press [Back], [Back]
16. Enter Special Operation Mode.
17. Select “Toner Supply1”. Run “Toner Supply1” twice in a row.
5-37
5. 1. 5 Process Unit
1
1
4
4
4 4
5-38
from the machine.
6
6
NOTE
THIS SIDE UP
5-39
5. Hold the handgrip (6) on both sides to take out the new Process Unit from the container.
6. Put the Process Unit on a flat surface.

Remove the desiccant (7) and the tapes (8). 8

9
5-40
holes (10) onto the tapered edges of the positioning pins (11). Before inserting completely, pivot
the unit upward to face each other. Finally push the unit into the machine
11 11
10 10
6 6
10
9. Completely push the Process Unit in the machine to be seated in position.

4
4
4 4
5-41
Hold here
Hold here
5-42
5. 2 Fuser Unit
5. 2. 1 Removing Fuser Unit

1 1
1
1
2
2
5-43
3. Slightly lift Side Cover L / R (3) up to the arrow direction to remove then from the machine.
3
3
4. Close the Upper Unit.
5-44
5. Open the Exit Cover (4).
6. Remove 2 screws (5) on each side to remove the face plate R / L (6).
5
5
6
6
5-45
7. Remove 5 connectors (7) on the right side.
7
7
8. Remove 4 screws (8) on each side to remove the Fuser Bracket L / R (9).
Front Left Front Right
9 9
8 8
8
8
Left Side Right Side
5-46
9. Close the Exit Cover (4).
10. Put your hands under the bottom of the Fuser Unit.
Pull and remove the Fuser Unit (10) from the machine.
10 10
NOTE
When you remount the Fuser Unit, fully push it in the machine. Check for this by the position
of the side pin (11) of the Fuser Unit.
11
11 Pin (11) completely

inserted to end
correct
Pin (11) not

inserted fully
wrong
5-47
10. Remove 1 screw (12) on each side to remove the hinge plate L / R (13).
13 13
12 12
11. Remove the Exit Cover (4) from the Fuser Unit.
4
4
(Continued on the next page)
5-48
NOTE
There is a metal collar (14) on each hinge pin of the Exit Cover. This works as a bearing.
hinge pin
14
5-49
5. 3 Scanner Unit
This section describes the procedure of replacing the individual components of the Scanner Unit.
5. 3. 1 Scan Glass Assy

1. On both sides, pull the levers (1) to unlock the Scanner Unit. Open the Scanner Unit.
1
1
2. Remove 4 screws (2) to replace Scan Glass Assy (3).
2 2
5-50
5. 3. 2 CIS
NOTE
A CIS is divided into several classes according to wavelength variations of their LED.
All the 5 pieces of CIS on a certain Scanner Unit should be in the same class to assure even
image quality (brightness, color quality and etc) among image blocks.
Be sure to check which CIS class is used to the scanner before replacing to avoid class
mixing. Otherwise even image quality can not be expected.
Equipped CIS class can be identified with the label on the rear of the Scanner Unit.
Label
(simplified procedure to check CIS class)
1. Remove Scanner Top Cover (1).
2. Push the blue levers (2) to open the Upper Unit.
2
2
(continued on the next page)
5-51
NOTE (cont.)
4
3. Loosen 1 screw (3) and remove 1 screw (4) to 5
remove the plastic cover (5).
1. On both sides, pull the levers (1) to unlock the Scanner Unit. Open the Scanner Unit.
1
1
2. On a CIS to be replaced, remove 2 small screws (2) with a sharp screwdriver.
5-52
3. Remove 4 screws (3) on the front.
3 3 3 3
4. Close the Scanner Unit. Loosen 4 screws (4) to release Scanner Top Cover (5).
5
4 4 4 4
5. Remove Scanner Top Cover (5) from the Scanner Unit.
5-53
6. Remove 2 screws (6) to remove USB Cable Bracket (7).
7. Disconnect 3 cables (8) from the touchscreen connector.

8
8. Open 3 wire saddles (9) to release all the cables (8) .
9
8
5-54
9. Remove 3 screws (10: M3x6).
10
10
10. Remove Scanner Inner Plate (11).

11
11. Remove all the connectors (12) from Main Board (13).
13
12 12
12
12
12
12
12
12
5-55
12. Remove 6 screws (14) to remove Main Board (13).
13
14 14 14
14 14 14
13
13. On all CIS Boards (15), remove 2 harnesses (16)

15
15 16
16
5-56
14. Open the Scanner Unit. On both sides, remove the tapes (17) to release the white / brown
harness.
17
17
15. Remove 4 screws (18) and the harness to remove Switch Bracket R / L (19).
18
18
19
19
5-57
16. Close the Scanner Unit. Open 3 wire saddles (20) to release the harnesses.
20
20
20
17. Open 5 wire saddles (21) to release USB Cable (22).

22
21 22 21 21
5-58
18. Remove 9 screws (23, M3x6) and 2 screws (24, M4x6).
23
23
24 24
23 23
23 23
5-59
19. Remove the Base Plate (25).
25
25
20. Remove 4 screws (26, M3x4 w/ TW) to remove the concerning CIS Bracket (27).
26 front
27
26 27
front
NOTE
Place CIS Bracket on a soft cloth or anything to
avoid damage on the Scan Glass Assy (28). 29
If you remove the Scan Glass Assy just in case,

still you should prepare such to avoid damage
on the sensor array of the CIS (29).
28
5-60
21. Remove 2 screws (30) to release CIS Board (31).
Carefully remove the flat cable (32) from CIS.
front
30
31 32
front
31
32
NOTE
When reassembling, gently insert Flat Cable (32) all the way in the terminal on the CIS.
Inserting incorrectly would lead abnormal scan image.
FRAGILE. Handle Flat Cable with great care.
5-61
22. Remove 6 screws (33: M3x4 w/ SW) and 2 screws (34: M3x4) disassemble the CIS Unit.
- upper bracket (35)
- small spacer (36)
- CIS (29)
- lower bracket with Scan Glass Assy (28)
front
33
33
front
34 33
33 33
35 36
36
29
28
23. Replace CIS with a new one.
24. Return all the parts in position.
25. Perform the scanner calibration. See [8.13.4 Scanner Utility].

This is a must!
Shading Sheet Stitch Adjustment Chart
5-62
5. 4 LED Head Unit
5. 4. 1 Replacing LED Head Unit
Reference
To obtain enough clearance to remove / install the LED Head Unit, it is recommended to
remove the Developer Unit.
1
1
5-63
4
4
4 4
from the machine.
6
6
NOTE
THIS SIDE UP
5-64
5. Open 5 wire clamps (8) to release the harnesses (9).
Disconnect 2 connectors (10).
8
8 10
8
8
8
6. On the right side, remove 1 screw (11) to release the bias terminal for Image Corona (12).
11
12
12
5-65
7. On the both sides, remove 1 screw each (13) to remove Spring Plates (14).
14 14
13 13
NOTE
There may be Spacer(s) under Sprint Plate (14).
This is for tolerance of Upper Unit. Be sure to remain / reinstall Spacer(s) to the original
position.
14
Spacer
5-66
8. On both sides, remove the front Thumb Screws (15).
Be careful that the spring on the screws does not drop in the machine.
15
15
15
9. On both sides, remove the rear screws (16).

Again be careful that the spring on the screws does not drop in the machine.
16 16
16
5-67
10. Pinch and hold the shaded area in the picture on both sides.
NEVER touch the LED Array (17) and the LED Head Bracket (18).
Slightly lift up the entire LED Head Unit (19). Pull the right side to outside first (A), and next
move the LED Head Unit to the arrow direction (B).
18 17 17 18
19
19
5-68
11. In the Upper Unit, there is the “hex. head pin” (20) on the rest (steel) of the LED Head Unit.
Check that the “marked face” comes to front. If not, turn the pin (20).
20 20
marked face
20
12. Take away the new LED Head Unit (21) from its container.
Again NEVER touch the LED Array (17) and the LED Head Bracket (18).
bottom 17
21
18
18
front
18
17
5-69
13. Again NEVER touch the LED Array and the LED Head Bracket.
Put the left side of the LED Head Unit (21) in the Upper Unit first (B), and then the right side (A).
Seat the unit so that the hex. head pin (20) goes into the square hole (22) on the LED Head
Unit.
21 A
21
22
22
20
20
5-70
14. On both sides, reinstall the rear screws (16: w/ spring).
16 16
16
15. On both sides, reinstall the front Thumb Screws (15: w/ spring).
15
15
15
5-71
16. On both sides, reinstall the Spring Plates (14) with the screws (13).
If there is Spacer(s), fix them together.
14 14
13 13
17. On the right side, reinstall the terminal plate (12) with the screw (11).
The tab parts should fit in the notch on the frame.
12 tab
11
tab
18. Reconnect 2 connectors (10). Put the harnesses (9) in the wire saddles (8).
8
8 10
8
8
8
5-72
holes (23) onto the tapered edges of the positioning pins (24). Before inserting completely,
pivot the unit upward to face each other. Finally push the unit into the machine
24 24
23 23
6 6
23
20. Completely push the Process Unit in the machine to be reseated in position.
4
4
4 4
5-73
Hold here
Hold here
23. Run LED Confirmation wizard in IPS Service Software.

A 36 inch / A0 / 914mm wide roll media (plain paper / bond) is required.
For further details, see [8.14 Confirmation Wizard]
5-74
5. 4. 2 Focus Adjustment
Reference
After replacing the LED Head Unit according to [5.4.1 Replacing LED Head Unit], an
uneven halftone bands may appear on the test print sheet.
Test Pattern #9 Size Code 3
darker areas in the middle darker area at the center
This requires a special adjustment to obtain a proper distance between the LED Head Unit
and the Photoconductive Drum (focus).
LED Head Unit
Should keep a proper distance to achieve

the designated focus
5-74
NOTE
A thin black or white line may appear on the test print sheet. This is not by the focus
(hardware) but the stitch adjustment (software).
O P
Q R
white line at LED Block border black line at LED Block border
O: Block A (left block) should move right to touch with Block B (center, reference block).
P: Block C (right block) should move right to keep apart from Block B.
Q: Block C should move left to touch with Block B.
R: Block A should move left to keep apart from Block B.
In this case, Stitch adjustment is required.
See [8.6.3 772, 773 Horizontal Alignment of LED Head Blocks].
5-75
1. Remove the Process Unit (1). For the detailed procedure, see [5.1.5 Process Unit].
NOTE
THIS SIDE UP
2. On the right side, remove 1 screw (3) to release the bias terminal for Image Corona (4).
4
4
5-76
3. On the both sides, remove 1 screw each (5) to remove Spring Plates (6).
6 6
5 5
4. On both sides, remove the front Thumb Screws (7).

Be careful that the spring on the screws does not drop in the machine.
7
7
5-77
5. On both sides, remove the rear screws (8).
Again be careful that the spring on the screws does not drop in the machine.
8 8
6. Pinch and hold the shaded area in the picture on both sides.
NEVER touch the LED Array (9) and the LED Head Bracket (10).
Slightly lift up the entire LED Head Unit. Keep lifting it up.
10 9 9 10
5-78
7. You can see the head of the “hex. head pin” (11) on both sides.
Specify which face comes to front. Read the column below about the pin’s head.
11
11
Reference
The pin’s head is a type of hexagon head. One of the six faces has a groove.
This face is called “marked face”.
11
11
Exactly, the head is NOT in regular hexagon.

Each face has different distance from the axis of the pin’s shaft.
+ 0.3mm
+ 0.2mm - 0.2mm
+ 0.1mm - 0.1mm
marked face
= +/- 0mm, reference
For example, on step 7, a face in front of you is not “marked face”. Suppose you turn the pin
in two faces (= 120 degrees) counter clockwise, then you can see the “marked face”.
In this case, the original front face was “-0.2mm” (yellow).
(see the next page)
5-79
NOTE
To turn the pin (11), follow the instruction below.
1. Lift up the LED Head Unit. Keep lifting it up.

Again NEVER touch the LED Array (9) and the LED Head Bracket (10).
11
11
9 10
10 9
2. Push and turn the pin (11).
Keep lifting up
11
Push and turn
(example) right side pin
5-80
8. Which side pin / which face to be used may depend on how uneven the gray bands show.
Read the column below.
Reference
Depending on which face comes to front, the

LED Head Unit is seated slightly frontward /
backward.
This means the LED Head Unit has the

possibility to be seated in 6 different positions,
determined by which face of the pin (11)
touches the rim of the square hole (12).
Please read as well the NOTE column on the 12

previous page that instructs how to turn the pin
(11).
Right Side of LED Head Unit
+ 0.2mm +/- 0mm - 0.2mm
11
12
Counter Clockwise Clockwise
Move forward Move backward
Side Section view from right
1 darker area in the middle

 Go to step 9.
2 darker areas in the middle / 1 darker area at the center

 Go to step 10.
5-81
9. If the gray bands get darker on one area in the middle (not the exact center), that is because the
LED Head Unit is seated skew.
In this case, first, remove the skew. Find a face of the pin (11) on the darker side only so that
unevenness of the gray bands could disappear or change as follows.
Turn the pin (11) according to the NOTE column instruction on page 5-64.
Worse: try another direction. OK to proceed the next step.
Done: proper focus achieved OK to proceed the next step.
<Example: LED Head Unit from top>
Clockwise
Move backward
This example shows that the skew is removed by turning the left pin clockwise in 240 degrees
to move the left side of the LED Head Unit backward.
NOTE
(1) The actual “original front face” may vary by the case.
(2) It is not always applied that the same face of the left / right pins comes to front.
For example, “-0.2mm” (yellow) on both sides would not stand for “completely no skew”.
As which direction (clockwise or counter clockwise, in other words, the LED Head Unit to
frontward or backward) to turn the pin may vary by the case, try both directions.
Compare the results to find the better direction.

When you remove the skew, go to the next step.
5-82
10. (A) The gray bands get darker on 2 areas in the middle (not the exact center),
(B) The gray bands get darker on 1 area at the center,
in these cases, find a face of the pin (11) on both sides in the same turn(s) so that unevenness
of the gray bands could disappear.
<Example>
Counter Clockwise Clockwise

Move forward Move backward
NOTE
(1) The actual “original front face” may vary by the case.
(2) It is not always applied that the same face of the left / right pins comes to front.
For example, the proper focus would be achieved if “+0.1mm” (light blue) comes to front
on the left pin and “+0.3mm” (red) does on the right pin at the same time.
As which direction (clockwise or counter clockwise, in other words, the LED Head Unit to
frontward or backward) to turn the pin may vary by the case, try both directions.
Compare the results to find the better direction.
Worse: try another direction. OK
5-83
Chapter 6
Maintenance
page
6. 1 Recommended Periodic Replacement Parts 6- 2
6. 2 Cleaning 6- 4
6. 2. 1 Cleaning Nail Stripping 6- 6
6. 3 Service Tool List 6- 8
6-1
6. 1 Recommended
Periodic Replacement Parts
For keeping the machine quality in a satisfactory level, a periodic replacement for the following
parts is recommended for “Preventive Maintenance (PM)”.
A damaged part (even if it looks not) may result in a critical failure.
Part Name Part Number Remarks

Service Kit A 1705J00UN0 Image Corona, Transfer / Separation Corona, Filters,
Pads (2 pcs), Nail Cleaning Tool
1476
Service Kit B 1705J00UN1 Image Corona, Transfer / Separation Corona, Filters,
Developer Unit, Pads (2 pcs), Nail Cleaning Tool,
Toner Bottle (2 bottles)
3424
Service Kit C 1705J00UN2 Transfer / Separation Corona, Filters, Developer Unit,
Process Unit (includes Image Corona, Drum), Pads (2 pcs),
Nail Cleaning Tool, Toner Bottle (2 bottles)
3571
The TASKalfa 2420w incorporates a Service Part Replacement Notification system. This can be
disabled in the “Service” settings on the touch screen (under “?”) if the notification is not desired.
Notification on the UI screen is to occur at the designated intervals.

The UI screen notification system requires a “count reset” once a Kit is installed (if the system is
enabled).
1. The notification window appears.  Press [RESET].

If the window disappears, enter the service mode and scroll page to [Service Configuration 7/7].
 press [Reset].
Notification Window Status on Service Mode
6-2
2. Press the button appeared besides the concerning Service Kit to be applied.
3. Input a “reset password” and press [Enter].
6-3
6. 2 Cleaning
Please make the following maintenances to keep the machine in a good condition and to get a
superior image.
Unit / Area Maintenance part Way of cleaning

Main Frame Machine inside Clean the machine inside with a dry cloth.
Upper Unit LED Head (Selfoc Lens) Gently wipe it with a soft dry cloth.
3 blocks NEVER use solvents such as alcohol.
Process Unit Photoconductive Drum Gently wipe the green surface area with a soft dry cloth.
Rotate the drive gear to turn Photoconductive Drum.
NEVER scratch the surface.
NEVER touch by a bare hand.
Exit Cover Nail Stripping Remove stuck substance on the top tip of the Nail Stripping.
12 pieces See [6.2.1 Cleaning Nail Stripping]
Scanner Unit Between Upper / Lower Wipe with a dry cloth
scanner unit
LED Head:
See [5.1.5 Process Unit] to remove Process Unit.
Wipe LED Head Block (A) (B) (C).

The metal plates attract possible scattering toner
to prevent the LED Head Blocks from getting dirt.
A B C
6-4
Photoconductive Drum:
See [5.1.1 Image Corona Unit] to remove Image Corona Unit.
Gently wipe the surface (green area).
Image Corona Unit
drive gear
Rotate the drive gear (on the right hand

grip side of Process Unit) to turn Photoconductive Drum
(cylinder with green surface)
Photoconductive Drum.
(slightly heavy load)
NOTE
(1) 10 to 20 sheets just after cleaning may temporarily get lost proper image quality.
(2) Always wipe the surface in one direction.

Failure to do so may damage the surface and result in defective imaging.
Correct
Wrong Wrong Wrong
Scanner Unit:
Wipe each Scan Glass (1), Pinch Roller (2), Feed Roller (3), Press Roller (4) with a dry cloth.
2
1 4
3
1
2
3
6-5
6. 2. 1 Cleaning Nail Stripping
1. Open the Exit Cover (1).
2. Press down the beam (2) on the Fuser Door, and put the Pads in the gap on both sides.
Reference
Putting the Pads raises the Nail Stripping to rise. This allows easier works in the later step.
6-6
3. Pinch the Nail Cleaning Tool as shown in the following pictures.
(Read the column below to clean the Nail Stripping.)
NOTE
(1) There are extremely hot parts inside the Fuser Door.
Never touch any hot parts to avoid burning yourself.
(2) Move the Nail Cleaning Tool to the arrow direction only.
(3) You do not have to remove Nail Stripping from the machine. The pictures above are
shown for easy understanding.
6-7
6. 3 Service Tool List
Here is the table to list special tools for field service.
It is recommended to check them through in Parts Manual and Publication Bulletin for the latest
information.
Part Name
(Part Number)
Appearance / Usage Requirement Related Section
SHADING SHEET 8.13.4.1 Shading (Calibration)
(mono/color calibration) (w/ bar code)
(305JZ70210)
SCANNER 8.13.4.2 Feed Distance (1:1)

ADJUSTMENT CHART
(Feed Distance)
(305H680020)
STITCH ADJUSTMENT 8.13.4.3 Position (Stitching)

CHART
(Position)
(305JG74560)
Scanner Utility Windows 2000 / XP 8.13.4.1 Shading (Calibration)

Version 1.31 or later w/ scanner unit USB driver 1.30 or later 8.13.4.2 Feed Distance (1:1)
(Scanner adjustment) 8.13.4.3 Position (Stitching)
8.13.5 Scanner Firmware Update
6-8
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Page
7. 1 Troubleshooting - Printer Errors 7- 3
7. 1. 1 Countermeasures - Call Operator Errors 7- 3
7. 1. 1. 1 J-0103 / 0203 Roll Deck Feeder Jam 7- 3
7. 1. 1. 2 J-0104 / 0204 / 1004 Registration Jam 7- 4
7. 1. 1. 3 J-0105 / 0205 / 1005 Process Unit Jam 7- 4
7. 1. 1. 4 J-0106 / 0206 / 1006 Fuser Jam 7- 4
7. 1. 1. 5 Deck Jam 7- 4
7. 1. 1. 6 Manual Set NG 7- 4
7. 1. 1. 7 J-1300 / 1400 Door Open while printing 7- 4
7. 1. 1. 8 Toner Empty 7- 7
7. 1. 1. 9 Roll Empty 7- 7
7. 1. 2 Countermeasures - Call Service Errors 7- 8
7. 1. 2. 1 E-0000 / 0002 / 0004 Fuser Error 7-10
7. 1. 2. 2 E-0001 Fuser Error 7-11
7. 1. 2. 3 E-0003 Fuser Error 7-12
7. 1. 2. 4 E-0005 Fuse Error 7-12
7. 1. 2. 5 E-0010 Main Motor Error 7-13
7. 1. 2. 6 E-0013 Paper Tray Motor Error 7-13
7. 1. 2. 7 E-0020 Counter Error 7-14
7. 1. 2. 8 E-0031 / 0032 / 0033 High Voltage Output Error 7-14
7. 1. 2. 9 E-0034 Bias Output Error 7-15
7. 1. 2.10 E-0040 Cutter Error 7-15
7. 1. 2.11 E-0050 FPGA Error 7-16
7. 1. 2.12 E-0070 Developer Error 7-16
7. 1. 2.13 E-0080 / 0081 Density Sensor Error 7-16
7. 1. 2.14 E-0090 Eraser LED Error 7-16
7. 2 Troubleshooting - Image Quality Defects 7-17

7. 2. 1 Basic Image Adjustment 7-17
7. 2. 2 Countermeasures - Image Quality Defects 7-18
7. 2. 2. 1 Halftone is too light 7-18
7. 2. 2. 2 Halftone and solid black are too light 7-19
7. 2. 2. 3 The whole image is extremely light 7-20
7. 2. 2. 4 Density is uneven 7-21
7. 2. 2. 5 Totally appeared foggy image 7-21
7. 2. 2. 6 Foggy image or blurred black wide line (vertical) 7-22
7. 2. 2. 7 Clear black thin line (vertical) 7-22
7. 2. 2. 8 White line (Vertical) 7-23
7. 2. 2. 9 Void of image 7-24
7. 2. 2.10 Dirt on the back of the print 7-25
7. 2. 2.11 Defective fusing 7-25
7. 2. 2.12 Defective image placement, No Leading Edge 7-26
7. 2. 2.13 Jitter 7-26
7. 2. 2.14 Image looks not sharp 7-27
7. 2. 2.15 Uneven image density (vertical) 7-27
7. 2. 2.16 Completely white (No image) 7-28
7. 2. 2.17 Completely black 7-28
7. 2. 2.18 Crease of paper 7-29
7-1
7. 2. 2.19 Double image 7-30
7. 2. 2.20 Dirt on the print (Offset) 7-31
7. 2. 2.21 Crease on Long Print (and image void at a time) 7-31
7. 3 Troubleshooting - Scanner Defects 7-32

7. 3. 1 Countermeasures - scanner operation 7-32
7. 3. 1. 1 Original can not be set (Scanner does not transport) 7-32
7. 3. 1. 2 Scanner does not start scanning from the original set position 7-32
7. 3. 1. 3 Original can not be set (Original feeding does not stop) 7-32
7. 3. 1. 4 Original is mis-fed 7-33
7. 3. 1. 5 Motor rotates endlessly at the time of turning on 7-33
7. 3. 1. 6 Scanner is not recognized 7-33
7. 3. 2 Countermeasures - scanner image quality 7-34
7. 3. 2. 1 Completely black 7-34
7. 3. 2. 2 Vertical black lines 7-34
7. 3. 2. 3 Vertical white lines 7-34
7. 3. 2. 4 Some image is lost at the boundary of Image Blocks 7-35
7. 3. 2. 5 Vertical image gap between Image Blocks 7-35
7. 3. 2. 6 Image quality is not good 7-35
7. 3. 2. 7 Density is different between left and right 7-35
7. 4 Touch Screen Calibration 7-36
7. 5 Internal Counter Error 7-44
7-2
7. 1 Troubleshooting - Printer Errors
7. 1. 1 Countermeasures - Call Operator Errors
7. 1. 1. 1 J-0103 / 0203 Roll Deck Feeder Jam
Reference
Delay : Paper arrives the sensor much later than required timing.
Stay : Paper exists on the sensor for longer time than required.
Remained : Paper has already existed on the sensor when turning on the machine.
Cause Checking Checking Result Treatment

order
Mis-feed of paper 1 Does the paper mis-fed occur between Yes Remove the mis-fed paper.
Roll Set Sensor and Feed Sensor?
Feed Sensor 2 Check the status of Feed Sensor in the No 1. Is there any problem with
(PH6) Signal Status Mode of the Service Mode. the Drawer Connector
which connects the
Signal Code : 105 (Feed Sensor) machine and the Roll
Deck.
Is the status “L” when the paper is not
passing beside the sensor? 2. Check if there is any
And is it “H” when the paper is passing problem with the wire
beside the sensor? connected to the Feed
Sensor.
3. Replace the Feed Sensor

if there is no problem with
the wire.
Cutter Home 3 Check the status of Cutter Home Position No 1. Check if there is any
Position Sensor Sensors in the Signal Status Mode of the problem with the wire
(MS8 & MS9) Service Mode. connected to the Cutter
Home Position Sensor.
Signal Code :
094 (Cutter Home Position Right) 2. Replace the Cutter Home
095 (Cutter Home Position Left) Position Sensors if there
is no problem with the
Is the status “H” when the Cutter is at wire.
each home position?
And is it “L” when the Cutter is not at the
home position?
Driving mechanism 4 Check the operation of Feed Clutch in No Replace the Feed Clutch or
the Operation Check Mode of the Service Main Motor if it is defective.
Mode.
Device Code : 10 (Feed Clutch)
Open and close Roll Deck and check if

Main Motor rotates correctly. Does each
Feed Clutch and Main Motor operate
correctly?
7-3
7. 1. 1. 2 J-0104 / 0204 / 1004 Registration Jam
order
Media mis-feed 1 Does the paper mis-fed occur around the Yes Remove the mis-fed paper.
Registration Roller?
Registration 2 Check the status of Registration Sensor No 1. Check if there is any
Sensor (PH1) in the Signal Status Mode of the Service problem with the wire
Mode. connected to the
Registration Sensor.
Signal Code : 100 (Registration Sensor)
2. Replace the Registration
Is the status “L” when the paper is not Sensor if there is no
passing beside the sensor? problem with the wire.
And is it “H” when the paper is passing
beside the sensor?
Upper Unit 3 Is the Upper Unit closed firmly until it is No 1. Close the Upper Unit
locked? firmly.
(Is the pressure around the Registration
Roller correct?) 2. Adjust the pressure
around the Registration
Roller.
Driving mechanism 4 Check the operation of Registration No Replace the Registration
Clutch in the Operation Check Mode of Clutch or Main Motor if it is
the Service Mode. defective.
Device Code : 11 (Registration Clutch)

Registration Clutch and Main Motor
operate correctly?
7. 1. 1. 3 J-0105 / 0205 / 1005 Process Unit Jam

order
Mis-feed of paper 1 Does the paper mis-fed occur around the Yes Remove the mis-fed paper.
separation area?
Separation Sensor 2 Check the status of Separation Sensor in No 1. Check if there is any
(PH2) the Signal Status Mode of the Service problem with the wire
Mode. connected to the
Separation Sensor.
Signal Code : 010 (Separation Sensor)
2. Replace the Separation
Is the status “H” when the paper is not Sensor if there is no
passing beside the sensor? problem with the wire.
And is it “L” when the paper is passing
beside the sensor?
Transfer / 3 Is the Transfer / Separation Corona Unit Yes Install the Transfer /
Separation Corona installed to the machine correctly? Separation Corona Unit
correctly.
Is the Corona Wire broken? Yes Replace the Corona Wire.
HV Power Supply 4 Is the output from the HV Power Supply No Replace the HV Power
to the Separation Corona correct? Supply.
7-4
7. 1. 1. 4 J-0106 / 0206 / 1006 Fuser Jam
order
Mis-feed of paper 1 Does the paper mis-fed occur around the Yes Remove the mis-fed paper.
fuser area?
Flap Guide Plate 2 Is Flap Guide Plate (just before Fuser No Open it, clear its range of
Unit) close properly? motion.
It may catch the harness of the sensor
(PH9, GUIDE_S).
Exit Sensor (PH3) 3 Check the status of Exit Sensor in the No 1. Check if there is any
Signal Status Mode of the Service Mode. problem with the wire
connected to the Exit
Signal Code : 011 (Exit Sensor) Sensor.
Is the status “H” when the paper is not 2. Replace the Exit Sensor
passing beside the sensor? if there is no problem with
And is it “L” when the paper is passing the wire.
beside the sensor?
7. 1. 1. 5 J-1300 / 1400 Door Open while printing

order
Upper Unit / Exit 1 Is Upper Unit / Exit Cover open before Yes Close the concerning nit
Cover open the completion of printing? firmly.
7. 1. 1. 6 Deck Jam
order
Mis-feed of paper 1 Does the paper mis-fed occur in the Roll Yes Remove the mis-fed paper.
Deck?
Roll 1 Set Sensor 2 Check the status of Roll Set Sensor and No 1. Check if there is any
(PH7) Feed Sensor in the Signal Status Mode problem with the wire
Feed Sensor of the Service Mode. connected to each
(PH6) sensor.
Signal Code : 105 (Roll Set Sensor)
111 (Feed Sensor) 2. Replace the concerning
sensor if there is no
Is the status of each sensor “H” when problem with the wire.
you set the roll paper?
7-5
7. 1. 1. 7 Manual Set NG
order
Mis-feed 1 Have you already set the cut sheet paper Yes Remove the paper.
to the Bypass Feeder before you turned
on the machine?
Manual Set Sensor 2 Check the status of Manual Feed Sensor No 1. Check if there is any
in the Signal Status Mode of the Service problem with the wire
Mode. connected to the Manual
Set Sensor.
Signal Code : 008 (Manual Set Sensor)
2. Replace the Manual Set
Is the status “L” when the paper is not Sensor if there is no
passing beside the sensor? And is it “H” problem with the wire.
when the paper is passing beside the
sensor?
Registration 3 Check the status of Registration Sensor No 1. Check if there is any
Sensor in the Signal Status Mode of the Service problem with the wire
Mode. connected to Registration
Sensor.
Signal Code : 100 (Registration
Sensor) 2. Replace the Registration
Sensor if there is no
Is the status “L” when the paper is not problem with the wire.
passing beside the sensor? And is it “H”
when the paper is passing beside the
sensor?
Driving mechanism 4 Check the operation of Registration No Replace the Registration
Clutch in the Operation Check Mode of Clutch or Main Motor if it is
the Service Mode. defective.
Device Code : 11 (Registration Clutch)

Registration Clutch and Main Motor
operate correctly?
7-6
7. 1. 1. 8 Toner Empty
order
Toner Hopper 1 Is there enough toner in the Toner No Add toner to Toner Hopper.
Hopper?
Toner Supply 2 Turn on the machine and check the No 1. Check if there is any
Motor (M3) action of Toner Supply Motor at that time. problem with the wires
among Toner Supply
Does Toner Supply Motor operate Motor, Driver PCB B and
correctly in both cases? PW11720 PCB.
2. Replace the Toner
Supply Motor if there is
no problem with the wire.
Toner Sensor 3 Confirm that the Toner Sensor is not No Replace the Toner Sensor.
(TLS1) buried in the toner. Yes Replace the PW11720 PCB.
Then check the status of Toner Sensor in
the Input/Output Mode of the Service
Mode.
I/O Signal Code : 107 (Toner Sensor)
Is the status “H” when the Toner Sensor

is covered with the toner?
And is it “L” when the sensor is not
covered?
7. 1. 1. 9 Roll Empty
order
Mis-feed of paper 1 Is there a paper anywhere in the Yes Open the Exit Cover and the
machine? Engine Unit, and then
remove the paper.
(Cut the paper manually if it
has not been cut yet.)
Switch (MS5) 2 Check the status of the following signal in No 1. Check if there is any
the Signal Status Mode of the Service problem with the wire
Mode. connected to the Switch
(MS5).
Signal Code : 009 (Roll Deck Open)
2. Replace the Switch
Is the status “L” when the Roll Deck is (MS5) if there is no
closed? problem with the wire.
And is it “H” when the Roll Deck is
opened?
7-7
7. 1. 2 Countermeasures - Call Service Errors
The followings are the names of Service Call Errors and the conditions that those errors occur.
Error Code Error Indication Conditions

E-0000 Fuser Temperature Rising Error Fuser Temperature does not reach 50 oC
within 120 seconds after turning on.
E-0001 Fuser Over Temperature Error Fuser Temperature reaches over 200 oC.
E-0002 Fuser Low Temperature Error 1. Fuser Temperature at the time of
turning on was 50 to 100 oC, but it
does not rise up to 120 oC within 150
seconds after that.
2. Fuser Temperature at the time of
turning on was higher than 100 oC, but
it does not rise up to the setting
temperature within 270 seconds after
that.
E-0003 Fuser Temperature Abnormal Fall The difference of temperature between
Error center and side of fuser becomes 50 oC or
more.
E-0004 Fuser Temperature Abnormal Fall The Lamp of fuser lights (Signal HEAT1
Error is “H”) to heat up the Fuser Roller in the
ready condition, but even 1 oC of
temperature rise can not be
accomplished within 30 seconds.
E-0005 Fuse Error Fuse (F1) is broken.
E-0010 Main Motor Error The Main Motor Output Detection Signal
(MAINM_LD) continues to be “H” for 3
seconds or longer when the Main Motor is
rotating.
E-0013 Paper Tray Motor Error The Paper Tray Motor Output Detection
Signal (CSETM_LD) continues to be “H”
for 3 seconds or longer when the Paper
Tray Motor is rotating.
E-0020 Counter Error The Counter Connection Detection Signal
(COUNT_OPN) continues to be “L” for 1
second or longer after turning on.
E-0031 Image Corona Output Error The Image Corona Output Detection
Signal (IM_LD) continues to be “L” for 1
second or longer when the Image Corona
is ON.
E-0032 Separation Corona Output Error The Separation Corona Output Detection
Signal (AC_LD) continues to be “L” for 1
second or longer when the Separation
Corona is ON.
E-0033 Transfer Corona Output Error The Transfer Corona Output Detection
Signal (TR_LD) continues to be “L” for 1
second or longer when the Transfer
Corona is ON.
7-8
Error Code Error Indication Conditions
E-0034 Bias Output Error Bias Output Detection Signal (BIAS_LD)
continues to be “L” for 1 second or longer
when a specified bias is supplied to the
corresponding Developer Unit
components.
E-0040 Cutter Error 1. The Cutter Home Sensor Signal
(MSCUT_L or MSCUT_R) does not
change to “H” within 100 millisecond
since the Cutter has started the
operation.
2. The Cutter Home Sensor Signal
(MSCUT_L or MSCUT_R) does not
change to “L” within 1 second since
the Cutter has started the operation.
E-0050 FPGA Error Initialization of FPGA is failed after
turning on.
E-0070 Developer Error 1. The Connector J-253 is not
connected.
2. The Switch (MS4) is “open” condition,
which detects open/close of Engine
Unit or Toner Hatch.
E-0080 Density Sensor Error Density Sensor cannot be calibrated
E-0081 correctly before Density Measure.
E-0090 Eraser Lamp Error 1. The connector J-227 / J-228 is not
connected.
2. Eraser Lamp (PW6631) is broken.
7-9
7. 1. 2. 1 E-0000 / 0002 / 0004 Fuser Error
E-0000: Fuser Temperature Rising Error
E-0002: Fuser Low Temperature Error
E-0004: Fuser Temperature Abnormal Fall Error

order
Error clearance 1 Have you cleared the fuser error in the Yes Wait until the Fuser Unit is
Special Operation Mode? enough cooled down.
Then select the Special
Operation Mode and clear
the concerning error.
Wires 2 Are wires among Lamp (H1), Solid State No Connect them properly.
Relay (SSR1) and Thermistors (TH1 &
TH2) connected properly?
Lamp (H1) 3 Unplug the machine, and then check the No Replace the Lamp.
resistance of Lamp (H1) with the multi-
meter.
Is it 15k ohm or lower?

Thermistors 4 Select the Information Mode, and then No Replace the concerning
(TH1 & TH2) check the temperature of fuser detected Thermistor.
by Thermistors (TH1 & TH2).
Item No. : 00 (Fuser temperature 1)

01 (Fuser temperature 2)
Is each temperature normal?

DC Power Supply 5 Confirm that the machine is turned on, No Replace the DC Power
(DCP1) and then check the voltage of the orange Supply if there is no problem
or Fuse line (J220-4, 220-5, 220-6). with the wires.
Is it 24V?
Confirm that the machine is turned off, Yes Replace the Fuse.
and then check whether or not each
Fuse is broken.
Is any Fuse broken?

Relay (RY1) 6 Select the Operation Check Mode, and No Replace the Relay.
then change the signal of the following
signal to “H”.
Device Code : 22 (Fuser Relay)
And check the resistance between the

following points.
Between RY1-2 and RY1-4
Between RY1-6 and RY1-8
Is the each resistance almost 0 ohm?
7-10
order
Solid State Relay 7 Select the Operation Check Mode, and Yes Replace the Solid State
(SSR1) then change the signal of the following Relay
signals to “H”.
No Replace the PW11720 PCB.
Device Code : 22 (Fuser Relay)
21 (Fuser Lamp 1)
Then check the voltage between J600

and J601.
Is it 0V?
CAUTION:
Change the signal of “21” (Fuser
Lamp 1) to “L” after checking!
7. 1. 2. 2 E-0001 Fuser Error

E-0001 : Fuser Over Temperature Error

order
Solid State Relay 3 Does the error occur again even if you Yes Replace the Solid State
(SSR1) have cleared it in the Special Operation Relay.
Mode?

7-11
7. 1. 2. 3 E-0003 Fuser Error
E-0003: Fuser Temperature Abnormal Fall Error

order

7. 1. 2. 4 E-0005 Fuse Error

order
Wires 1 Is the wire between the Fuse and No Connect it properly.
PW11720 PCB connected properly?
DC Power Supply 2 Confirm that the machine is turned OFF, No Replace the Fuse with a new
(DCP1) and then check the Fuse. one.
or Fuse
Is it OK?
3 Confirm that the machine is turned on, No Replace the DC Power
and then check the voltage of the orange Supply if there is no problem
line (J220-5). with the wires.
Is it 24V?
7-12
7. 1. 2. 5 E-0010 Main Motor Error
order
Wires 1 Is the wire between Main Motor and No Connect it properly.
or Fuse line (J220-5). with the wires.
Is it 24V?
Fuse is broken.
Is any Fuse broken?

Main Motor (M1) 3 Check the operation of Main Motor in the No Replace the Main Motor.
Operation Check Mode of the Service
Mode.
Device Code : 00 (Main Motor)
Does the Main Motor operate correctly?
7. 1. 2. 6 E-0013 Paper Tray Motor Error

order
Wires 1 Is the wire between Paper Tray Motor No Connect it properly.
and PW11720 PCB connected properly?
or Fuse line. with the wires.
Is it 24V?
Fuse is broken.
Is any Fuse broken?

Paper Tray Motor 3 Check the operation of Main Motor in the No Replace the Main Motor.
(M3) Operation Check Mode of the Service
Mode.
Device Code : 33 (Paper Tray Motor)
Does the Main Motor operate correctly?
7-13
7. 1. 2. 7 E-0020 Counter Error (E-020)
order
Service Mode 1 Has the setting of Adjustment Mode Item Yes Set it to “0”.
No.753 set to “1” ?
7. 1. 2. 8 E-0031 / 0032 / 0033 High Voltage Output Error

E-0031: Image Corona Output Error
E-0032: Separation Corona Output Error
E-0033: Transfer Corona Output Error

order
Wire 1 Are wires among Image Corona, HV No Connect them properly.
Power Supply PCB and PW11720 PCB
connected properly?
2 (For Image Corona / Cleaning Roller No Correct it properly.
only)
Is the spring on the left bottom of the
Process Unit OK?
Image Corona 3 Is the Image Corona dirty? Yes Clean each Corona Wire,
Grid Plate and housing.
Cleaning Roller 4 Does the bias terminal plate touch to No Remove and reapply
Cleaning Roller shaft properly? conductive grease to
Cleaning Roller shaft.
Relocate the bias terminal
plates properly.
Is grease applied enough? No Remove and reapply
conductive grease to
Cleaning Roller shaft.
Transfer Corona 5 Is the Transfer Corona dirty? Yes Clean each Corona Wire
and housing.
Separation Corona 6 Is the Separation Corona dirty? Yes Clean each Corona Wire
and housing.
HV Power Supply 7 Can you fix the problem if you replace Yes OK
the HV Power Supply?
7-14
7. 1. 2. 9 E-0034 Bias Output Error
order
Wires 1 Are wires among Developer Unit, HV No Connect them properly.
Power Supply PCB and PW11720 PCB
connected properly?
Developer Unit 2 Is the toner spill out from the Developer Yes Clean each Corona Wire,
Unit? Grid Plate and housing.
(Or is there any similar problem?)
Is the high voltage of Regulation Roller Yes Replace the Regulation
leaking? Roller.
(The resistance between the central part
of Regulation Roller and the Ground is
5 mega ohm or smaller if leaking.)
GND
Multi-meter
7. 1. 2. 10 E-0040 Cutter Error

order
Wires 1 Is the wire between Cutter Unit and No Connect it properly.
Cutter Home 2 Check the status of the following signals No Replace the Cutter Unit.
Position Sensors in the Signal Status Mode of the Service
(MS8 & MS9) Mode.
Signal Code :
094 (Cutter Home Position Right)
095 (Cutter Home Position Left)
Is the status “L” when the Cutter is at

each home position?
Cutter Motor 3 Check the operation of Cutter in the No Replace the Cutter Unit.
(M4) Operation Check Mode of the Service
Mode.
Device Code : 27 (Cutter Motor 1)

28 (Cutter Motor 2)
Does the Cutter operate?
7-15
7. 1. 2. 11 E-0050 FPGA Error
order
PW11720 PCB 1 Can you fix the problem if you replace Yes OK
the PW11720 PCB?
7. 1. 2. 12 E-0070 Developer Error

order
Wires 1 Is the wire between Developer Unit and No Connect it properly.
7. 1. 2. 13 E-0080 / 0081 Density Sensor Error

order
Wires 1 Is the wire between Toner Density No Connect it properly.
Sensor and PW11720 PCB connected
properly?
Density Sensor 2 Can you fix the problem if you replace No Replace PW11720 with a
(PH8) Density Sensor? new one.
7. 1. 2. 14 E-0090 Eraser Lamp Error

order
Wires 1 Is the wire between Toner Density No Connect it properly.
Sensor and PW11720 PCB connected
properly?
Is the spring on the left bottom of the

Process Unit OK?
Eraser Lamp 2 Can you fix the problem if you replace No Replace PW11720 with a
the Process Unit? new one.
7-16
7. 2 Troubleshooting - Image Quality
7. 2. 1 Basic Image Adjustment
The followings are the settings specified to the image creation components.
When a defective image is printed out, please check whether or not these settings are satisfied for
the beginning.
Component Check Point Designated voltage Way of adjustment Corona Wire Height
(PW11720)
Image Corona CP11 (+) 1.3 +/-0.05VDC VR101
CPCOM (-)
11mm
Transfer Corona CP21 (+) 1.0 +/-0.05VDC Adjustment Mode
CP22 (-) No.029 (Plain)
No.030 (Tracing)
No.031 (Film)
11 mm
Separation Corona CP31 (+) 5.0 +/-0.05V VR302

(AC) CPCOM (-)
10.4mm
Separation Corona CP33 (+) -250 +/-5VDC VR303
(DC) Ground (-)
Negative Developer OUTPUT2 (+) -230 +/-5VDC Adjustment Mode
Roller Bias Ground (-) No.022 (Plain)
No.023 (Tracing)
No.024 (Film)
Positive Developer CP41 (+) 0.350 +/-0.005V VR401
Roller Bias CP42 (-)
Toner Supply Roller OUTPUT1 (+) the same voltage as -
Bias OUTPUT2 (-) Developer Bias
Regulation Roller OUTPUT2 (+) -80 +/-5VDC Adjustment Mode
Bias OUTPUT3 (-) No.622
Positive Cleaning OUTPUT5 (+) +450 +/-5VDC VR001
Roller Bias Ground (-)
Negative Cleaning OUTPUT5 (+) -550 +/-5VDC VR002
Roller Bias Ground (-)
NOTE: Developer / Regulation Bias may be controlled by Density Compensation Process.
7-17
7. 2. 2 Countermeasures - Image Quality
7. 2. 2. 1 Halftone is too light
Check the following matters with the Test Pattern No.1 S(0) and No.3 S(0).
If necessary use other Test Patterns.

order
1 Try to readjust each image creation Yes OK
component according to [7.2.1 Basic
Image Adjustment].
Is the problem fixed?
LED Head 2 Is the Lens Array of LED Head dirty? Yes Clean it.
Paper 3 Can you fix the problem if you use a Yes 1. If the paper was
newly unpacked paper? humidified, instruct the
customer of the way store
the paper.
2. If the paper was not the
specified one, explain the
customer that some
image problem may
occur in that case.
Image Corona 4 Is the Image Corona dirty? Yes Clean each Corona Unit,
Grid Plate and housing, or
replace the Corona Unit if it
is too dirty.
Is the input voltage to the Image No Readjust the input voltage.
Corona correct? Replace the HV Power
Supply PCB.
Eraser Lamp 5 Does the Eraser Lamp light properly? No 1. Check the wire
connected to the Eraser
Lamp.
2. Check or replace the
Eraser Lamp.
Transfer Corona 6 Is the Transfer / Separation Corona Yes Clean each Corona Unit, or
dirty? replace the Corona Unit if it
is too dirty.
Is the input voltage to the Transfer No Readjust the input voltage.
Corona correct? Replace the HV Power
Supply PCB.
Contact points of 7 Is each Electrode Plate on the left of the No Try to install the Developer
Developer Bias Developer Unit surely contacted to the Unit so that they are
Electrode Plate on the machine side? contacted each other.
And supply the conductive
grease to the Electrode
Plates.
PCB the HV Power Supply PCB?
Installation of 9 Is the driving gear on the right of the No Reseat Developer Unit in
Developer Unit Developer Unit surely fitted to the position.
driving mechanism on machine side? Check the concerning gears.
Developer Unit 10 Is the Developer Roller evenly covered No Check the whole Developer
with the toner? Unit to find the cause.
Yes Replace the Process Unit
7-18
7. 2. 2. 2 Halftone and solid black are too light

order
Image Adjustment].
2 Turn off the machine in the middle of Yes Go on to the step 3.
printing, and then check the toner No Go on to the step 7.
image on the Drum.
Is the toner image looks normal?

Process Unit 3 Is the Process Unit seated by the 4 No Reseat the Process Unit and
thumb screws properly? fix it with the thumb screws
properly.
Reinstall the drive belt.
Transfer Corona 4 Is the Transfer/Separation Corona No Install it correctly.
installed to the machine correctly?
Is the high voltage of Transfer Corona Yes Clean the Transfer Corona.
leaking?
the paper.
customer that some
image problem may
occur in that case.
Lead Wire 6 Is the resistance of Lead Wire about 10 No Replace the Lead Wire.
kilo ohm, which connects the HV Power
Supply and the Transfer Corona?
Input voltage to the 7 Is a correct voltage supplied from the No Readjust the input voltage.
Transfer Corona HV Power Supply to the Transfer Replace the HV Power
Corona? Supply PCB.
Dirt of the LED 8 Is the LED Head dirty? Yes Clean it.
Head
Developer Unit 9 Is the Developer Roller evenly covered No Check the whole Developer
with the toner? Unit to find the cause.
10 Is the Developer Unit firmly pressed No Remove the Developer Unit,
toward the Drum? and then install it to the
machine correctly.
Installation of 11 Is the driving gear on the right of the No Check the concerning gears.
Developer Unit Developer Unit surely fitted to the
driving mechanism on machine side?
Toner Sensor 12 Is there enough toner in the Developer No 1. Check the wire or the
Unit? connector connected to
the Toner Sensor.
2. Check the Toner Supply
Motor.
3. Check the proper amount
of toner remains in the
Hopper Unit.
4. Check the Toner Sensor.
Yes Replace the Process Unit.
7-19
7. 2. 2. 3 The whole image is extremely light

order
Image Adjustment].
the paper.
customer that some
image problem may
occur in that case.
properly.
4 Turn off the machine in the middle of Yes Go on to the step 5.
printing, and then check the toner
No Go on to the step 8.
image on the Drum.
Is the toner image looks normal?

Transfer Corona 5 Is the Transfer/Separation Corona No Install it correctly.
installed to the machine correctly?
Is the high voltage of Transfer Corona Yes Clean the Transfer Corona.
leaking?
Lead Wire 6 Is the resistance of Lead Wire about 10 No Replace the Lead Wire.
kilo ohms, which connects HV Power
Input voltage to the 7 Is a correct voltage inputted from the No Readjust the input voltage.
Transfer Corona HV Power Supply to the Transfer Replace the HV Power
Corona? Supply PCB.
Driving mechanism 8 Is the Developer Unit driving normally? No Check the driving
of Developer Unit mechanism.
Developer Unit 9 Is the Developer Unit firmly pressed No Remove the Developer Unit,
toward the Drum? (Are Counter Rollers and then install it to the
at both sides of the Developer Roller machine correctly.
touch the Drum)
Lead Wire 10 Is the Lead Wire to supply the No Connect the Lead Wire
Developer Bias correctly connected? correctly.
Developer Bias 11 Is the Developer Unit supplied with the No Check the contact points of
Developer Bias correctly? Developer Bias, and also
check the HV Power Supply.
7-20
7. 2. 2. 4 Density is uneven

order
properly.
Image Corona 2 Is the Image Corona dirty? Yes Clean the Image Corona, or
replace the Corona Unit.
Is the height of Corona Wire different Yes Adjust the height properly.
between left and right?
Installation of 3 Is the Developer Unit firmly pressed No Remove the Developer Unit,
Developer Unit toward the Drum? (Do Counter Rollers and then install it to the
at both sides of the Developer Roller machine correctly.
touch the Drum Unit?)
LED Head 4 Is the Lens Array dirty Yes Clean it.
Eraser Lamp 5 Are all LED of the Eraser Lamp light No 1. Replace the Eraser
properly during the print? Lamp.
2. Replace the PW11720
PCB.
Developer Unit 6 Is the Developer Roller evenly covered No 1. Clean Regulation Roller.
with the toner? 2. Reinstall Scraper.
Is the toner accumulating evenly in the No Level the machine correctly.
Developer Unit?
7. 2. 2. 5 Totally appeared foggy image


order
properly.
Image Adjustment].
Developer Unit 3 Is the Developer Roller insulated from No Check the Developer Roller
the ground? and connector.
Image Corona 4 Is the foggy image printed even if you Yes Check the output voltage
print a completely white pattern? from the HV Power Supply
to the Image Corona.
If it is not correct, readjust it.
Developer Bias 5 Is the Developer Unit supplied with a No Check the output voltage
correct Developer Bias during the print? from the HV Power Supply
to the Developer Unit.
If it is not correct, readjust it.
Or replace the HV Power
Supply PCB
Photoconductive 6 Have you used the Photoconductive Yes Replace the Process Unit
Drum Drum longer than its part life?
7-21
7. 2. 2. 6 Foggy image or blurred black wide line (vertical)

order
Light from the 1 Is any light from the outside thrown onto Yes Install the outer cover
outside the Drum? correctly.
Image Corona 2 Is the Image Corona dirty? Yes Clean the Image Corona, or
Developer Unit 3 Is the Developer Roller evenly covered No Check if the Regulation
with the toner? Roller is fixed at the proper
position.
If not, fix it at the correct
position.
7. 2. 2. 7 Clear black thin line (vertical)


order
Image Corona 1 Is there something like filament on the Yes Remove it.
Grid Plate, which is contacted to the
Drum?
Is the Image Corona dirty? Yes Clean the Image Corona, or
Foreign substance 2 Is there some foreign substance on Yes Remove it.
each Corona Unit or LED Head, which
is contacted to the Drum?
Photoconductive 3 Is there any black line or damage on Yes Clean the Photoconductive
Drum the Drum, of which position Drum.
corresponds with the black line on the Replace the Process Unit if it
print? is damaged. Be sure to find
the cause of the damage.
7-22
7. 2. 2. 8 White line (Vertical)

order
Image Corona 1 Is there something like filament on the Yes Remove it.
Grid Plate, which is contacted to the
Drum?
Dirt of the LED 2 Can you fix the problem if you clean the Yes OK
Head LED Head?
Transfer/Separation 3 Is there any foreign substance or dirt on Yes Clean the Transfer /
Corona the Transfer/Separation Corona? Separation Corona.
Developer Unit 4 Is the Developer Roller evenly covered No Check whether or not there
with the toner? is damage or foreign
substance on the Regulation
Roller.
Entrance of Fuser 5 Is there any foreign substance or dirt Yes Clean it off
Unit around the entrance area of the Fuser
Unit?
Photoconductive 6 Is there any damage on the Drum, Yes Clean the Photoconductive
Drum which runs to the direction of Drum Drum.
rotation. Replace the Process Unit if it
is damaged. Be sure to find
the cause of the damage.
7-23
7. 2. 2. 9 Void of image

order
1 Print out the Test Patter No.7 (halftone). Yes Go to the step 2.
Can you find void of image on the print?
Paper 2 Can you fix the problem if you use a Yes 1. If the paper was humidified,
newly unpacked paper? instruct the customer of the
way store the paper.
customer that some image
problem may occur in that
case.
Developer Unit 3 Does the void of image appear on the Yes 1. Clean the Counter Rollers
print constantly Keeping about 160mm at both sides of the
of interval? Developer Roller.
2. Wipe the Developer Roller
with a dry cloth.
3. Replace the Developer
Roller if damaged.
Is the void of image mainly runs Yes 1. Check if there is enough
vertically as follows? toner in the Developer Unit.
2. Also select the Device
Status Mode and check the
Toner Sensor Signal
(Device Code: 107).
It must be “L” when the
toner is not covering the
Toner Sensor. If not,
replace the Toner Sensor.
Photoconductive 4 Does the void of image appear on the Yes Clean the Photoconductive
Drum print constantly Keeping about 251mm Drum.
of interval? Replace Process Unit if
damaged. Be sure to find the
cause of the damage.
No Go to [7.2.2.18 Crease of
Paper]
7-24
7. 2. 2.10 Dirt on the back of the print

order
Image Adjustment].
Transfer 2 Are Transfer Guides or the black rubber Yes Clean them.
Guide Plates area of the guide plate near Transfer / After that, check the distance
Separation Corona dirty with the toner? between Transfer Guide and
Drum. (It should be 0.5 to
0.7mm.)
Developer Unit 3 Is too much toner accumulating under Yes Clean the Developer Unit.
the Developer Roller?
Machine inside 4 Is the inside of the machine dirty with Yes Clean it, and also find where
the toner? the toner came.
Fuser Unit 5 Is the Guide Plate at the entrance of Yes Clean it.
Fuser Unit dirty with the toner?
Are Fuser Roller and Pressure Roller Yes Clean them
dirty with the toner?
7. 2. 2.11 Defective fusing


order
Fuser Unit 1 Is the Fuser Roller properly heated up No Refer to [7. 1. 2. 1 Fuser
after turning on the machine? Error (E-001, E-002 &
E-004)] to check the Fuser
Unit.
Paper 2 Is the type of paper selected on the UI No Select the correct paper type
same with that of actually installed on the UI.
paper?
Can you fix the problem if you use a Yes 1. If the paper was
the paper.
customer that some
image problem may
occur in that case.
Fusing temperature 3 Does the fusing temperature specified Yes Is there any part which is
setting in the Service Mode suits with the burnt? Replace that part if
weight (gram/square meter) of paper? burnt.
No Set the fusing temperature
correctly.
Fusing pressure 4 Print the Test Patter No.2 S(0) with a No Adjust the fusing pressure
(Nip) tracing paper (36” or A0), and turn off correctly.
the machine in the middle of printing.
Remove the print from the machine and
check the “nip width”.
Is it 8.5 to 9.0mm?
(Measure at 2 mm from the edge.)
2mm 2mm
8.5 to 9.0mm
7-25
7. 2. 2.12 Defective image placement, No Leading Edge
Correct leading margin is 5mm (+/-2mm).

order
Setting of Leading 1 Is the Leading Registration or Leading No Adjust it properly.
Registration Margin properly adjusted in the Service
Mode?
Feed rollers 2 Have you used the feeding rollers for Yes Replace them.
very long term?
Registration Clutch 3 Does the Registration Clutch operate No Replace Registration Clutch.
correctly without slipping?
7. 2. 2.13 Jitter

order
Photoconductive 1 Does the jitter appear on the print Yes 1. Check if there is any
Drum and its driving constantly keeping about 251mm of damage or foreign
mechanism interval? substance on Pulley on
the drum shaft.
2. Check if there is any
foreign substance between
Drum and Counter Rollers
of Developer Unit.
Does the jitter appear on the print Yes Check the engagement of
constantly keeping about 3mm of Pulley Gear on the Drum
interval? with Belt 4.
Developer Unit 2 Does the jitter appear on the print Yes Replace the Developer Unit
constantly keeping about a certain with a new one.
distance of interval listed below?
9.0mm
12.0mm
16.9mm
21.1mm
31.7mm
144.0mm
Fuser Unit 3 Does the jitter appear on the print Yes Check for Fuser Drive Gear,
constantly keeping about 125mm of attached foreign substance.
interval?
7-26
7. 2. 2.14 Image looks not sharp
Check the following matters with the Test Pattern No.1 S(0).

order
Dirt of the LED 1 Is the LED Head dirty? Yes Clean it.
Head
Installation of LED 2 Remove the LED Head, and then re- Yes OK
Head install it to the machine.
Transfer / 3 Is the Transfer / Separation Corona Yes Clean it.
Separation Corona dirty?
7. 2. 2.15 Uneven image density (vertical)


order
Image Corona 1 Is the Image Corona dirty? Yes Clean it.
Transfer/Separation 2 Is the Transfer/Separation Corona Yes Clean it.
Corona dirty?
Installation of LED 3 Remove the LED Head, and then re- Yes OK
Head install it to the machine.
4 Is the density of any image block Yes Adjust the density. (See
different from that of other blocks? [8.6.3 008 to 010 Strobe
Time for Main Pixel])
Replace the entire LED

Head Unit with a new one.
5 Is the width of abnormal density area Yes Replace the entire LED
about 8mm as follows? Head Unit with a new one.
8mm
7-27
7. 2. 2.16 Completely white (No image)

order
Developer Unit 1 Is the Developer Unit correctly pressed No Reseat the Developer Unit in
to the Drum? position.
Driving mechanism 2 Does the Developer Roller rotate during No Check the driving
of Developer Unit the print? mechanism of Process Unit.
Developer Bias 3 Is each Electrode Plate on the right of No Try to install the Developer
the Developer Unit surely contacted to Unit so that they are
the Electrode Plate on the machine contacted each other.
side? And supply the conductive
grease to the Electrode
Plates.
LED Head 4 Are connectors of signal cable firmly No Connect them firmly.
connected to the LED Head?
Turn off the machine in the middle of No Replace the LED Head.
printing, and then check the toner
image on the Drum.
Is there any toner image on the Drum?

Transfer/Separation 5 Is the Transfer Corona Wire broken? Yes Replace it.
Corona Is the Transfer/Separation Corona Unit No Install it correctly.
correctly installed to the machine?
If the high voltage leaking from the Yes Check the Transfer /
Transfer Corona? Separation Corona to find
the cause for leaking.
Lead Wire of 6 Is the connection of Lead Wire correct? No Connect it correctly.
Transfer Corona
Is the resistance of Lead Wire about 10 No Replace the Lead Wire.

kilo ohms, which connects HV Power
the PW11720 PCB?
7. 2. 2.17 Completely black


order
Image Corona or 1 Is the Image Corona Wire broken? Yes Replace it.
HV Power Supply Is the tension of the Corona Wire No Replace it.
PCB correct?
Is the Corona Wire correctly stretched No Check whether or not the
with the spring? spring is transformed.
Is a proper high voltage supplied to the No Adjust the high voltage, or
Image Corona? replace the HV Power
Supply PCB
Is the housing of Image Corona No Replace the Zener PCB.
insulated from the ground?
the PW11720 PCB?
7-28
7. 2. 2.18 Crease of paper

order
paper?
the paper.
customer that some
image problem may
occur in that case.
Is the Dehumidify Heater ON although Yes Turn off the Dehumidify
the air is not humid. Heater.
Lamp (H1) of Fuser 2 Does the Lamp light correctly? No Replace it.
Fuser Entrance 3 Is there any deform of Fuser Entrance Yes Clean or replace it.
Guide Guide or something on the Fuser
Entrance Guide?
Remove Pressure Roller and measure No Turn the adjuster screw(s) to
the location height of Fuser Entrance reach the correct height.
Guide. Is the height correct?
Guide Plate Height Adjuster
From the frame bottom surface, (to both sides)
Side : 57.0mm
Middle : 61.0mm
Fuser Bottom Unit
Center
Is it 8.5 to 9.0mm?
2mm 2mm
Turn the bolt to adjust.
8.5 to 9.0mm
7-29
7. 2. 2.19 Double Image

order
paper?
the paper.
customer that some
image problem may
occur in that case.
Lamp (H1) of Fuser 2 Does the Lamp light correctly? No Replace it.
Fuser Entrance 3 Is there any deform of Fuser Entrance Yes Clean or replace it.
Guide Guide or something on the Fuser
Entrance Guide?
Remove Pressure Roller and measure No Turn the adjuster screw(s) to
the location height of Fuser Entrance reach the correct height.
Guide. Is the height correct?
Guide Plate Height Adjuster
From the frame bottom surface, (to both sides)
Side : 57.0mm
Middle : 61.0mm
Fuser Bottom Unit
Center
Is it 8.5 to 9.0mm?
2mm 2mm
Turn the bolt to adjust.
8.5 to 9.0mm
Fusing Temperature 5 Does the fusing temperature specified Yes Is there any part which is
in the Service Mode suits with the burnt? Replace that part if
weight (gram/square meter) of paper? burnt.
No Set the fusing temperature
correctly.
7-30
7. 2. 2.20 Dirt on the print (Offset)

order
paper?
Developer Unit or 2 Does the paper have dirt before it Yes Check the Developer Unit or
Transfer/Separation enters the Fuser Unit? Transfer/Separation Corona
Corona to find the cause.
Fuser Unit 3 Clean the Fuser Roller. Yes Decrease the setting value
Do you still have the problem even after of fusing temperature (-3 to -
the cleaning? 5).
No OK
7. 2. 2. 21 Crease on Long Print (and image void at a time)

The following procedure may address a crease on a long print.
If a crease and image void can be seen at a time, follow this section.

order
Fuser Unit 1 Is everything on [7.2.2.18 Crease of No Refer to [7.2.2.18 Crease of
paper] clear? paper] and check all the
points.
Developer Unit 2 Is everything on [7.2.2.9 Void of Image] No Refer to [7.2.2.9 Void of
Process Unit clear? Image] and check all the
points.
7-31
7. 3 Troubleshooting - Scanner Defects
7. 3. 1 Countermeasures - Scanner operation
7. 3. 1. 1 Original can not be set (Scanner does not transport)
order
Sensor 1 Is the original detected? No 1. Tap the UI screen to
(Is it shown on the UI?) cancel the sleep mode.
2. Switch the UI screen to

Copy or Scan mode.
3. Check the sensor which

detects the leading edge
of original.
If broken replace it.
Check this sensor.

USB Cable 2 Is the USB Cable connected correctly? No Connect it correctly.
Data Controller 3 Can you fix the problem if you replace Yes OK
Board the Data Controller Board?
7. 3. 1. 2 Scanner does not start scanning from the original set

position
order
Foreign substance 1 Is there any foreign substance under Yes Remove it.
the Upper Unit?
Motor 2 Does the Motor rotate? No Check the Motor, and
replace it if broken.
+24VDC 3 Is +24VDC supplied to the scanner? No Check the DC Power Supply
on the printer part.
Replace it if broken.
Data Controller 4 Can you fix the problem if you replace Yes OK
Board the Data Controller Board?
7. 3. 1. 3 Original can not be set (Original feeding does not stop)

order
Sensor 1 Is any sensor broken? Yes Replace it.
7-32
7. 3. 1. 4 Original is mis-fed
order
the Upper Unit?
7. 3. 1. 5 Motor rotates endlessly at the time of turning on

order
the Upper Unit, which blocks the light of
sensor?
7. 3. 1. 6 Scanner is not recognized

order
USB Driver 1 Does the PC recognize USB? No Check the USB Driver in
Device Manager.
USB Cable 2 Is there any problem with the USB Yes Replace the USB Cable.
cable, such as breakage, short-circuit
and damage of connector pin?
DC Power Supply 3 Is the DC Power Supply on the printer No Replace the DC Power
part normal? Supply.
Data Controller 4 Prepare another PC which can Yes Replace the Data Controller
Board recognize another type of USB PCB.
Scanner.
Is it also impossible to recognize the SC
with this PC?
7-33
7. 3. 2 Countermeasures – Scan Image Quality
7. 3. 2. 1 Completely black
order
Calibration 1 Can you fix the problem if you make Yes OK
Shading (Calibration)?
(Refer to [8.13.4.1 Shading].)
Cable of CIS 2 Is the cable of each CIS connected No Connect it properly, or
properly? replace the cable if it is
broken.
LED of CIS 3 Is the LED of each CIS lighting? No 1. Check the DC Power
Supply (+24V) of the
printer part.
Replace it if broken.
2. Replace the CIS.
3. Replace the Data
Controller Board.
7. 3. 2. 2 Vertical black lines

order
Scan Glass 1 Is there any dirt or damage on the Scan Yes Clean / replace it.
Glass?
Feeding rollers 3 Are feeding rollers dirty? Yes Clean them.
CIS 4 Can you fix the problem if you replace Yes OK
the CIS?
7. 3. 2. 3 Vertical white lines

order
Glass?
Feeding rollers 3 Are feeding rollers dirty? Yes Clean them.
CIS 4 Can you fix the problem if you replace Yes OK
the CIS?
7-34
7. 3. 2. 4 Some image is lost at the boundary of Image Blocks
order
Position?
(Refer to [8.13.4.3 Position].)
7. 3. 2. 5 Vertical image gap between Image Blocks

order
Position?
(Refer to [8.13.4.3 Position].)
7. 3. 2. 6 Image quality is not good

order
Glass?
Resolution 2 Is the resolution setting proper? No Adjust it properly.
7. 3. 2. 7 Density is different between left and right

order
7-35
7. 4 Touch Screen Calibration
If the cursor position in the screen does not correctly match the tapped position on the panel, the
touch screen should be calibrated so that the cursor is located directly underneath your finger or a
stylus.
The screen shows any available options. This may vary from the actual one
2. Press [Service].
The screen shows any available options. This may vary by the model or your system
7-36
4. Service Configuration screen is displayed. Press [OK].
5. Make sure that a wrench symbol is indicated at the upper right of the screen.
Press [Reset] to close UI operation window.
7-37
6. Tap Diagnostics folder twice as a double-click.
Run the shortcut “TouchScreen Configure Utility” for touch screen calibration.
7-38
7. Select [Tools] tab.
8. Press [Draw Test] to check that the touch screen

correctly detects a tapped position.
NOTE
Using a stylus is recommended for easy and accurate touch screen calibration.
Do not use any sharp instrument.
9. Test screen will appear.
7-39
10. Tap a certain point and check the cursor appears directly underneath a stylus.
For example, suppose you tap the point shown

the next figure.
Tap this cross
The cursor will appear just underneath the tapped point in a correct condition (calibration is not
necessary).
Cursor matches the tap point
Cursor
Tap point
If the cursor appears an unintended position, the touch screen should be calibrated.
Cursor does not match the tap point
Cursor
Tap point
7-40
11. Tap [Quit] to close Test screen.
12. Press [4 Points Calibration].
13. On Calibration screen, a blinking X symbol on the bottom left can be seen.
Press the X until it stops blinking with a beep.
NOTE
Press the X symbol for several seconds before the progress bar at the bottom reaches the
end.
7-41
14. The X disappears and the next one will come in the following order:
bottom right, top right, top left.
Perform the same way for the other 3 points.
15. When all the 4 points are pressed successfully, Calibration screen disappears and the
following dialog appears. Press [OK].
16. Press [OK] to finish touch screen calibration.
7-42
17. Run the shortcut “Restart GUI” for GUI operation.
7-43
7. 5 Internal Counter Error
The TASKalfa 2420w has 2 kinds of the software counter.
One is “Print Count”, this is shown in “? Help” screen as “Counter A”. The other is “Total Count”,
this can be seen NOT in the UI program screen but IPS Service Software.
The counter values are stored on PW11720 PCB Assy and the HDD of IPS at the same time.
The TASKalfa 2420w has a backup system for the counter values. If one of them gets lost, the UI
asks “which counter value has been lost, PW11720 or HDD?”
1. “Internal Counter Error” appears. Press [Continue].
2. Input “8495107” and press [Enter].
3. Answer 2 questions and press [Confirm].
- If PW11720 PCB Assy is replaced;

 The counter values in the HDD will be written to the PW11720 PCB Assy.
- If the HDD is reformatted;
 The counter values in PW11720 PCB Assy will be written to the HDD.
7-44
Chapter 8
Service Mode / Utility
Page
8. 1 General Information of Service Mode 8- 1
8. 2 IPS Service Software Overview 8- 2

8. 2. 1 Launching IPS Service Software 8- 4
8. 2. 2 Closing IPS Service Software 8- 7
8. 2. 3 Log In screen 8- 8
8. 2. 4 Service Mode Home 8- 9
8. 2. 5 Serial Port Setting 8-10
8. 3 Signal Status Mode 8-11

8. 3. 1 Monitoring Signal Status 8-12
8. 3. 2 Input / Output Signal List 8-15
8. 4 Information Mode 8-17

8. 4. 1 Monitoring Analog Data 8-21
8. 4. 2 List of Analog Data Monitor 8-23
8. 4. 3 Browsing Jam History 8-24
8. 4. 4 Browsing Error History 8-25
8. 5 Operation Check Mode 8-26

8. 5. 1 Checking Device Operation 8-27
8. 5. 2 Device List 8-29
8. 6 Adjustment Mode 8-30

8. 6. 1 Changing Setting Value 8-32
8. 6. 2 Setting Item List 8-37
8. 6. 3 Setting Item Explanation 8-41
000, 001 Leading Registration 8-41
002, 003 Trailing Margin 8-41
004 Side Margin (Left & Right) 8-42
005, 006 Side Registration 8-43
008 to 010 LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel 8-44
011 to 013 LED Strobe Time for IST (Supplemental Pixel) 8-46
014, 015 Vertical Alignment of Pixels between Image Blocks 8-48
016 Cut Length 1 (length information provided) 8-50
017 Cut Length 2 (length information not provided) 8-50
018 Cut Length 3 (Compensation of a long print) 8-51
019 Leading Margin 8-53
020 to 027 Developer Bias 8-54
028 Developer Bias compensation - 1st Drum revolution 8-54
029 to 034 Transfer Voltage 8-55
035 Separation Corona ON Timing 8-55
037 Transfer Corona ON Timing 8-56
045 Fuser Temperature to start idling 8-57
046 Warm Sleep – Fuser Temperature 8-57
048, 049 Fuser Temperature Control Range 8-58
050 Reaction Time of Toner Supply Motor 8-59
051 Toner Supply Motor ON Time 8-59
052 Dot Enhancement Level (Dither) 8-60
055 Metric or Inch 8-60
056 Language 8-61
059 Counter Unit 8-61
060 Maximum Length 8-61
063, 064 Cut Length 5 & 6 (Compensation for Tracing Paper / Film) 8-62
065 Drum Reverse Rotation Period 8-63
310 to 315 Main Motor Speed 8-64
322 to 327 Separation Corona OFF Timing 8-64
508 to 510 Transfer Voltage applied at 100mm from trailing edge 8-64
511 to 513 Transfer Voltage applied at 70mm from trailing edge 8-64
613 to 616 Judgment Value for Additional Cut Length
for Non-standard Size Prints 8-65
617 to 620 Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints 8-67
621 Toner Supply Roller Bias 8-67
622 Regulation Bias 8-67
624 Density Sensor Analog Voltage 8-67
625 to 630 Print - Fuser Temperature (12”/11”/A3) 8-68
631 to 636 Print - Fuser Temperature (18”/17”/15”/A2) 8-68
637 to 642 Print - Fuser Temperature (24”/22”/A1) 8-69
643 to 648 Print - Fuser Temperature (36”/34”/30”/A0/B1) 8-69
649 Density Sensor Output Monitor 8-69
652 Density Compensation ON/OFF 8-70
653 Target Density 8-71
654 Regulation Bias Maximum 8-71
655 Density Measure Interval 8-71
660 to 665 Ready - Fuser Temperature 8-72
738 Standby - Fuser Temperature 8-73
749 Tracing Mode 8-73
751 Disable HV Error Detection Mode 8-74
753 Counter Setting 8-74
754 Total Increment of Developer Bias Adjustment 8-74
755 Developer Bias Increment for Adjustment Level 1 and After 8-75
756, 757 Developer Bias Limit 8-75
758 Total Increment of Regulation Bias Adjustment 8-75
759 Regulation Bias Increment for Adjustment Level 2 and After 8-76
760, 761 Regulation Bias Limit 8-76
762 to 767 Developer Reference Bias 8-76
768 Motor Setting 8-77
769 Wait Time of Media Feed Start 8-77
770, 771 Additional Toner Supply Time 8-77
772, 773 Horizontal Alignment of LED Head Blocks 8-78
774 to 777 Dot Light Level on Border Pixel 8-81
778, 779 Strobe Time Adjustment on Border Pixel 8-82
780 Leading Registration for Paper Tray 8-83
781 Trailing Margin for Paper Tray 8-83
782 Side Registration for Paper Tray 8-84
783 Forced Initial Cut Before Print (Cut Length) 8-84
784, 785 Limit Temperature of LED Stitch Compensation 8-85
786 Paper Tray Motor Speed 8-85
787 Transfer Corona ON Timing Compensation (Paper Tray) 8-85
788 Transfer Corona OFF Timing Compensation (Paper Tray) 8-86
789 to 800 Transfer Corona OFF Timing (Roll, Cut Sheet) 8-87
801 to 812 Separation Corona OFF Timing (Roll, Cut Sheet) 8-88
813 Encoder Type 8-88
8. 6. 4 Creating Backup 8-89
8. 6. 5 Restoring Configuration from Backup 8-91
8. 7 Running Mode (Factory Use Only) 8-93

8. 8 Jam/Error Mask Mode 8-93
8. 8. 1 Mask List 8-96
8. 8. 2 Masking Jam 8-97
8. 8. 3 Masking Error 8-100
8. 9 Test Print Mode 8-103

8. 9. 1 Making Test Print 8-105
8. 9. 2 Built-in Test Pattern 8-107
8. 10 Factory Adjustment Mode (Factory Use Only) 8-107
8. 11 Special Operation Mode 8-108

8.11.1 Special Operation List 8-110
8.11.2 Clearing Fuser Error, Jam/Error History 8-111
8.11.3 Reset of Bias Adjustment by Density Compensation Process 8-113
8.11.4 Toner Supply Mode 8-116
8. 12 Send Firmware Mode 8-119

8.12.1 Sending Firmware to Printer 8-120
8.12.2 In Case of Transmission Failure 8-123
8. 13 Scanner Utility 8-126

8.13. 1 Installation 8-126
8.13. 1. 1 Installing USB Driver 8-126
8.13. 1. 2 Installing Scanner Utility 8-129
8.13. 2 Starting Scanner Utility 8-132
8.13. 3 Checking Scanner Information 8-133
8.13. 3. 1 Displaying Scanner Information 8-133
8.13. 3. 2 File Check 8-134
8.13. 4 Scanner Adjustment 8-135
8.13. 4. 1 Shading (Calibration) 8-135
8.13. 4. 2 Feed Distance (1:1) 8-143
8.13. 4. 3 Position (Stitching) 8-151
8.13. 5 Updating Scanner Firmware 8-161
8. 14 Confirmation Wizard 8-164

8. 14. 1 LED Head Confirmation 8-165
8. 14. 2 Cut Length Confirmation 8-170
8. 14. 3 Image Position Confirmation 8-173
8. 14. 4 Media Feed Sensor Check 8-177
8. 14. 5 Developer Replacement Procedure 8-179
8. 1 General Information of Service Mode
The system is equipped with advanced functions for field service to easily achieve its best
performance.
Service Mode contains the following categories.
- Signal Status Mode

- Information Mode
- Operation Check Mode
- Adjustment Mode
- Running Mode
- Jam/Error Mask Mode
- Test Print Mode
- Factory Adjustment Mode
- Special Operation Mode
- Send Firmware Mode
Reference
“IPS Service Software” acts as an interface for service technicians to efficiently utilize any
functions in Service Mode.
For further information about how to operate IPS Service Software, see the next page.
NOTE
The screenshot images in Chapter 8 may vary by the printer model / system configuration /
software version.
Shown with available options.
8-1
8. 2 IPS Service Software Overview
IPS Service Software is an integrated utility application that provides intuitive operability by using
Touch Screen.
IPS Service Software is included in the controller and operates as an interface for monitoring,
checking and setting configuration for field service.
Canceling the UI program (controlling user operation such as Copy screen) allows Touch Screen
to be free to use Desktop on the controller’s operating system.
Launch IPS Service Software and now it is ready to access the printer’s Service Mode.
IPS Service Software Login Screen (version 1.13)
Service Mode Home
8-2
IPS Service Software Tree Diagram of screen menu hierarchy
Login screen
Service Mode Home
(Signal Status Mode) Signal Status Monitor screen
(Information Mode) Information List screen
Data Monitor
Jam History
Error History
(Operation Check Mode) Operation Check screen
(Adjustment Mode) Adjustment Menu screen
Setting Configuration
Setting Backup/Restore
View Table
(Jam/Error Mask Mode) Mask Target screen
Jam Mask
Error Mask
(Test Print Mode) Basic Setting
Option
(Special Operation Mode) Operation Target screen
Confirmation Dialog
Toner Setup
Fuser Error Clear
Jam/Error History Clear
Bias Adjustment Reset
(Send Firmware Mode) Firmware screen
Running Mode, Factory Adjustment Mode (not available)
Wizard
LED Head Confirmation
Cut Length Confirmation
Image Position Confirmation
Media Feed Sensor Check
Developer Replacement Procedure (Bias Reset included)
Serial Port Setting
8-3
8. 2. 1 Launching IPS Service Software
2. Press [Service].
8-4
8-5
6. Press [Yes].
8-6
8. 2. 2 Closing IPS Service Software
1. Return to Service Mode Home. Press [Logout].
2. In Login screen, press [Close].
Reference
Closing “IPS Service Software” automatically invoke UI Home screen to be ready for user
operation.
8-7
8. 2. 3 Log In screen
1 3
Name Function
1 Login Log in Service Mode
2 Serial Port Configures Communication Port Settings between the controller
Setting and PW11720 PCB
It is not necessary to use this button in normal condition.
3 Close Press here to close IPS Service Software.
8-8
8. 2. 4 Service Mode Home
3 2
Name Function
1 Mode Select Press one of Mode Category buttons that you want to enter.
Signal Status Input / Output signal monitor

Information Analog data status monitor
Operation Check Electric device check
Adjustment Printer settings
Running not available
Jam/Error Mask Disables jam/error detection
Test Print Test pattern plot command
Factory Adjustment not available
Clears history, error status,
Special Operation
setting reset functions
Send Firmware Sends firmware program to printer
2 Wizard contains step by step wizard for confirmation of LED Head / Cut
Length / Image Position and some other helpful instructions
3 Logout Press here to log out Service Mode.
Returns to Log In screen
8-9
8. 2. 5 Serial Port Setting
4
5
Name Function
1 Port Number Shows the currently selected serial port
2 Auto Detection Detects a serial port number to be used for communication
between PW11720 to IPS
3 Port Setting Correct ant settings if not set so in the above image.
4 Set Applies serial port configuration to the selected port
5 Back Press here to log out Service Mode.
Returns to Log In screen
In case of communication failure or port open error, press [Auto Detection] to re-establish
communication between PW11720 to IPS.
8-10
8. 3 Signal Status Mode
It is possible to monitor the status of any device signal input to / output from PW11720 PCB with
making prints.
For information about Signal Codes, Signal Names and their contents, see [8.3.2 Input / Output
Signal List].
Signal Status Monitor screen
2
1
Name Function
1 Signal Code / Displays Signal Code / Name in drop-down menu
Name Specify one item that you want to monitor.
2 Status Monitor Displays the current status of the selected signal
3 Back Returns to Service Mode Home
8-11
8. 3. 1 Monitoring Signal Status
1. Press [Signal Status] in Service Mode Home.
Signal Code Group screen appears.
8-12
2. Press one Code Group button that contains the signal code that you want to monitor.
Signal Status Monitor screen appears.
8-13
3. Specify one signal item that you want to monitor from Signal Code/Name menu.
4. The current status of the device you have chosen is displayed in Status Monitor.
8-14
8. 3. 2 Input / Output Signal List
Signal Symbol IC Port Connector Signal Name Input / Status
Code Output
000 SW1 IC3-P20 J205-11 Input Switch 1 Input L : ON
005 GUIDE_S IC3-P25 J204-26 Guide Sensor Input H : Guide Plate
flap UP
006 HAND_DOOR IC3-P26 J204-25 Manual Feed Table Open Input H : Open
007 PRO_OPEN IC3-P27 J207-16 Upper Unit Open Input H : Open
008 MANIN_S IC3-P40 J204-18 Manual Feed Sensor Input H : Media detected
009 DOOR_OPN IC3-P41 J204-19 Roll Deck Open Input H : Open
010 SEP_S IC3-P42 J204-20 Separation Sensor Input L : Media detected
011 HEAT_EXIT IC3-P43 J204-21 Exit Sensor Input L : Media detected
012 SAMP_CUT IC3-P44 J204-22 Initial Cut Switch
013 --- IC3-P45 J208-20
014 ER_LD IC3-P46 J208-19 Eraser Lamp Connection Input H : No connection
Detection * does not work
while lighting.
015 --- IC3-P47 J204-27
016 COUNT_LD IC3-80 J208-4 (Reserved)
017 MAINM_LD IC3-81 J207-18 Main Motor Output Detection Input L : Detected
018 FUSERM_LD IC3-82 J207-19 (Reserved) Input L : Detected
019 DIS_CN IC3-83 J207-20 Developer Connection Input L : No connection
Detection
020 IM_LD IC3-84 J207-21 Image Corona Output Input L : No connection
Detection
021 TR_LD IC3-85 J207-22 Transfer Corona Output Input L : No connection
Detection
022 AC_LD IC3-86 J207-23 Separation Corona Output Input L : No connection
Detection
023 BIAS_LD IC3-87 J207-24 Developer Bias Output Input L : No connection
Detection
024 MAIN_TRG IC3-P10 J206-7 Main Motor Output H : Rotate
025 FUSER_TRG IC3-P11 J206-8 (Reserved)
026 HV_IM IC3-P12 J206-9 Image Corona Output H : Output
027 HV_TR IC3-P13 J206-10 Transfer Corona Output H : Output
028 HV_AC IC3-P14 J206-11 Separation Corona Output H : Output
029 BIAS_TRG IC3-P15 J206-12 Developer Bias Output H : Output
030 BIAS_SW IC3-P16 J206-13 Developer Bias Polarity Switch Output L : Positive
H : Negative
031 FUSER_DIR IC3-P17 J206-14 (Reserved)
032 MAIN_DIR IC3-P30 J206-15 Main Motor Reversal Rotation Output H : Reverse
033 --- IC3-P31 J206-16
034 CSET_TRG IC3-P32 J206-17 Paper Tray Motor Output L : Rotate
035 CLEAN_SW IC3-P33 J206-18 Cleaning Roller Voltage Output L : Positive
Polarity Switch H : Negative
036 --- IC3-P34 J206-22
037 HEAT1 IC3-P35 J206-25 SSR ON/OFF Signal 1 Output H : Heater Lamp
lights
038 --- IC3-P36 J206-26
039 POWER_SW IC3-P37 J206-27 Power Switch Output Output H : OFF
040 --- IC3-P50 J208-3
041 COUNT IC3-P51 J208-4 (Reserved)
042 HEAT_RY IC3-P52 J208-5 Fuser Relay Output H : ON
043 PICKUP_SL IC3-P53 J208-13 Pickup Solenoid Output H : ON
044 --- IC3-P54 J208-14
045 EXT_FAN IC3-P55 J208-21 Extractor Fan Output H : ON
046 FEED_CL IC3-P56 J208-10 Feed Clutch Output H : ON
047 REGIST_CL IC3-P57 J208-11 Registration Clutch Output H : ON
048 R1FD_CL IC3-P60 J208-6 Roll Feed Clutch Output H : ON
049 CPICK_CL IC3-P61 J208-7 Paper Tray Pickup Clutch Output H : ON
050 CFEED_CL IC3-P62 J208-8 Paper Tray Feed Clutch Output H : ON
051 GUIDE_CL IC3-P63 J208-9 Guide Clutch Output H : ON
052 HEAT_BL_L IC3-P64 J208-12 Fuser Blower (Low) Output H : ON
053 HEAT_BL_H IC3-P65 J208-12 Fuser Blower (High) Output H : ON
8-15
Signal Symbol IC Port Connector Signal Name Input / Status
Code Output
054 --- IC3-P66
055 --- IC3-P67
056 --- IC3-P70
057 --- IC3-P71
058 --- IC3-P72
059 --- IC3-P73
060 --- IC3-P74 J207-3
061 --- IC3-P75 J207-4
062 ER1 IC3-P76 J208-22 Eraser Lamp Output H : Eraser Lamp
lights
063 TONER_M IC3-P77 J208-23 Toner Supply Motor Output H : Rotate
064 --- IC3-P90 J207-5
065 --- IC3-P91 J207-6
066 --- IC3-P92 J207-7
067 PCB_LED IC3-P93 PW11720 PCB LCD Output H : Lights
068 --- IC3-P94 J203-8
069 --- IC3-P95 J203-9
070 ONLINE IC3-P96 J205-9 ONLINE LED Output H : Lights
071 --- IC3-P97 J204-28
072 IBUSY_H IC1-P10 Data Output Busy Output H : Busy
073 IPRADY_L IC1-P11 Printer Ready Output L : Ready
074 IPREQ_L IC1-P12 Print Request Output L : Requested
075 PAGEBL IC1-P13 Print Request Output L : Print ON
076 TEST_H IC1-P14 Test Print Output H : Test Printing
077 I_POW_ON_A IC1-P15
078 LED_EN IC1-P16 LED Enable
079 CLEAN BIAS IC1-P17 J206-28 Cleaning Roller Bias Output H : Output
080 LCD_CLK IC1-P20 J205-8 LCD Clock
081 LCD_DATA IC1-P21 J205-7 LCD Data
082 LCD_EN IC1-P23 J205-6 LCD Enable
083 LCD_RW IC1-P24 J205-5 Data Read / Write Selection Output
084 LCD_RS IC1-P22 J205-4 LCD Input Selection Output
085 IC1-P25 J206-5 Main Motor Clock
086 IC1-P26 J206-4 Fuser Motor Clock
087 RESET_SIG IC1-P27 Reset Signal Output
088 RXD0 IC1-P32 Serial 0 Input Input
091 TXD0 IC1-P30 Serial 0 Output Output
094 MSCUTR IC1-P60 J204-5 Cutter Home Position Sensor Input L : Staying at
(Right) Home Position
095 MSCUTL IC1-P61 J204-6 Cutter Home Position Sensor Input L : Staying at
(Left) Home Position
096 MCUTL IC1-P62 J208-2 Cutter Motor 1 Output H : Rotate
097 MCUTR IC1-P63 J208-1 Cutter Motor 2 Output H : Rotate
098 IPRINT_L IC1-P34 Print Request Input L : Requested
099 IPCUT_L IC1-P64 Paper Cut Request Input L : Cutting
100 REGIST_S IC1-P65 J204-7 Registration Sensor Input H : Media detected
101 PICKUP_S IC1-P66 J204-8 Paper Tray Pickup Sensor Input H : Media detected
102 CSET_S IC1-P67 J204-9 Paper Tray Set Sensor Input H : Media detected
103 VLC_OFF IC1-PG0 J205-3 LCD Indication ON/OFF Output H : Indicating
104 TONER_S IC1-PA5 J204-10 Toner Sensor Input H : Toner detected
105 R1_SET_S IC1-PA6 J204-11 Roll 1 Set Sensor Input H : Media detected
106 --- IC1-PA7 J204-12
107 --- AN5 J203-20
108 CSETM_LD IC1-PF0 J207-17 Paper Tray Motor Output Input L/H alternates :
Detection Rotate
109 RENC_S IC1-PF1 J204-23 Feed Encoder
110 CSET_ON IC1-PF2 J204-24 Paper Tray Input H : No connection
Connection Detection
111 R_EDGE IC1-PF7 J204-13 Trailing Edge Detection Input H : Media detected
8-16
8. 4 Information Mode
It is possible to monitor the analog voltage input sent by devices (such as Thermistor) to DC
Controller PCB. It is also possible to monitor the current Fuser temperature which is calculated
from the input voltage.
Information Mode includes the list of the latest 100 jam / service call error records.
Information Home screen
1 2 3
Name Function
1 No.00 - 32 Switches to Monitor screen
2 No.33 Switches to Jam History screen
3 No.34 Switches to Error History screen
4 Contents Explains the contents of the item
The number shown in the second / third / last tab may vary by the printer model or printer firmware version.
8-17
Monitor screen
2
1
3
Name Function
1 Contents Explains the contents of the listed items
2 Current Displays the current Analog Voltage and its calculated value for
Information the items to be monitored
3 Home Returns to Information Home screen
For information about items to be monitored, see [8.4.2 List of Analog Data Monitor].
8-18
Jam History screen
5 4
2 3
Name Function
1 Jam Information Displays the latest 100 jam records
2 Code Displays Jam Code “J-****”
3 Counter Value Displays the counter value that the concerning jam occurred
4 Export Saves the records as a file
8-19
Error History screen
5 4
2 3
Name Function
1 Error Information Displays the latest 100 service call error records
2 Code Displays Jam Code “E-****”
3 Counter Value Displays the counter value that the concerning error occurred
4 Export Saves the records as a file
8-20
8. 4. 1 Monitoring Analog Data
1. Press [Information] in Service Mode Home.
Information Home screen appears.
8-21
2. To monitor any available Analog Data value, open [No.00 - 32] tab to display Monitor screen.
8-22
8. 4. 2 List of Analog Data Monitor
All items grayed are not generally for field technician use
Data Item Unit Remarks Contents
Code
00 Fuser Temp 1 Centigrade Calculated temperature detected by the thermistor on the
Value center of the Fuser Unit
01 Fuser Temp 2 Centigrade Calculated temperature detected by the thermistor on the
Value right of the Fuser Unit
02 LED Temp Centigrade Calculated temperature detected on LED Head (PW11755)
Value
03 Machine Temp Centigrade Calculated temperature detected on PW11720
Value
04 Analog. Vol.1 (Reserved)
05 Analog. Vol.2 [V] analog output
06 Analog. Vol.3 (Reserved)
07 Total Cut number of operation times in total for media cut
with any source / situation
08 Roll 1 Cit number of operation times for media cutting from
Roll 1
09 Others Cut number of operation times for media cutting for
trim cut
10 Total Image number of operation times in total for printing
operation with any source
11 M Image number of operation times for printing operation
on Bypass Feeder
12 R1 Image number of operation times for printing operation
on Roll 1
13 Cassette Image number of operation times for printing operation
on Paper Tray
14 R1F Clutch number of operation times of Roll 1 Clutch
15 Feed Clutch number of operation times of Feed Clutch
16 Reg. Clutch number of operation times of Registration Clutch
17 Guide Clutch number of operation times of Guide Clutch
18 Cassette Clutch number of operation times of Paper Tray Clutch
19 Pickup Solenoid number of operation times of Pickup Solenoid
20 (Reserved) - - (Reserved)
21 (Reserved) - - (Reserved)
22 Motor 1 Time minute total operation time of Main Motor
23 Motor 2 Time minute (Reserved)
24 LED ON Time minute total lighting-up time of LED Head
25 Density V0 development
use
26 Density V1 development
use
27 Density Vr development
use
28 Density DA1 development
use
29 Bias 2 Vol Hex Developer Bias output
30 Bias 3 Vol Hex Regulation Bias output
31 Image Ratio % Coverage Rate (dot ratio) of the latest sheet
32 FPGA Version
8-23
8. 4. 3 Browsing Jam History
To browse the machine’s jam history, open [No.33] tab to display Jam History screen.
[Export] creates “jaminfo.dat” that contains the currently recorded Jam History.
Reference
To clear the entire jam history record, see [8.11.1 Clearing Fuser Error, Jam/Error History].
8-24
8. 4. 4 Browsing Error History
To browse the machine’s service call error history, open [No.34] tab to display Error History screen.
[Export] creates “errinfo.dat” that contains the currently recorded Error History.
Reference
To clear the entire service call error history record, see [8.11.1 Clearing Fuser Error,
Jam/Error History].
8-25
8. 5 Operation Check Mode
It is possible to operate several electrical components independently, such as motor, clutch, and
fans.
Operation Check screen
1 2
4 3
Name Function
1 Signal Code / Displays Signal Code/Name in drop-down menu
Name Specify one item that you want to check.
2 Signal Status Displays the current status of the selected signal
3 On / Off Operates the electric device you have chosen
8-26
8. 5. 1 Checking Device Operation
1. Press [Operation Check] in Service Mode Home.
Operation Check screen appears.
8-27
2. Specify one signal item that you want to monitor from Signal Code/Name menu.
3. The current status of the device you have chosen is displayed in Signal Status field.
Press [Start] to operate the device alone.
8-28
8. 5. 2 Device List
Signal Signal Name Target item
Code
00 MAIN-TRG Main Motor
01 --- Reserved
02 --- Reserved
03 --- Reserved
04 TONER-M Toner Supply Motor
05 --- Reserved
06 R1FD-CL Roll 1 Feed Clutch
07 --- Reserved
08 --- Reserved
09 --- Reserved
10 FEED-CL Feed Clutch
11 REG.-CL Registration Clutch
12 HV-IM Image Corona
13 HV-TR Transfer Corona
14 HV-AC Separation Corona
15 BIAS-TRG Developer Bias
16 BIAS-SW Positive/Negative selection of Developer Bias
17 CLEANTRG Cleaning Roller Bias
18 CLEAN-SW Positive/Negative selection of Cleaning Roller Voltage
19 --- Reserved
20 --- Reserved
21 HEAT1 Fuser Lamp 1
22 HEAT-RY Fuser Relay
23 H BLW(L) Fuser Blower (Low speed)
24 H BLW(H) Fuser Blower (High speed)
25 EXT FAN Exit Blower
26 COUNT Reserved
27 M5_CUTL Cutter Motor (blade moves to left)
28 M5_CUTR Cutter Motor (blade moves to right)
29 POWER-SW Main Switch
30 ER1 Eraser Lamp
31 --- Reserved
32 GUIDE CL Guide Clutch
33 CSET-MTRG Paper Tray Motor
34 PICK-SL Pickup Solenoid
35 CFEED CL Paper Tray Clutch
36 LED HEAD LED Head (all the 3 units, in 3 seconds)
8-29
8. 6 Adjustment Mode
It is possible to configure fundamental settings on the printer.

Every setting item has the corresponding Sub Mode Number.
Adjustment Menu screen
3 2
4 5 7
Name Function
1 Sub Mode Number Press one Code Group button that contains the signal code
Group Button you want to configure.
2 Export Stores the current parameters in a RAM (& txt) file for backup
3 Import Reads parameters stored in a RAM file for restoring parameters
4 Save Applies the parameters read by [Import] to PW11720
5 Load Press here only for refreshing memory
7 View Table Shows the list of the current parameters on touchscreen
The number shown on the last Code Group button may vary by the printer model or printer firmware version.
8-30
Setting Configuration screen
5
7 6
Name Function
1 Item Code / Displays Item Code/Name in drop-down menu
Name Specify one item that you want to configure.
2 Current Value Displays the current value of the selected item
3 New Value Displays an input value by using On-screen Keypad
4 Setting Range An input value must be set within this range.
5 Numeric Key Use On-screen Keypad to input a value to be configured.
6 Apply Applies a value in “Modify” to the selected item
8-31
8. 6. 1 Changing Setting Value
1. Press [Adjustment] in Service Mode Home.
Adjustment Menu screen appears.
8-32
2. Press one Code Group button that contains the signal code that you want to configure.
Setting Configuration screen appears.
8-33
3. Specify one signal item that you want to configure from Item Code/Name menu.
4. The current value and available setting range of the item you have chosen are displayed.
8-34
5. To change a setting value, input a desired value with On-screen Keypad.
The value will be displayed in “New Value” field.
The setting item you have chosen is in hexadecimal, press [Fn] to input alphabetic characters A to F.
8-35
6. Press [Apply] to apply the new value to the printer.
The value in “Current Value” field will be changed to the new value.
8-36
8. 6. 2 Setting Item List
Default Values may differ by individual machine. See the service sheet attached inside the machine.
Item Setting Item Unit setting range Default (sample)

No. US EU/Asia
000 Leading Registration (Roll paper) 1mm 0 to 40 27 27
001 Leading Registration (Cut sheet paper) 1mm 0 to 40 26 26
002 Trailing Margin (Roll paper) 1mm 0 to 40 11 11
003 Trailing Margin (Cut sheet paper) 1mm 0 to 40 12 12
004 Side Margin (Left and right) 1mm 0 to 20 3 3
005 Side Registration (Cut sheet paper) 0.1mm 0 to 100 50 50
006 Side Registration (Roll paper) 0.1mm 0 to 100 50 50
007 Reserved
008 LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel (Block A) 1 microsecond 0 to 10 7 7
009 LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel (Block B) 1 microsecond 0 to 10 7 7
010 LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel (Block C) 1 microsecond 0 to 10 7 7
011 LED Strobe Time for IST (Supplemental Pixel) (Block A) 1 microsecond 0 to 18 9 9
012 LED Strobe Time for IST (Supplemental Pixel) (Block B) 1 microsecond 0 to 18 9 9
013 LED Strobe Time for IST (Supplemental Pixel) (Block C) 1 microsecond 0 to 18 9 9
014 Vertical Alignment of LED Block A/B 0.5pixel 0 to 144 72 72
015 Vertical Alignment of LED Block B/C 0.5pixel 0 to 144 72 72
016 Cut Length 1 (length information provided) 1mm 0 to 100 50 50
017 Cut Length 2 (length information not provided) 1mm 0 to 100 50 50
018 Cut Length 3 (Compensation of the length of a long print) 0.1mm 1 to 999 440 440
019 Leading Margin 0.1mm 0 to 50 30 30
020 Reserved
021 Reserved
022 Developer Bias (Plain Paper) (Hex.) 000 to 4FF 161 161
023 Developer Bias (Tracing Paper) (Hex.) 000 to 4FF 161 161
024 Developer Bias (Film) (Hex.) 000 to 4FF 161 161
025 Developer Bias (Special Media/Plain Paper) (Hex.) 000 to 4FF 161 161
026 Developer Bias (Special Media/Tracing Paper) (Hex.) 000 to 4FF 161 161
027 Developer Bias (Special Media/Film) (Hex.) 000 to 4FF 161 161
028 Developer Bias compensation - 1st Drum revolution - 0 to 255 0 0
029 Transfer Voltage (Plain Paper) (Hex.) 000 to 4FF 366 366
030 Transfer Voltage (Tracing Paper) (Hex.) 000 to 4FF 28A 28A
031 Transfer Voltage (Film) (Hex.) 000 to 4FF 28A 28A
032 Transfer Voltage (Special Media/Plain Paper) (Hex.) 000 to 4FF 292 292
033 Transfer Voltage (Special Media/Tracing Paper) (Hex.) 000 to 4FF 292 292
034 Transfer Voltage (Special Media/Film) (Hex.) 000 to 4FF 292 292
035 Separation Corona ON Timing 1mm 0 to 100 50 50
036 Reserved
037 Transfer Corona ON Timing 1mm 0 to 100 50 50
038 Reserved
039 Reserved
040 Reserved
041 Reserved
042 Reserved
043 Reserved
044 Reserved
o
045 Fuser temperature to Start Idling 1C 100 to 140 120 120
o
046 Warm Sleep - Fuser Temperature 1C 100 to 160 100 100
047 Reserved
o
048 Fuser Temperature Control Range (In the print cycle) 1C 1 to 6 1 1
o
049 Fuser Temperature Control Range (Stand by) 1C 1 to 6 2 2
050 Reaction Time of Toner Supply Motor 1 Second 1 to 30 3 3
051 Toner Supply Motor Time 1 Second 1 to 75 25 25
052 Dot Enhancement Level (Dither ) - 0 to 3 1 1
053 Reserved
054 Reserved
055 Metric or Inch - 0 to 1 1 0
056 Language - 0 to 1 1 1
057 Reserved
058 Reserved
059 Count Unit (Counter A = Print Count) - 0 to 6 5 ---
060 Maximum Length - 0 to 1 0 0
061 Reserved
062 Reserved
063 Cut length 5 (Compensation for Tracing Paper) - 0 to 200 100 100
064 Cut length 6 (Compensation for Film) - 0 to 200 100 100
065 Drum Reverse Time 1 millisecond 10 to 100 70 70
066 Reserved -
to
309
310 Main Motor Speed (Plain paper) 0.04mm/s 0 to 80 40 40
8-37
No. US EU/Asia
311 Main Motor Speed (Tracing paper) 0.02mm/s 0 to 80 40 40
312 Main Motor Speed (Film) 0.02mm/s 0 to 80 44 40
313 Main Motor Speed (Special plain paper) 0.02mm/s 0 to 80 40 40
314 Main Motor Speed (Special Tracing Paper) 0.02mm/s 0 to 80 40 40
315 Main Motor Speed (Special Film) 0.02mm/s 0 to 80 40 40
316 Reserved -
to
507
508 Transfer Voltage applied at 100mm from trailing edge (Hex.) 000 to 9FE 4FF 4FF
(Plain paper)
(Tracing paper)
(Film)
511 Transfer Voltage applied at 70mm from trailing edge (Hex.) 000 to 9FE 62F 62F
(Plain paper)
512 Transfer Voltage applied at 70mm from trailing edge (Hex.) 000 to 9FE 69F 69F
(Tracing paper)
(Film)
514 Reserved -
to
612
613 Judgment Value for Additional Cut Length 1mm 1 to 20 1 1
for Non-standard Size Prints (36”/ 34”/ 30”/ A0 / B1)
for Non-standard Size Prints (24”/ 20”/ A1)
for Non-standard Size Prints (18”/ 17”/ 15”/ A2)
for Non-standard Size Prints (12”/ 11”/ A3)
617 Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints 1mm 0 to 35 0 0
(36”/ 34”/ 30”/ A0 / B1)
(24”/ 22”/ A2)
(18”/ 17”/ 15”/ A2)
(12”/ 11”/ A3)
621 Toner Supply Roller Bias - 0 to 800 286 286
622 Regulation Bias - 0 to 800 270 240
623 Reserved
624 Density Sensor Analog Voltage - 0 to 60 0 0
o
625 Print - Fuser Temperature 1C 120 to 180 145 145
(Plain) (12” / 11” / A3)
o
(Tracing) (12” / 11” / A3)
o
(Film) (12” / 11” / A3)
o
(Special / Plain) (12” / 11” / A3)
o
(Special / Tracing) (12” / 11” / A3)
o
(Special media / Film) (12” / 11” / A3)
o
(Plain) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2)
o
(Tracing) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2)
o
(Film) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2)
o
(Special / Plain) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2)
o
(Special / Tracing) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2)
o
(Special / Film) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2)
o
(Plain) (24” / 22” / A1)
o
(Tracing) (24” / 22” / A1)
o
(Film) (24” / 22” / A1)
o
(Special / Plain) (24” / 22” / A1)
o
o
(Special / Film) (24” / 22” / A1)
8-38
Item Setting Item Unit setting range Default
(sample145)
No. US EU/Asia
o
(Plain) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1)
o
(Tracing) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1)
o
(Film) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1)
o
(Special / Plain) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1)
o
(Special / Tracing) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1)
o
(Special / Film) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1)
649 Density Sensor Output Monitor - 2 to 9 6 6
650 Reserved
651 Reserved
652 Density Compensation On/Off - 0 to 1 1 11
653 Target Density (Hex.) 000 to 400 051 051
654 Toner Patch Adjustment - 0 to 16 16 16
655 Density Measure Interval 1 hour 1 to 18 2 2
656 Reserved
657 Reserved
658 Reserved
659 Reserved
o
660 Ready - Fuser Temperature (Plain) 1C 120 to 180 135 135
o
661 Ready - Fuser Temperature (Tracing) 1C 120 to 180 145 145
o
662 Ready - Fuser Temperature (Film) 1C 120 to 180 165 155
o
663 Ready - Fuser Temperature (Special / Plain) 1C 120 to 180 135 135
o
664 Ready - Fuser Temperature (Special / Tracing) 1C 120 to 180 145 145
o
665 Ready - Fuser Temperature (Special / Film) 1C 120 to 180 165 155
666 Reserved -
to
737
o
738 Standby - Fuser Temperature 1C 120 to 180 135 135
739 Reserved -
to
748
749 Tracing Mode - 0 to 1 0 0
750 Reserved
751 Disable HV Error Detection Mode - 0 to 1 0 0
752 Reserved
753 Counter Setting - 0 to 1 0 0
754 Total Increment of Developer Bias Adjustment (Hex.) 000 to 9FE 59E 59E
755 Developer Bias Increment for Adjustment Level 1 and after 0.5V 0 to 300 159 159
756 Developer Bias Limit (minimum, absolute value) (Hex.) 000 to 4FF 141 141
757 Developer Bias Limit (maximum, absolute value) (Hex.) 000 to 4FF 23A 23A
758 Total Increment of Regulation Bias Adjustment - 0 to 340 160 160
759 Regulation Bias Increment for Adjustment Level 2 and after 0.5V 10 to 200 90 090
760 Regulation Bias Limit (minimum, absolute value) - 0 to 399 270 270
761 Regulation Bias Limit (maximum, absolute value) - 400 to 800 450 450
762 Developer Reference Bias 1 (Hex.) 000 to 4FE 060 060
764 Developer Reference Bias 3 (Hex.) 000 to 4FE 19F 19F
765 Developer Reference Bias 4 (Hex.) 000 to 4FE 23A 23A
766 Developer Reference Bias 5 (Hex.) 000 to 4FE 2D4 2D4
768 Motor Setting - 0 to 1 0 0
769 Wait Time of Media Feed Start 100ms 0 to 60 0 0
770 Additional Toner Supply Time (Toner Supply Motor ON) minute 1 to 30 9 9
771 Additional Toner Supply Time (Agitation only) minute 1 to 30 1 1
772 Horizontal Alignment of LED Head (Block A/B) 1 pixel 2 to 114 58 58
773 Horizontal Alignment of LED Head (Block B/C) 1 pixel 2 to 114 58 58
774 Dot Light Level (Block A/B, border 1 pixel) - 0 to 40 20 20
775 Dot Light Level (Block B/C, border 1 pixel) - 0 to 40 20 20
776 Dot Light Level (Block A/B, next pixel to border) - 0 to 40 20 20
777 Dot Light Level (Block B/C, next pixel to border) - 0 to 40 20 20
778 Strobe Time Adjustment on Border Pixel (Block A/B) - 6 to 14 10 10
779 Strobe Time Adjustment on Border Pixel (Block B/C) - 6 to 14 10 10
780 Leading Registration (Paper Tray) 1mm 0 to 40 27 27
781 Trailing Margin (Paper Tray) 1mm 0 to 40 15 15
782 Side Registration (Paper Tray) 0.1mm 0 to 100 50 50
783 Forced Initial Cut Before Print (Cut Length) 1mm 279 to 600 350 350
o
784 Upper Limit Temperature of LED Stitch Compensation 1C 30 to 50 35 35
o
785 Lower Limit Temperature of LED Stitch Compensation 1C 10 to 20 15 15
786 Paper Tray Motor Speed 0.4mm/s 0 to 50 10 10
787 Transfer Corona ON Timing Compensation (Paper Tray) 1millisecond 1 to 999 540 540
788 Transfer Corona OFF Timing Compensation (Paper Tray) 1millisecond 1 to 999 380 380
8-39
789 Transfer Corona OFF Timing (Plain) (12” / 11” / A3) 1mm 0 to 100 20 20
No. US EU/Asia
790 Transfer Corona OFF Timing (Tracing) (12” / 11” / A3) 1mm 0 to 100 20 35
791 Transfer Corona OFF Timing (Film) (12” / 11” / A3) 1mm 0 to 100 35 35
792 Transfer Corona OFF Timing (Plain) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2) 1mm 0 to 100 20 20
793 Transfer Corona OFF Timing (Tracing) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2) 1mm 0 to 100 35 20
794 Transfer Corona OFF Timing (Film) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2) 1mm 0 to 100 35 35
795 Transfer Corona OFF Timing (Plain) (24” / 22” / A1) 1mm 0 to 100 20 20
796 Transfer Corona OFF Timing (Tracing) (24” / 22” / A1) 1mm 0 to 100 35 20
797 Transfer Corona OFF Timing (Film) (24” / 22” / A1) 1mm 0 to 100 35 35
798 Transfer Corona OFF Timing (Plain) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1) 1mm 0 to 100 20 20
799 Transfer Corona OFF Timing (Tracing) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / 1mm 0 to 100 35 35
B1)
800 Transfer Corona OFF Timing (Film) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1) 1mm 0 to 100 35 35
801 Separation Corona OFF Timing (Plain) (12” / 11” / A3) 1mm 0 to 100 35 35
802 Separation Corona OFF Timing (Tracing) (12” / 11” / A3) 1mm 0 to 100 35 50
803 Separation Corona OFF Timing (Film) (12” / 11” / A3) 1mm 0 to 100 50 50
804 Separation Corona OFF Timing (Plain) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2) 1mm 0 to 100 35 35
805 Separation Corona OFF Timing (Tracing) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2) 1mm 0 to 100 50 35
806 Separation Corona OFF Timing (Film) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2) 1mm 0 to 100 50 50
807 Separation Corona OFF Timing (Plain) (24” / 22” / A1) 1mm 0 to 100 35 35
808 Separation Corona OFF Timing (Tracing) (24” / 22” / A1) 1mm 0 to 100 50 35
809 Separation Corona OFF Timing (Film) (24” / 22” / A1) 1mm 0 to 100 50 50
810 Separation Corona OFF Timing (Plain) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1) 1mm 0 to 100 35 35
811 Separation Corona OFF Timing (Tracing) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / 1mm 0 to 100 50 50
B1)
812 Separation Corona OFF Timing (Film) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1) 1mm 0 to 100 50 50
813 Encoder Type - 0 to 1 1 1
8-40
8. 6. 3 Setting Item Explanation
NOTE
Default Values may differ by individual machine. See the service sheet attached inside the
machine.
000, 001 Leading Registration

It is possible to specify where to start printing the image at the leading edge of the media.
If you increase the setting value by “+1 “, the head of image is shifted 1mm downward toward the
trailing edge As a result the leading margin becomes larger.
Item No. Setting Item Setting Step of

range increment
000 Leading Registration (Roll paper) 0 to 40 1mm
001 Leading Registration (Cut sheet paper) 0 to 40 1mm
Leading Registration
value is increased. value is decreased.
002, 003 Trailing Margin

It is possible to adjust the length of trailing margin.
The length of trailing margin becomes 1mm longer if you Increase the setting value by “+1 “.

range increment
002 Trailing Margin (Roll paper) 0 to 40 1mm
003 Trailing Margin (Cut sheet paper) 0 to 40 1mm
Setting value is increased. Setting value is decreased.
Trailing Margin
NOTE
Some trailing image may be lost if you decrease the value too much.
8-41
004 Side Margin (Left & Right)
It is possible to adjust the amount of side margin. (Both left and right)
Each side margin becomes 1mm wider if you increase the setting value.
(As a result the width of print image becomes 2mm narrower.)
Setting Range Step of increment

0 to 20 1mm
Setting value is increased.
Side Margin
Setting value is decreased.
NOTE
Image quality created with a reduced side margin (less than 3 in the setting value) is not
guaranteed.
8-42
005, 006 Side Registration
It is possible to specify where to start printing the image at the side edge of the media.
If you increase the setting value by “+1 “, image is shifted 0.1mm to the right.

range increment
005 Side Registration (Cutsheet) 0 to 100 0.1mm
006 Side Registration (Roll 1) 0 to 100 0.1mm
Side Registration
8-43
008 to 010 LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel
It is possible to make the whole image of each Image Block (A, B and C) darker or lighter
independently by changing the LED Strobe Time for the Main Pixels.
As a result an even image density can be accomplished among 3 Image Blocks.
The whole image of the concerning Image Block becomes darker if you increase the setting value.

range increment
008 LED Strobe Time for Main Pixel 0 to 10 1 micro second
(Image Block A : Left)
(Image Block B : Center)
(Image Block C : Right)
Block A Block B Block C
Decrease the value of Increase the value of

“008” to make the image “010” to make the image
of Block A lighter. of Block C darker.
Setting value is decreased. Default Setting value is increased

.
Main pixel
Supplemental
pixel
Actual print image
For the detail information about “Main Pixel” and “Supplemental Pixel”, see the reference
column in [011 to 013 LED Strobe Time for IST (Supplemental Pixel)].
8-44
NOTE
(1) The LED Strobe Times specified in these 008, 009 and 010 are directly applied to the
Test Print.
If the setting values are 7 (for 008), 8 (for 009) and 9 (for 010), for example, the
actual LED Strobe Times are also 7 (for block A), 8 (for block B) and 9 (for block C).
In case of Test Print

008: 7 microseconds
009: 8 microseconds
010: 9 microseconds
(7) (8) (9)
But in case of a copy or a plot, the density command (LED Strobe Time) sent from the
output device (image scanner or controller) is applied to the Image Block A.
And only the difference of setting values among 008, 009 and 010 are applied to the
actual LED Strobe Time.
If the density command from the output device is 5 microsecond and the setting values
are 7 (for 008), 8 (for 009) and 9 (for 010), for example, the actual LED Strobe Times
are 5 (for block A), 6 (for block B) and 7 (for block C).
In case of copy or plot

Density command from output device: 5 microseconds
008: 7 microseconds
009: 8 microseconds
010: 9 microseconds
(5) (6) (7)
(2) If the value of density command (LED Strobe Time) sent from the output device is larger
than “9 microsecond” (Max.), it is automatically corrected to “9 microsecond”.
If it is smaller than “0 microsecond” (Min.), it is corrected to “0 microsecond” similarly.
8-45
011 to 013 LED Strobe Time for IST (Supplemental Pixel)
If such image as a diagonal line looks too weak, you can make it clearer by changing the LED
Strobe Time for the Supplemental Pixels.
The adjustment is available for each Image Block independently.
A diagonal line comes to look clearer if you increase the setting value, as the LED Strobe Time for
the Supplemental Pixels becomes longer.

range increment
011 LED Strobe Time for Supplemental Pixel 0 to 18 1 micro second
(Image Block A : Left)
(Image Block B : Center)
(Image Block C : Right)
Increase the setting values of “011” and “013”

to make the images of these blocks clearer.
Setting value is decreased. Default Setting value is increased.
Main pixel
Supplemental
pixel
Actual print image
For the detail information about “Main Pixel” and “Supplemental Pixel”, see the reference
column on the next page.
8-46
Reference
Normally the TASKalfa 2420w takes 600 times of image exposure per inch for the vertical
direction as its resolution is 600DPI. Pixels created by this normal timing are called [Main
Pixel].
When a specific image pattern (like a diagonal line) is printed, however, the TASKalfa 2420w
will make additional image exposure between vertically neighboring 2 Main Pixels. This
additional image exposure is completed within a very short time. The pixel created by this
additional process is called [Supplemental Pixel].
Normal image pattern In case of a certain

image pattern
Main Pixels
Supplemental Pixels
Main Pixels
Supplemental Pixels are provided so as to fill the space between Main Pixels.
When we compare a vertical / horizontal 1 dot line and a diagonal 1 dot line, for example, the
diagonal one looks vague and rough although the vertical / horizontal one looks clear and
smooth.
This is because the diagonal line has a wider space between Main Pixels than the vertical /
horizontal one.
If this space is filled with the Supplemental Pixel, diagonal line comes to look smoother and
clearer.
No Supplemental Pixel Supplemental Pixels are provided.
Direction of
print
Print image Print image
8-47
014, 015 Vertical Alignment of LED Block
It is possible to align the pixels between Image Blocks if there is a gap of pixels.
The Image Block B is the standard, and both the Image Blocks A and C can be shifted vertically.
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, the whole pixels of the concerning Image Block is shifted
“0.5 pixel” to the trailing edge side.
These can be used if a horizontal line has a step at the border of the Blocks.

range increment
014 Horizontal Alignment of LED Block A/B 0 to 144 0.5 pixel
015 Horizontal Alignment of LED Block B/C 0 to 144 0.5 pixel
Decrease the value of

“014” to shift the block A to
the leading edge side.
Decrease the value of

“015” to shift the block C to
the trailing edge side.
Border of A/B by Border of B/C by

current result current result
8-48
Check the following part of the test pattern No.9 S(3) for how many pixels Block A or Block C are
shifting against Block B.
ex) Block A/B
Block A Block B
Correct:
The long center line on Block A
touches the reference line on Block B.
The gauges on Block B line up in 0.5 pixel interval. If the long center line on Block A does not
touch the reference line, Block A is displaced in (0.5 x gauge number) pixel(s).
Block A Block B
Wrong:
The long center line on Block A are 0.5 pixel x 2 (gauge) = 1 pixel
touching the second short line from
the reference line on Block B. This
means that Block A is displaced in 1
pixel toward the leading edge.
In this example, increase No.014 in “2” to move Block A toward the trailing edge in 1 pixel.
8-49
016 Cut Length 1 (length information provided)
It is possible to make the print length longer or shorter.
This setting is applied when the print command (plot & copy) is provided with the length
information. (this is command used on all standard pages printed from the IPS)
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, the print length becomes 1mm longer.

0 to 100 1mm
Setting value is increased. Setting value is decreased

.
Cut length
017 Cut Length 2 (length information not provided)

It is possible to make the print length longer or shorter.
This setting is applied when the print command (plot & copy) is not provided with the length
information. (This is may only be used on LONG prints over 6 meters on the IPS)
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, the print length becomes 1mm longer.

0 to 100 1mm
Setting value is increased. Setting value is decreased

.
Cut length
8-50
018 Cut Length 3 (Compensation of the length of a long print)
When you make a long print, the actual print length may become shorter than expected because
the paper is likely to shrink. It is possible in this mode to compensate the print length manually.
The length of long print is not compensated directly, but it is indirectly compensated by correcting
the length of A1 print.
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, the length of A1 print becomes 0.1mm longer per 10mm.

1 to 999 0.1mm
NOTE
It is necessary to finish the adjustment of Cut Length 1 (No.016) before starting the
adjustment in this Cut Length 3 (No.018).
[Example of adjustment]
1. Supposing the actual length of a long print is shorter than expected.

100
100
50
50
Expected length Actual length
0
0
C
Actual length is shorter than expected.
8-51
2. Make an A1 (841mm long) or 34” long print.
Measure the actual length of this A1 or 34” print to know how long millimeter it is shorter than
expected.
(Example: Print out is 838mm, so it is 3mm shorter than expected.)
A1 or 34”
3mm
3. Necessary value for the compensation is 10 times as long as the difference between actual
length and expected length.
It is “30” in this example. (3mm x 10 = 30)
Specify “30” as the setting value of No.018.
4. Make a long print.

The actual print out will be as long as expected.
100
100
50
50
0
0
C
8-52
019 Leading Margin
It is possible to adjust the length of the leading margin.
An image portion that corresponds to the given length of the leading margin is not printed.
The length of the leading margin becomes 0.1mm longer if you Increase the setting value by “+1 “.
Changing the value to “0” removes whole the margin, thus a portion image on the leading edge will
appear.

0 to 50 0.1mm
Default: 30
A 3mm Leading Margin added to leading edge.
Hides the corresponding part of image.
Example: 0
Leading Margin disappears.
Corresponding part of image printed.
NOTE
There is no guarantee of proper operation and image quality with a reduced leading margin
(less than 30 in the setting value).
Reference
Setting to “0” may result in a jam in Fuser Unit and a ghost image at approximately 252mm
from the leading edge.
8-53
022 to 027 Developer Bias
It is possible to make the print density darker or lighter by adjusting the Developer Bias (Negative
Developer Roller Bias).
The print density becomes lighter if you increase the setting value.
Item No. Setting Item Setting

range
022 Developer Bias (Plain paper) 0 to 4FF
023 Developer Bias (Tracing paper) 0 to 4FF
024 Developer Bias (Film) 0 to 4FF
025 Developer Bias 0 to 4FF
(Special media / Plain paper)
026 Developer Bias 0 to 4FF
(Special media / Tracing paper)
027 Developer Bias (Special media / Film) 0 to 4FF
NOTE
Please adjust the Developer Bias while checking the actual voltage with the multi-meter.
028 Developer Bias compensation - 1st Drum revolution

It is possible to compensate the Developer Bias only for the 1st Drum revolution.
The print density becomes lighter if you increase the setting value.
(Developer Bias is not compensated at all if the setting value is “0”)
Setting Range
0 to 255
Density of leading area is darker. Setting value is increased.

(Even density)
NOTE
There may be the case that the density of leading area, which corresponds to the 1st
revolution of Drum, is darker than other area.
In this case compensate the Developer Bias to have even density on both areas.
8-54
029 to 034 Transfer Voltage
It is possible to adjust the analog voltage outputted to the Transfer Corona during the print cycle.
Item No. Setting Item Setting

range
029 Transfer Corona Analog Voltage (Plain paper) 0 to 4FF
030 Transfer Corona Analog Voltage (Tracing paper) 0 to 4FF
031 Transfer Corona Analog Voltage (Film) 0 to 4FF
032 Transfer Corona Analog Voltage 0 to 4FF
(Special media / Plain paper)
(Special media / Tracing paper)
(Special media / Film)
NOTE
Please adjust Transfer Corona Analog Voltage while checking the actual voltage with the
multi-meter.
035 Separation Corona ON Timing

It is possible to adjust the timing that the Separation Corona starts discharging during the print
cycle.
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, the timing to start discharging is 1mm delayed.
Setting range Step of increment
0 to 100 1mm
8-55
037 Transfer Corona ON Timing
It is possible to adjust the timing that the Transfer Corona starts discharging during the print cycle.
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, the timing to start discharging is 1mm delayed.

0 to 100 1mm
NOTE
You may lose some leading image as the following example if you increase the setting value
too much, because the timing to start discharging is too much delayed.
Normal Setting value is increased too much.
Transfer Corona starts

discharging at this point
8-56
045 Fuser Temperature to start idling
It is possible to decide the temperature to start idling.
When the Fuser Temperature reaches the value specified in this No.045 during the warming up,
the Fuser Motor starts rotating to drive the Fuser Roller (idling).

100 to 140 1oC
Setting value of 625 to 648

(Example : 160 oC)
(oC)
Setting value of 045

(Example: 140 oC)
0 (Time)
Ready (Idling stops.)
Turn on Idling starts.
046 Warm Sleep – Fuser Temperature

It is possible to decide the temperature which is maintained in the Warm Sleep.

100 to 160 1oC

(Example: 160 oC)
(oC)
Setting value of 046

(Example: 100 oC)
0
(Time)
Warm Sleep starts.
100 oC is maintained after this point.
8-57
048, 049 Fuser Temperature Control Range
It is possible to specify the control range of temperature of Fuser Roller.
If you specify some setting value “X” on these No.048 and 049, for example, you can decide the
highest limit and the lowest one of the control range of temperature.
The highest limit is “Fuser Temperature (Decided in No.625 to 648, and 738)” plus the setting
value “X”.
And the lowest one is “Fuser Temperature” minus “X”.
The Fuser Lamp continues to light up when the temperature of Fuser Roller is colder than the
highest limit, and it is put out when the temperature reaches the highest limit.
The Fuser Roller gradually gets colder after that, and the Fuser Lamp lights again when the
temperature reaches the lowest limit.
Control range can be decided separately to each condition “in the print cycle” and “stand by”.

range increment
048 Fuser Temperature Control Range 1 to 6 1oC
(In the print cycle)
049 Fuser Temperature Control Range 1 to 6 1oC
(Stand by)
Example: Value of No.049 (Fuser Temperature Control Range) is “10”

Value of No.738 (Standby - Fuser Temperature) is “160”
Highest limit of control range Standby Fuser Temperature

(170 oC) (160 oC)
Fuser Lamp turns OFF.
(oC)
Lowest limit of control range Fuser Lamp turns ON.

(150 oC)
0 (Time)
8-58
050 Reaction Time of Toner Supply Motor
It is possible to change the reaction time of Toner Supply Motor.
“Reaction time” is the time taken until the Toner Supply Motor starts working since “Toner Low”
has been detected.
The reaction time becomes 1 second longer if you increase the setting value by “+1”.

1 to 30 1 second
Toner Low Motor starts working Motor stops
(Time)
Setting value of No.050
NOTE
The reaction time may be too long if the image gets lighter and lighter when you make large
volume prints continuously.
In this case try to decrease the setting value of No.050 to shorten the reaction time.
051 Toner Supply Motor ON Time

It is possible change the time the Toner Supply Motor works (ON time).
The ON time becomes 1 second longer if you increase the setting value.

1 to 75 1 second
Toner Low Motor starts working Motor stops
(Time)
Setting value of No.051
NOTE
The ON time may be too short if the image gets lighter and lighter when you make large
volume prints continuously.
In this case try to increase the setting value of No.051 to make the ON time longer.
8-59
052 Dot Enhancement Level (Dither)
It is possible to validate the Dot Enhancement function which makes an isolated dot look clearer.
An isolated dot image is more emphasized if you increase the setting value.
Setting value Contents

1 Emphasized
2 More emphasized
3 Most emphasized
Reference
(1) An isolated dot image tends to look so weak.

The Dot Enhancement function emphasizes the isolated dot so that it looks clear.
(Dot Enhancement function emphasizes only the isolated dot. It will not emphasize the
dots coming together some degree.)
Dot Enhancement function is OFF. Dot Enhancement function is ON.
(2) The Dot Enhancement function can be validated in the UI screen.

It will not work if not validated.
055 Metric or Inch

It is possible to decide the base format of the print.

0 Metric
1 Inch
NOTE
No.055 is effective only to the size format selection available in the UI screen.
This does not effect to the counting “unit”.
8-60
056 Language
NOTE
This setting does not function. Keep the value unchanged.
Setting Range
0 to 1
059 Count Unit (Counter A = Print Count)

It is possible to specify the counting unit of Print Count.

0 1 linear meter Reference
1 0.1 linear meter
2 1 square meter Size Count:
3 0.1 square meter A4/A3: 1 count
4 1 linear foot
A2: 2 counts
5 1 square foot
6 Size Count A1: 3 counts
A0: 5 counts
NOTE
No.059 is effective only to Print Count. Total Count always counts up in linear meter.
060 Maximum Length

It is possible to specify the maximum cut length.

0 Maximum cut length is 3.6m.
1 Maximum cut length is 6m.
NOTE
We will not guarantee the print quality if the print is longer than the following sizes.
A0 / 36” plain paper 2.4m

Other sizes of plain paper twice as long as each standard size
2 inch core plain paper Standard size
Tracing paper Standard size
Film Standard size
8-61
063, 064 Cut Length 5 & 6
(Length Compensation for Tracing Paper / Film)
It is possible to compensate the print length for the tracing paper and film.
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, the length of the print becomes longer.
Item No. Setting Item Setting range Step of increment
063 Cut Length 5 (Tracing Paper) 0 to 200 depends on paper length

064 Cut Length 6 (Film) 0 to 200 depends on paper length
An amount of the length to be added / removed against “1” increment of the setting value will vary
depending on the length of the media length to be printed.
“1” increment will correspond to the length listed below to be compensated.
length to be added /
paper length
removed (Approx.)
A0 (1189mm) 0.16mm
A1 (841mm) 0.11mm
A2 (594mm) 0.08mm
A3 (420mm) 0.05mm
A4 (297mm) 0.04mm

100
100
50
50
0
0
C
Increasing the value

100
100
50
50
0
0
C
8-62
065 Drum Reverse Time
It is possible to change the period for the Drum reverse rotation.
Developer Roller is strongly pressed to the Drum and that may cause an indentation on Developer
Roller’s surface. The indentation may result in defective imaging.
The Drum makes a reverse rotation in a given period twice after finishing a job.
Setting a bigger value for No.065 makes the reverse rotation period longer.

10 to 100 1 millisecond
Print process end

Drum reverse rotation starts stops / starts again stops
Value for No.065 (ms) Value for No.065 (ms)
Reference
(1) Drum reverse rotations may produce a slight amount of toner sticking on Drum’s surface.
This causes a black line about 50mm below the leading edge on a print.
Setting a smaller value will reduce such a line.
(2) Setting an extremely small value may cause an indentation on Developer Roller.
8-63
310 to 315 Main Motor Speed
It is possible to adjust the speed of Main Motor for each type of paper separately.
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, the motor speed becomes 0.02mm/second faster.
Item Setting Item Setting Step of

No. range increment
310 Main Motor Speed (Plain paper) 0 to 80 0.02mm/s
311 Main Motor Speed (Tracing paper) 0 to 80 0.02mm/s
312 Main Motor Speed (Film) 0 to 80 0.02mm/s
313 Main Motor Speed (Special plain paper) 0 to 80 0.02mm/s
314 Main Motor Speed (Special tracing paper) 0 to 80 0.02mm/s
315 Main Motor Speed (Special film) 0 to 80 0.02mm/s
CAUTION
The Main Motor Speed is the basis for many other print settings.
So you have to re-adjust all of these print settings if you change the Main Motor Speed.
508 to 510 Transfer Voltage applied at 100mm from trailing edge

It is possible to adjust the analog voltage to Transfer Corona on 100mm end of a print.
Item Setting Item Setting

No. range
508 Transfer Voltage applied at 100mm from trailing edge (Plain) 0 to 9FE
509 Transfer Voltage applied at 100mm from trailing edge (Tracing) 0 to 9FE
510 Transfer Voltage applied at 100mm from trailing edge (Film) 0 to 9FE
511 to 513 Transfer Voltage applied at 70mm from trailing edge

It is possible to adjust the analog voltage to Transfer Corona on 70mm end of a print.

No. range
511 Transfer Voltage applied at 70mm from trailing edge (Plain) 0 to 9FE
512 Transfer Voltage applied at 70mm from trailing edge (Tracing) 0 to 9FE
513 Transfer Voltage applied at 70mm from trailing edge (Film) 0 to 9FE
8-64
613 to 616 Judgment value for Additional Cut Length
for Non-standard Size Prints
It is possible to avoid the lack of trailing image on the non-standard size print, by providing
additional paper length by service modes 617 to 620 (Additional Cut Length for non-standard size
print).
Additional Cut Length specified by service mode 617 to 620 is not always provided.
Whether or not it is provided is judged by service mode 613 to 616 (Judgment value for “Additional
Cut Length for non-standard size print”.)

No. range increment
613 Judgment value for Additional Cut Length for Non-standard 1 to 20 1mm
Size Prints (36”/ 34”/ 30”/ A0 / B1)
Size Prints (24”/ 20”/ A1)
Size Prints (18”/ 17”/ 15”/ A2)
Size Prints (12”/ 11”/ A3)
Reference
(1) Which Judgement Value / Additional Cut Length setting is applied to a non-standard size
print depends on the corresponding roll width.
Judgement Additional
Roll Width Standard Size Standard Cut Length
Value Length
36" 36"x48" 1219mm
841mm A0 1189mm
34" 34"x44" 1118mm No.613 No.617
30" 30"x42" 1067mm
728mm B1 1030mm
24" 24"x36" 914mm
22" 22"x34" 864mm No.614 No.618
594mm A1 841mm
18" 18"x24" 610mm
420mm A2 594mm
No.615 No.619
17" 17"x22" 559mm
15" 15"x21" 533mm
12" 12"x18" 457mm
11" 11"x17" 432mm No.616 No.620
297mm A3 420mm
(next page)
8-65
Reference
(2) If the actual image length is longer than (or equal to) “A+B”, “C” is provided to the trailing
edge of non-standard size print.
A: Standard Cut Length (depends on roll width)

B: Value of “Judgement Value for “Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints”
C: Value of “Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints”
<Example> Actual Image Length: 860mm

A: 841mm (A1 roll width)
B: 10
C: 20
A (841mm) B (10)
Actual Image Length (860mm)
Print Length (880mm)
Actual Image Length (860mm) C (20)
(3) If the actual image length is shorter than “A+B”, the print is cut as long as the actual
image length. (“C” is not provided to the trailing edge of the print.)
A: Standard Cut Length (depends on roll width)

B: Value of “Judgement Value for “Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints”
C: Value of “Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints”
<Example> Actual Image Length: 845mm

A: 841mm (A1 roll width)
B: 10
C: 20
A (841mm) B (10)
Actual Image Length (845mm)
Print Length (845mm)
8-66
617 to 620 Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints
It is possible to avoid the lack of trailing image on the non-standard size print, by providing
additional paper length by service modes 617 to 620 (Additional Cut Length for non-standard size
print).
Additional Cut Length specified by service mode 617 to 620 is not always provided.
Whether or not it is provided is judged by service mode 613 to 616 (Judgment value for “Additional
Cut Length for non-standard size print”.)

No. range increment
617 Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints (36”/ 34”/ 30”/ A0 / B1) 0 to 35 1mm
618 Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints (24”/ 22”/ A2) 0 to 35 1mm
619 Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints (18”/ 17”/ 15”/ A2) 0 to 35 1mm
620 Additional Cut Length for Non-standard Size Prints (12”/ 11”/ A3) 0 to 35 1mm
621 Toner Supply Roller Bias

It is possible to make bias adjustment for Toner Supply Roller.
NOTE
This setting does not function. Change of this setting has no effect on the machine operation.
Setting Range
10 to 800
622 Regulation Bias

It is possible to make the print density darker or lighter by adjusting Regulation Bias (Center).
The print density becomes darker if you increase the setting value.
NOTE
Please adjust Regulation Bias while checking the actual voltage with the multi-meter.
Setting Range
10 to 800
624 Density Sensor Analog Voltage

NOTE
This setting has been factory-adjusted. Keep the value unchanged.
It is possible to change the default analog output of Density Sensor.

“Density Sensor Standard Output” (No.623) and “Density Sensor Analog Voltage” (No.624) are
used for Density Measure.
Setting Range
0 to 60
8-67
625 to 630 Print - Fuser Temperature (12”/11”/A3)
It is possible to adjust the Fuser Temperature for 12”/11”/A3 wide media in the print cycle.
You can specify the temperature for each type and size of media separately.
The Fuser Temperature becomes 1 degree higher if you increase the setting value by “+1”.

range increment
625 Print - Fuser Temperature 120 to 180 1oC
(Plain) (12” / 11” / A3)
(Tracing) (12” / 11” / A3)
(Film) (12” / 11” / A3)
(Special / Plain) (12” / 11” / A3)
(Special media / Film) (12” / 11” / A3)

(Example: Film 170oC)
(oC)
0 (Time)
Turn on Ready Print Job
631 to 636 Print - Fuser Temperature (18”/17”/15”/A2)

It is possible to adjust the Fuser Temperature for 8”/17”/15”/A2 wide media in the print cycle.

range increment
(Plain) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2)
(Tracing) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2)
(Film) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2)
(Special / Plain) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2)
(Special / Tracing) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2)
(Special / Film) (18” / 17” / 15” / A2)
8-68
637 to 642 Print - Fuser Temperature (24”/22”/A1)
It is possible to adjust the Fuser Temperature for 24”/22”/A1 wide media in the print cycle.

range increment
(Plain) (24” / 22” / A1)
(Tracing) (24” / 22” / A1)
(Film) (24” / 22” / A1)
(Special / Plain) (24” / 22” / A1)
(Special / Film) (24” / 22” / A1)
643 to 648 Print - Fuser Temperature (36”/34”/30”/A0/B1)

It is possible to adjust the Fuser Temperature for 36”/34”/30”/A0/B1 wide media in the print cycle.

range increment
(Plain) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1)
(Tracing) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1)
(Film) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1)
(Special / Plain) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1)
(Special / Tracing) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1)
(Special / Film) (36” / 34” / 30” / A0 / B1)
649 Density Sensor Output Monitor
NOTE
This setting is factory-use only. Keep the value unchanged.
It is possible to change the mode to monitor the default analog output of Density Sensor.
Setting Range
2 to 9
8-69
652 Density Compensation ON/OFF
It is possible to decide whether Density Compensation is enabled.

0 Density Compensation Process is disabled
1 Density Compensation Process is enabled
Reference
Density Compensation Process is performed as follows.
1. Several solid patches are created on Drum and are measured by Density Sensor at a
regular interval of Main Motor operating time (No.655).
This is called Density Measure.
2. If the current density value (calculated based on Density Measure) does not meet Target
Density (No.653), one of the Adjustment Level listed below will be applied.
3. Developer Bias and Regulation Bias (No.650) will be adjusted based on the current
Adjustment Level.

Level 0 Level 1 (Default) Level 2 Level 3
Developer Bias -180V -230V -230V -230V
(Negative)
Regulation Bias -80V -80V -120V -160V
against Developer Bias

Level 0 Level 1 (Default) Level 2 Level 3
0V
Developer Bias
-100V -180V
-230V -230V -230V
-200V 50V
80
80
-300V 40V 120
160
Regulation Bias 40V

against
-400V Developer Bias
-500V
NOTE
Even if Developer Unit is replaced, still the current Auto Adjustment will continue to be
applied.
An applied Auto Adjustment Level should be manually set to “0000001” after replacing
Developer Unit.
8-70
653 Target Density
NOTE
It is possible to change Target Density that should be achieved and maintained for consistent print
density.
If the current density does not meet Target Density, Regulation (Developer) Bias will be
automatically adjusted based on the current Adjustment Level.
 If the current Density Value is judged “not enough” (lighter than required), the next level will be
applied.
 If the current Density Value is judged “adequate”, the current level remains.
 There is possibility for the Density Value to be judged “too much enough” (darker than
required), then the previous level will be applied.
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, Target Density will rise and thus Auto Adjustment Level
would be switched to the next level earlier.
Setting Range
000 to 400
654 Toner Patch Adjustment
NOTE
Setting Range
0 to 16
655 Density Measure Interval
NOTE
It is possible to change an interval of Density Measure.

When Bias 3 Time in Information Mode reaches a specified period in this setting, Density Measure
will run.
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, the interval of Density Measure becomes 1 hour longer.

1 to 18 1 hour
8-71
660 to 665 Ready - Fuser Temperature
It is possible to specify “Ready” temperature.
You can specify the temperature for each type of media separately.
This setting will be applied only when Fuser Temperature is below 50oC at turning on the machine.

range increment
660 Ready - Fuser Temperature (Plain) 120 to 180 1oC
661 Ready - Fuser Temperature (Tracing) 120 to 180 1oC
662 Ready - Fuser Temperature (Film) 120 to 180 1oC
663 Ready - Fuser Temperature (Special / Plain) 120 to 180 1o C
664 Ready - Fuser Temperature (Special / Tracing) 120 to 180 1oC
665 Ready - Fuser Temperature (Special / Film) 120 to 180 1oC
After reaching “Ready”, fuser temperature will rise 10 oC higher than “Ready” (Overshoot) in 10
minutes. Then it will be maintained within “Standby” temperature.
Fuser Temperature Overshoot

in 10 minutes after Ready
(oC) Standby
Overshoot
Setting value of
“Ready - Temperature”
50 oC
0 (Time)
Turn on Ready
8-72
738 Standby - Fuser Temperature
It is possible to adjust the Fuser Temperature to be maintained while waiting for a print job. You
can specify the temperature for the center and the sides separately.
This setting is applied after the period of Fuser Temperature Overshoot (+10oC against “Ready -
Temperature” in 10 minutes).

120 to 800 1oC
Fuser Temperature Overshoot

in 10 minutes after Ready
(oC)
Setting value of
“Standby - Temperature”
(Example 160oC)
0 (Time)
Turn on Ready Standby
749 Tracing Mode

Even in “ready” condition, the fuser temperature is controlled slightly lower than “Print” temperature
in order to reduce inside temperature.
It quickly rises up to “Print” temperature at the same time as the printer starts printing an output job.
This setting will keep media feeding wait for the completion of the fuser temperature recovery.
Note that Tracing Mode is effective only for an extremely thin tracing paper (off-specification).

0 Fuser temperature starts recovery as soon as a print job is sent.
1 A print on tracing paper will start after recovery of fuser temperature.
8-73
751 Disable HV Error Detection Mode
“Disable HV Error Detection Mode” functions just as Error Mask Mode for high voltage errors.
This allows the system to ignore service call errors regarding high voltage power supply (E-0031,
E-0032, E-0033, E-0034) and prevents the concerning error code from being displayed both on the
sub UI and the touch screen.
“Disable HV Error Detection Mode” ON is not canceled by turning off the machine, but remains
until set to OFF manually.

0 HV error detection works normally.
1 The system ignores any HV Error.
NOTE
TAKE GREAT CARE. The system ignores high voltage errors caused by ANY REASON
while “Disable HV Error Detection Mode” is ON.
It is recommended that “Disable HV Error Detection Mode” remains OFF in the usual usage.
753 Counter Setting
NOTE
This setting does not function. Keep the value unchanged from “0”.

0 Keep the value unchanged.
1 Never use.
754 Total Increment of Developer Bias Adjustment
NOTE
This item only shows the conversion value of the current analog output for Developer Bias.
Setting Range
000 to 9FE
8-74
755 Developer Bias Increment for Adjustment Level 1 and after
NOTE
It is possible to change the amount (increment) of Developer Bias Adjustment.

A specified increment of Developer Bias will be applied at switching to and as of Auto Adjustment
Level 1.
The default voltage value of the increment is approximately 50V (corresponding to “80” in the
setting value) for switching to Auto Adjustment Level 1. The increased Developer Bias will be
applied to the subsequent Auto Adjustment Level.
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, the increment of Developer Bias Adjustment becomes
higher.

0 to 800 0.5V
756, 757 Developer Bias Limit
NOTE
These items specify the minimum / maximum Developer Bias.

No. range
755 Developer Bias Limit (minimum, absolute value) 000 to 9FE
756 Developer Bias Limit (maximum, absolute value) 000 to 9FE
758 Total Increment of Regulation Bias Adjustment
NOTE
This item only shows the conversion value of the current analog output for Regulation Bias.
Setting Range
0 to 340
8-75
759 Regulation Bias Increment for Adjustment Level 2 and after
NOTE
It is possible to change the amount (increment) of Regulation Bias on Auto Adjustment.

A specified increment of Regulation Bias will be applied at switching to Auto Adjustment Level 2
and Level 3.
The default voltage value of the increment is about 40V (corresponding to “80” in the setting value)
for switching to Auto Adjustment Level 2 and 3.
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, the increment of Regulation Bias Adjustment becomes
about 0.5V higher.

0 to 200 0.5V
760, 761 Regulation Bias Limit
NOTE
These items specify the minimum / maximum Regulation Bias.

No. range
760 Regulation Bias Limit (minimum, absolute value) 0 to 399
761 Regulation Bias Limit (maximum, absolute value) 400 to 800
762 to 767 Developer Reference Bias
NOTE
It is possible to define the 6 values for Developer Reference Bias analog voltage.

No. range
762 Developer Reference Bias 1 000 to 9FE
Developer Reference Bias are used only to find out the possible best output voltage of Developer
Bias for the target density.
8-76
768 Motor Setting
NOTE

0 Keep the value unchanged.
1 Never use.
769 Wait Time of Media Feed Start

The start timing of media feeding from the Roll Deck can be adjustable. This is used just in case a
horizontal, weak, black line appears on a print in 10mm of the leading edge.
Decreasing the setting value will delay the start timing to feed roll media.

0 to 60 100 milliseconds
770, 771 Additional Toner Supply Time

These items specify the period of operation time of Toner Supply Motor. These are applied only to
the User’s “additional” Toner Supply Command on the UI screen.
NOTE
Toner Supply time for “initial toner setup” is fixed in 10 minutes and is not adjustable.
Item Setting Item Default Setting Step of

No. Value range increment
770 Additional Toner Supply Time 9 1 to 30 min
(toner supply motor ON)
771 Additional Toner Toner Supply Time 1 1 to 30 min
(Agitation only)
8-77
772, 773 Horizontal Alignment of LED Block
The LED Head Unit consists of 3 image blocks.
If the alignment between Block A / B or Block B / C in the horizontal direction (main scanning
direction) is out of position, a black (or white) line appears at the border of the Blocks.
These are used to shift the concerning Block to right / left against Block B. Block B is the reference.
No.772 for Block A, No.773 for Block C.
Increasing the setting value shifts the concerning Block (A or C) to the right.
Decreasing the setting value shifts the concerning Block (A or C) to the left.
Printing Direction
Block A Block C
Block B

No. Range increment
772 Horizontal Alignment of LED Block A/B 2 to 114 pixel
773 Horizontal Alignment of LED Block B/C 2 to 114 pixel
Reference
Test Pattern No.9 S(3) is an integrated test pattern image for margins at edges, focus and
pixcel sticth check.
Border of A/B by Border of B/C by

current result current result
wrong sample: overlap wrong sample: gap
overlapping border pixels a gap at border looks a

looks a black line Correct sample white line
8-78
Example)
- The border between Block A/B has a white line. (= Block A displaced in left, apart from Block B)
 Block A should move right to touch with Block B.
white line at Border A/B
gap
gap
Block B: reference
Block A Block B
In this case, increase No.772 to shift Block A to the right side.
Block A moves right

Block A Block B
Compare the current border result and the samples, and find in how many pixel(s) the gap is.
current result gap samples
1 pixel 3 pixels 5 pixels

2 pixels 4 pixels
On the other hand, to remove a black line between Block A/B (= Block A displaced in left,
overlapping Block B), decrease No.772 and shift Block A left to remove overlap.
NOTE
For a gap / overlap in less than 1 pixel, see [778, 779 Strobe Time Adjustment on Border
Pixels].
8-79
- The border between Block B/C has a black line. (= Block C displaced in left, overlapping Block B)
 Block C should move right to remove overlap with Block B.
black line at Border B/C
overlap
overlap
Block B: reference
Block B Block C
In this case, increase No.773 to shift Block C to the right side.
Block C moves to
Block B Block C
right in 1 pixel
Compare the current border result and the samples, and find how many pixel(s) is overlapping.
overlap samples current result
5 pixels 3 pixels 1 pixel

4 pixels 2 pixels
On the other hand, to remove a white line between Block B/C (= Block C displaced in right, apart
from Block B), decrease No.773 and shift Block C left to touch with Block B.
NOTE
For a gap / overlap in less than 1 pixel, see [778, 779 Strobe Time Adjustment on Border
Pixels].
8-80
774 to 777 Dot Light Level on Border Pixel
NOTE
Item No.772 or 773 cannot remove a “less than 1 pixel gap / overlap”.
No.774 to 777 can strengthen or weaken the dot light level data for the border pixels.
These compensate the dot light level programmed the concerning LED Head, not the strobe time.
Decrease the value to weaken the dot light level for a weak black line.
Increase the value to strengthen the dot light level for a weak white line.
Which pixels to be applied which item is as follows.

No. Range
774 Dot Light Level (Block A/B, border one pixel) 0 to 40
775 Dot Light Level (Block B/C, border one pixel) 0 to 40
776 Dot Light Level (Block A/B, the next pixel to borderl) 0 to 40
777 Dot Light Level (Block B/C, the next pixel to border) 0 to 40
The border pixel No.774 No.775
The pixel next to the border No.776 No.777
The border B/C is overlapping in less than 1 pixel.

A weaker border may reduce the strength of the overlap image.
Block B
8-81
778, 779 Strobe Time Adjustment on Border Pixel
The LED Head Unit consists of 3 image blocks.
If the alignment between Block A / B or Block B / C in the horizontal direction (main scanning
direction) is out of position by “less than 1 pixel gap / overlap”, a weak black (or white) line appears
at the border of the Blocks.
Item No.772 or 773 cannot remove a “less than 1 pixel gap / overlap”.
No.778 or 779 can lengthen or shorten the strobe time for the border pixels.
These compensate the strobe time, not the dot light level.
Decrease the value to shorten the strobe time for a weak black line.
Increase the value to lengthen the strobe time for a weak white line.
Which pixels to be applied which item is as follows.

No. range
778 Strobe Time Adjustment on Border Pixel (Block A/B) 6 to 14
779 Strobe Time Adjustment on Border Pixel (Block B/C) 6 to 14
No.778 No.779
Block A Block C
Block B
The border B/C is overlapping in less than 1 pixel.

Decrease the setting value to shorten the strobe time for
these 2 pixels.
This will reduce the strength of the overlap image.
Block B: reference
8-82
780 Leading Registration (Paper Tray)
It is possible to specify where to start printing the image at the leading edge of a sheet from the
Paper Tray.
If you increase the setting value by “+1 “, the head of image is shifted 1mm downward toward the
trailing edge As a result the leading margin becomes larger.

1 to 40 1mm
Leading Registration
value is increased. value is decreased.
781 Trailing Margin (Paper Tray)

It is possible to adjust the length of trailing margin of a sheet from the Paper Tray.
The length of trailing margin becomes 1mm longer if you Increase the setting value by “+1 “.

1 to 40 1mm
Trailing Margin
NOTE
Some trailing image may be lost if you decrease the value too much.
8-83
782 Side Registration (Paper Tray)
It is possible to specify where to start printing the image at the side edge of a sheet from the Paper
Tray.
If you increase the setting value by “+1 “, image is shifted 0.1mm to the right.

0 to 100 0.1mm
Side Registration
783 Forced Initial Cut Before Print (Cut Length)

Under a certain usage environment, the first print of a job sometimes would have a wrinkle or an
image void if the prints are made with a roll media left in the deck for a long period.
“Forced Initial Cut Before Print” is a function to make an automatic initial cut in a certain amount at
the leading edge before processing a job to obtain image quality and feed balance in such
conditions.
No.783 specifies how long millimeters to be cut (and ejected) by “Forced Initial Cut Before Print”.
Note that you can configure which media type “Forced Initial Cut Before Print” works on in the UI
screen.

279 to 600 1mm
Reference
No.783 Specifies “how long” to be cut. “Forced Initial Cut Before Print” can be validated in
the UI screen by media type.
8-84
784, 785 Limit Temperature of LED Stitch Compensation
NOTE
Under an extremely hot / cold emvironment, LED Blocks are compensated additionally.
No. 784, 785 work as a threshold of the temperature for that.

No. range
784 Upper Limint Temperature of LED Stitch Compensation 30 to 50
785 Lower Limint Temperature of LED Stitch Compensation 10 to 20
786 Paper Tray Motor Speed

It is possible to adjust the speed of Paper Tray Motor.
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, the motor speed becomes 0.4mm/second faster.

1 to 19 0.4mm
787 Transfer Corona ON Timing Compensation (Paper Tray)

It is possible to adjust the timing that the Transfer Corona starts discharging during the print cycle.
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, the timing to start discharging is 1ms delayed.

1 to 999 1millisecond
NOTE
You may lose some leading image as the following example if you increase the setting value
too much, because the timing to start discharging is too much delayed.
Transfer Corona starts

discharging at this point
8-85
788 Transfer Corona OFF Timing (Paper Tray)
It is possible to adjust the timing that the Transfer Corona stops discharging during the print cycle.
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, the timing to stop discharging is 1ms delayed.

1 to 999 1millisecond
NOTE
You may lose some trailing image as the following example if you decrease the setting value
too much, because the Transfer Corona stops discharging too early.
Transfer Corona stops

discharging at this point.
8-86
789 to 800 Transfer Corona OFF Timing (Roll, Cut Sheet)
It is possible to adjust the timing that the Transfer Corona stops discharging during the print cycle.
This can be configured by every media type / width.
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, the timing to stop discharging is 1mm delayed.

0 to 100 1mm
Plain Tracing Film

Paper Paper
A3, 11”, 12” No.789 No.790 No.791
A2, 15”, 17”, 18” No.792 No.793 No.794
A1, 22”, 24” No.795 No.796 No.797
A0, B1, 30”, 34”, 36” No.798 No.799 No.800
NOTE
You may lose some trailing image as the following example if you decrease the setting value
too much, because the Transfer Corona stops discharging too early.
Transfer Corona stops

discharging at this point.
8-87
801 to 812 Separation Corona OFF Timing (Roll, Cut Sheet)
It is possible to adjust the timing that the Separation Corona stops discharging during the print
cycle. This can be configured by every media type / width.
If you increase the setting value by “+1”, the timing to stop discharging is 1mm delayed.

0 to 100 1mm
Plain Tracing Film

Paper Paper
A3, 11”, 12” No.801 No.802 No.803
A2, 15”, 17”, 18” No.804 No.805 No.806
A1, 22”, 24” No.807 No.808 No.809
A0, B1, 30”, 34”, 36” No.810 No.811 No.812
813 Encoder Type
NOTE
An incorrect setting would cause improper cut length.
No.813 specifies the type of the pulse generator wheel on “Feed Encoder” (PH4, PENC_S).
Setting Range
0 to 1
8-88
8. 6. 4 Creating Backup
It is possible to save the current parameters in Adjustment Mode as RAM file.
RAM file can be used for backup measure.
NOTE
Prior to any attempts at significant changes on Adjustment Mode, export the current
parameters to .RAM file.
1. Press [Export] in Adjustment Menu screen.
2. Input any text to the field. The text will be added to a folder name to be created in the next step.
The machine’s serial no. would be suitable.
8-89
3. Specify a place to save the current parameter.
It will be saved as both *.txt and *.ram in a folder that is automatically created there at this time.
*.ram is used for backup of the current parameter. You can use it to import the parameter to
machines.
*.txt” is only used for simplified confirmation with an appropriate application such as Notepad.
4. You can print out the summary of the saved parameter at this time.
(Set 1 sheet of 210 x 297mm cut sheet to the Manual Feed Table)
8-90
8. 6. 5 Restoring Configuration from Backup
It is possible to restore the parameters by using a RAM file that has been saved before.
This can be used for the following possible cases.
- If the current parameters have loss or damage of data.

- To apply parameters of a certain printer to another.
1. Press [Import] in Adjustment Menu screen.
2. Locate and open a RAM file that you want to apply.
3. The system reads all the parameters in the RAM file.

Then the parameters will be applied to “New Value” field.
NOTE
At this point, IPS Service Software just reads and displays the parameters in the RAM
file, but the parameters do not take effect on PW11720 yet.
Follow the later step to apply the read parameters to PW11720.
8-91
4. Press [Save]. After confirmation, the read parameters will be sent to PW11720.
8-92
8. 7 Running Mode
In Running Mode, the printer takes usual printing operation with no print media loaded.
If you install any roll media, it is transported and ejected from the printer as usual as normal print.
Note that the printer will continue printing till the media empty.
NOTE
Running Mode is not available in Service Mode. Factory Use Only.
8. 8 Jam/Error Mask Mode

If the printer indicates any error (J-****/E-****), it is possible to mask (ignore, not to detect) it in
Jam/Error Mask Mode. The error (J-****/E-****) you have chosen to mask will not be detected by
masking. You can temporarily operate the printer as usual as normal condition even if a cause of
the error is not removed yet.
NOTE
Masking condition will be automatically canceled once you quit IPS Service Software or turn
off the printer.
Mask Target screen
1 2
Name Function
1 Paper Jam Switches to Jam Mask screen
2 Error Switches to Error Mask screen
8-93
Jam Mask screen
2 3
Name Function
1 Mask List Displays Mask items in drop-down menu
Choose one item that you want to mask.
2 Check All Starts jam masking against all the items
3 Uncheck All Cancels jam masking against checked items
4 media situation Specifies which situation to be masked.
to be masked * “Early” is not available on the TASKalfa 2420w
8-94
Error Mask screen
2 3
Name Function
1 Mask List Displays Mask items in the list
Select mask target(s) that you want to mask.
Starts error masking while item(s) is checked
2 Check All Starts error masking against all the items
3 Uncheck All Cancels error masking against checked items
8-95
8. 8. 1 Mask List
Jam Mask
0000 Feed Feeding Jam
0001 Manual Manual Jam
0002 Regist Registration Jam
0003 Sep Internal Jam
0004 Exit Fuser / Exit Cover Jam
0005 Paper Tray Pickup Jam (Paper Tray)
Error Mask
Main Motor Main Motor Error E-0010
Fuser Motor (motor setting error) E-0011
Dev. Set Developer Unit Set Error E-0070
Counter (counter setting error) E-0020
Im Corona Image Corona Output Error E-0031
Tr Corona Transfer Corona Output Error E-0033
Sp Corona Separation Corona Output Error E-0032
Dev. Bias Developer Bias Error E-0034
FPGA FPGA Error E-0050
Density Sensor Density Sensor Error E-0080
E-0081
Fuse Fuse Error E-0005
Eraser Eraser Lamp Error E-0090
8-96
8. 8. 2 Masking Jam
1. Press [Jam Error Mask] in Service Mode Home.
Mask Target screen appears.
8-97
2. Press [Paper Jam].
8-98
3. Select the desired target from the pull-down menu.
Check any of “Remain” / “Delay” / “Early” then the concerning sensor starts to ignore the
checked jam.
NOTE
Available mask situation selection (Remain, Delay, Early) may vary by the printer model.
8-99
8. 8. 3 Masking Error
1. Press [Jam Error Mask] in Service Mode Home.
Mask Target screen appears.
8-100
2. Press [Error].
8-101
3. Check items that you want to mask. Then the concerning sensor starts to ignore the checked
Error.
NOTE
No “Door Open” mask is available.
8-102
8. 9 Test Print Mode
It is possible to output some built-in test patterns as a stand alone plotter.
No external device (controller / scanner / network connection) is required for test pattern plotting.
Basic Setting screen
10
6
1
2 7
11 9
Name Function
1 Deck Displays media source in drop-down menu
Choose one item that you want to use for test print.
2 Width Displays media width of the selected media source in drop-down
menu
You can set a different width from the actual media.
3 Length Displays print length of the test print in drop-down menu
Specify one item for test print.
4 Magnification The print length will extend n times specified in “Magnifying”.
5 Media Type Displays media type in drop-down menu
Specify one media type of the selected media source.
6 Image Pattern Displays built-in image pattern number in drop-down menu
Specify one pattern that you want to plot.
7 Pattern Switch Specify a size code for the size of “repeated patterns” in a test
print image. (ex. band pattern width, grid square size, etc)
8 Number of Sheet Displays the number of sheets to be plotted
You can change the number by using On-screen Keypad.
9 Start Starts the configured test print
10 Option Switches to Option screen
8-103
Option screen
2
5
Name Function
1 Positive / Choose “Negative” for B/W inverting.
Negative
2 Image Displays Image Enhancement Level
Enhancement
3 Mirror Enables horizontal reverse image
4 Add Scale Adds scales on the test print
5 Basic Setting Switches to Basic Setting screen
8-104
8. 9. 1 Making Test Print
1. Press [Test Print] in Service Mode home.
8-105
2. Configure a test print job.
In Basic Setting tab, you can configure media source, type, length, image pattern selection,
number of sheets.
3. If necessary, open Option tab to configure some other settings.
4. Press [Start] to start printing the configured test print.
8-106
8. 9. 2 Built-in Test Pattern
Image may vary by Side Code.
Pattern No.1 Pattern No.4 Pattern No.7

Side Code 3
example:
Pattern #4, Size Code 0: white image
Pattern #4, Size Code 1: black image
Pattern #5, Size Code 0: huge lattice
Pattern #5, Size Code 1, 2, 3…: smaller lattice
Some image patterns are factory-used only.
8. 10 Factory Adjustment Mode

This mode is mainly used at factory for adjustment and product operation test.
NOTE
Factory Adjustment Mode is not available in Service Mode. Factory Use Only.
8-107
8. 11 Special Operation Mode
Special Operation Mode has several kinds of special important functions to the machine.
(1) Clears the following recorded error

- E-0000 Fuser Temperature Rising Error
- E-0001 Fuser Over Temperature Error
- E-0002 Fuser Low Temperature Error
- E-0003 / 0004 Fuser Temperature Abnormal Fall Error
(2) Clears the following history
- Jam History
- Error History
(3) Resets bias adjustment by Density Compensation Process
(4) Starts Toner Supply for initial toner
(5) Resets any counting parameters in Information Mode
NOTE
E-0000 / 0001 / 0002 / 0003 / 0004 (regarding Fuser Error) do not disappear automatically
even if you remove any cause of these errors.
You should clear the error in Special Operation Mode to allow the printer to be ready for
printing.
Operation Target screen
Name Function
1 Name of Mode Displays items in drop-down menu
Choose one item that you want to use.
2 Enter Switches to Confirmation screen
Clearing is not executed immediately once you press [Enter].
8-108
Input screen
2 4
Name Function
1 Counter Name Displays the counter name you have chosen
2 Reading Displays the current counter value stored in the memory
3 Count Displays an input counter value by using On-screen Keypad
4 Rewrite Applies a new counter value in “Count” to the selected counter
5 Return Returns to Operation Target screen
8-109
8. 11. 1 Special Operation List
Item No. Name Contents
0000 RAM Clear Clears any stored data in the memory
0001 Error Clear Clears E-0000 / 0001 / 0002 / 0003 / 0004
from the memory
0002 Jam History Clears Jam records J-**** in Jam History list
0003 Error History Clears Error records E-**** in Error History list
0004 Print Count Checks the counter value for Print Count (unit selectable)
0005 Total Count Checks the counter value for Total Count (linear meter)
0007 Toner Supply1 Starts toner supply / agitation in Developer Unit
0008 Info Data Clear Clears the Items 0009 to 0027 at a time
0009 Total Cut Clears each Item used in Information Mode
0010 Roll1 Cut See [8.4 Information Mode]
0011 Others Cut
0012 Total Image
0013 Manual1 Image
0014 Roll1 Image
0015 Cassette Image
0016 Roll1F CL
0017 Feed CL
0018 Reg. CL
0019 Guide CL
0020 Cassette CL
0021 Pickup SL
0022 NC (Reserved)
0023 NC (Reserved)
0024 Motor1 Time
0025 Motor2 Time
0026 LED Head on Time
0027 Image Ratio
0028 NC (Reserved)
0029 PM Count1 Checks the remainder counter for Service Kit A
0030 PM Count2 Checks the remainder counter for Service Kit B
0031 PM Count3 Checks the remainder counter for Service Kit C
0032 PM Count4 (Reserved)
NOTE
Total Count (0005) and Print Count (0004) are stored on both PW11720 and the IPS. The
counting memory is always verified between them. If you replace one of them, the other
will automatically override the Count memory to the replaced component.
8-110
8. 11. 2 Clearing Fuser Error, Jam/Error History
8-111
2. Specify one item that you want to use from Name of mode menu. Press [Enter].
Item No. Clear Item Contents

0001 Error Clear Clears E-0000 / 0001 / 0002 / 0003 / 0004
from the memory
0002 Jam History Clears Jam records J-**** in Jam History list
0003 Error History Clears Error records E-**** in Error History list

Press [Agree] to clear the concerning record(s).
4. Once you press [Agree], it will turn deactivated. Press [RETURN].
8-112
8. 11. 3 Reset of Bias Adjustment by Density Compensation Process
NOTE
After replacing Developer Unit, you must set bias adjustment by Density Compensation
Process to “1”.
Otherwise a darker image appears because the adjusted values are too high voltage for the
refreshed Developer Unit.
Reference
Reset function is also included in [Developer Replacement Procedure] in the wizard.

Setting Bias Adjustment to “1” manually in this section and pressing [Reset] button in the
wizard works completely the same.
Refer to [9.1 Confirmation Wizard] as well.

8-113

3. Confirmation screen appears. Press [EDIT].
8-114
Input “1” with the on-screen Keypad.
NOTE
The required value for the TASKalfa 2420w to reset Bias Adjustment by Density
Compensation Process is “0000001”.
“0000000” to “0000003” correspond to the Adjustment Level in Density Compensation

Process.

Once you input a value, [Rewrite] will be activated.
The value in “Reading” area will be changed to the new value.
8-115
8. 11. 4 Toner Supply Mode
8-116
2. Select [0007 Toner Supply1] from Name of mode menu. Press [Enter].
0007 Toner Supply1 Starts toner supply / agitation in Developer Unit

Toner supply / agitation starts. This will take 10 minutes to complete.
8-117
4. Once you press [Agree], it will turn deactivated. Press [Return].
5. The screen goes back to Operation Target Screen. The status window shows “warm up” during
toner supply / agitation.
After the completion, it changes to “standby”.
8-118
8. 12 Send Firmware Mode
You can send a new version firmware program provided by the manufacturer to the printer.
Note that the firmware program is named “K117X##A.mot”.
NOTE
A firmware update does not effect to the current parameters. They remain unchanged.
But please be sure to make a backup in .RAM prior to any firmware update just in case.
Send Firmware screen
7
1
5
3 4
Name Function
1 Mode Select Use “Program Mode” usually.
2 CPU Type Use “2398F” only.
3 Program Size Displays the file size of a selected firmware program (.mot fie)
4 Checksum Displays the checksum of a selected .mot file
5 Select File Locates a .mot file that you want to send to the printer
6 Update Sends a selected .mot file to the printer
7 COM Displays a COM port number on the controller to be used for
communication that has been configured in Serial Port Setting of
Log In screen
8-119
8. 12. 1 Sending Firmware to Printer
1. Press [Send Firmware] in Service Mode Home.
Send Firmware screen appears.
8-120
2. Choose “Program Mode” from Mode Select menu if not displayed.
8-121
3. Press [Select File] to locate and open a .mot file that you want to apply.
NOTE
For TASKalfa 2420w, its firmware program is always named “K117X##A.mot”
Do not open any other file.
8-122
4. Check for the program size and its checksum of the .mot file you have chosen.
Press [Update] to send it to the printer.
NOTE
“Program Size” and “Checksum” vary by the firmware version.
8. 12. 2 In case of transmission failure

1. Retry to send the firmware in the same way.
2. If the communication cannot be established any more, that is because the firmware file stored
in PW11720 PCB would be collapsed.
Turn off the machine. Loosen 2 screws (1), remove 4 screws (2) to remove the rear cover (3).
2
1
8-123
3. On PW11720 PCB Assy (4), switch the #2 of “DSW1” to ON.
This allows the firmware to overwritten to PW11720 PCB Assy.
DSW1
DSW1
DSW1
Operation Position Force Overwrite Position

1 2
1 2
ON
ON
8-124
4. Turn on the machine.
On Send Firmware screen, choose “Boot Mode” from Mode Selection menu.
5. Select a firmware program file. Press [Send].
6. When finished successfully, turn off the machine.
7. On PW11720 PCB Assy, switch #2 of “DSW1” to OFF. (original position)
DSW1
Force Overwrite Position Operation Position

1 2
1 2
ON
ON
8. Return the rear cover.
8-125
8. 13 Scanner Utility
Scanner Utility 1.31 or later is a program that provides several scanner adjustments.
- Shading (mono/color calibration)
- Feed Distance (1:1)
- Position (stitch)
8. 13. 1 Installation
NOTE
Below are the system requirements to operate Scanner Utility.
 Windows 2000 / XP operating system
 USB 2.0 support
 USB Driver for communication with Scanner Unit (version 1.30 or later)
8. 13. 1. 1 Installing USB Driver

NOTE: Contact your Partner for the latest software and save it to any available storage on
your service PC.
1. Loosen 2 screws (1), remove 4 screws (2) to remove Cover 32 (3).
2
1
2. Open 2 wire saddles (4) to release the Scanner USB Cable (5).
Disconnect the Scanner USB Cable (5) from IPS.
5 4
4
8-126
3. Open 2 wire saddles (6) to release the Scanner USB Cable (5).
4. Connect the Scanner USB Cable to any USB port on your service PC.
5. Turn on both your PC and the printer.

[Found New Hardware Wizard] for “K117SC” starts automatically.
If the following message appears, choose “No, not this time” and click [Next].
6. Choose “Install the software automatically [Recommended]”. Click [Next].
K117SC
8-127
NOTE
If the auto detection does not work properly, click “Install from a list of specific location
[Advanced]” to locate the driver software (.ini).
7. Click [Continue Anyway] when the following message is indicated.
8. Click [Finish] to close [Found New Hardware Wizard].
9. Open Device Manager, and confirm that “K117SC” (under Imaging Device) is operating
properly.
10. Cycle the machine power.
8-128
8. 13. 1. 2 Installing Scanner Utility (1.31 or later)
NOTE
(1) Below are the system requirements to operate Scanner Utility.
 Windows 2000 / XP operating system
 USB 2.0 support
 USB Driver for communication with Scanner Unit (version 1.30 or later)
(2) Use version 1.31 or later.
(3) Contact your Partner for the latest software and save it to any available storage on your
service PC.
1. Locate your SETUP.EXE for Scanner Utility and execute it.
2. The Setup program starts. Click [Next].
3. The destination of the software can be changed. Click [Next].
8-129
4. The name of the program folder can be changed. Click [Next].
5. The following message is indicated when all files have been copied. Click [Finish].
8-130
6. Open the properties panel for the “Scanner Utility” shortcut on “Start” _”Program” _ “Scanner
Utility” _ “Scanner Utility”. (ex. right click on the shortcut)
7. Add the following text to the end of the target path. Click [Apply].
“(one byte space)/Maintenance”
8-131
8. 13. 2 Starting Scanner Utility
Start Scanner Utility by; “Start” _”Program” _ “ScannerUtility” _ “ScannerUtility”
(Scanner Utility’s initial screen)
8-132
8. 13. 3 Checking Scanner Information
8. 13. 3. 1 Displaying Scanner Information
1. Select [Scanner] - [Information].
2. Scanner Utility acquires the scanner information and displays it.
XXX
This is just an example.

Revision Level (Scanner Firmware version) may vary from the actual one.
8-133
8. 13. 3. 2 File Check
1. Select [Scanner] - [Check Firmware].
2. Press [Execute].
File Check OK:
File Check failed:
Press [OK] to select a proper firmware file to overwrite.

See [8.13.5 Updating Scanner Firmware].
8-134
8. 13. 4 Scanner Adjustment Procedure
It is possible to make the following scanner adjustment with Scanner Utility.
 Shading (calibration)
 Feed Distance (1:1)
 Position (stitching)
These adjustments are very important because they are greatly related with the image quality.
8. 13. 4. 1 Shading (calibration)

[Purpose of Shading (calibration)]
The pixels on the CIS are not same but they have their own characteristic.
This may be a problem because the inputs (density) from those pixels are uneven although they
read the same image (density).
But the Shading compensates the input from each pixel properly to remove the unevenness
among the pixels.
As a result the even level of input can be expected from every pixel after Shading.
Original (even density)
Dark Dark
Light Light
Before Shading After Shading
(Uneven inputs) (Even inputs)
On Shading adjustment, the pixels on the CIS will be calibrated in the default for R/G/B light
source by using input gaps between black and white on Shading Sheet.
Bar Code
Shading Sheet White Area
Black Area
The TASKalfa 2420w uses R/G/B light sources not only for color reading but also for
monochrome reading. The scanner unit will be calibrated in monochrome/color at the same time.
[Necessary situation]
Shading is required after replacing;

 CIS
 CIS Board
 Main Board
8-135
NOTE
(1) Shading adjustment should be performed with Shading Sheet (P/N: 305JZ70210, with a
bar code).
1 sheet of Shading Sheet is included in the product accessary. Keep it in safe custody.
(2) Shading adjustment should be performed with “Scanner Utility 1.31 or later”.
(3) Please clean Scan Glasses before Shading.
[Operation]
1. Connect the scanner unit and the PC directly with a USB 2.0 Cable.
2. Start Scanner Utility.
3. Select [Calibration] under [Adjust].
4. At first it is required to calibrate all pixels.

Select [All] and then click [Execute].
8-136
5. Set Shading Sheet in the TASKalfa 2420w accessory to the scanner noting the arrow direction.
NOTE
(1) Use the Shading Sheet in the TASKalfa 2420w Accessory.
The Shading Sheet has a bar code on the top right.
Bar code
(2) Handle Shading Sheet with great care. Keep it in safe custody for avoiding dirt, fold or
tear.
6. Click [OK] after setting Shading Sheet, and the scanner reads it.
8-137
NOTE
(1) It takes about 7 minutes to complete Shading adjustment.
(2) A sheet other than Shading Sheet (P/N: 305JZ70210) will be ejected by Scanner Utility’s
auto chart distinction. After that the following confirmation appears.
If you inserted a wrong chart to the scanner, remove it and set the correct Shading Sheet.
Confirm that [Detect inserted chart automatically and perform calibration (Recommended)] is
selected, and press [OK].
8-138
7. When Shading is finished, the following message appears. Click [OK].
Open the scanner and reload Shading Sheet to the scanner and click [Confirm] to check the
result of Shading.
8. The scan image of Shading Sheet is displayed. (It looks gray due to “calibrating” scan)
Scan image of Shading Sheet
8-139
9. Scroll the image right and left to find a strong black/white line that runs vertically in one pixel
wide. If there is no such line in the whole image, click [Close] to finish Shading.
The following picture is an example of the line (due to “defective pixel”).

A defective pixel needs individual pixel calibration in the later steps.
Defective pixel
NOTE
Sometimes the density may be different between left and right as the following image.
This is not a problem but it is just the border of image blocks.
8-140
10. If you will calibrate an individual pixel, select [Specified part].
11. Move the pointer onto the scan image, and you will find a kind of red cursor.
red cross cursor defective pixel
8-141
12. Move the red cursor so that its vertical line matches the defective pixel and click it.
The defective pixel is selected by this operation.
If there are some more defective pixels, select them in the same way.
Match the vertical line to a defective pixel.
13. Click [Execute], and the selected “defective pixel” is compensated individually.
14. You will be asked to set Shading Sheet again.

Set Shading Sheet to the scanner and click [OK].
Check the result of Shading again.
When finished, click [Close].
15. Shading (“white balance” / “color” calibration) is completed.
8-142
8. 13. 4. 2 Feed Distance (1:1)
[Purpose of Feed Distance (1:1)]
The lengths between actual original image and scan image may become different each other if you
replace the Feed Roller of the Scanner Unit.
This is caused by the mechanical play that each Feed Roller has.
Actual original image Scan image
“Feed Distance” is the solution for this phenomenon.

It compares the actual original image and the scan image to know how much their lengths are
different.
Then “Feed Distance” calculates the best compensation (motor speed) automatically so that both
images should become as long as each other.
Feed Distance is required when;

 After replacing;
(1) Feed Roller R
(2) Feed Roller F
Also you need to check whether the Feed Distance is proper after replacing the following parts.
(Please record the current setting value before the replacement and input the same value after the
replacement.)
(1) CIS
(2) Main Board
NOTE
(1) Feeding Distance adjustment should be
performed with Scanner Adjustment Chart
(P/N: 305H680020).
(2) Feeding Distance adjustment should be

performed with “Scanner Utility 1.31 or later”.
8-143
[Operation]
1. Measure the actual distance between “a point” and “c point” on the far left area of Scanner
Adjustment Chart, and between “b point” and “d point” on the far right area.
Let’s suppose that each distance is as follows.

Between “a point” and “c point (800)” is “799.7mm”
Between “b point” and “d point (800)” is 799.8mm
Scanner Adjustment Chart
a a b b
c 800 d 800
c 1000 d 1000
c 1100 d 1100
c 800 c 1150 d 1150 d 800
Measure between these 2 points. Measure between these 2 points.
NOTE
There are some number of “c point X” and “d point X” on the chart.
You can select any one, but better adjustment can be expected if you measure a longer
distance.
2. Connect the scanner unit and the PC directly with the USB 2.0 Cable.
8-144
4. Select [Adjust Feed Distance] from [Adjust]. Adjust Feed Distance Dialog is indicated.
NOTE
(1) If [Adjust Feed Distance] does not appear, follow the instruction below.
a) Open the properties panel for a Scanner Utility

shortcut. (ex. right click on the shortcut)
b) Add the following text to the end of the target path.
c) Click [Apply].
(2) Write down the current setting value

that will be displayed with [Current
Value].
8-145
5. At first, input the actual distance between “a point” and “c point” in [Actual Distance],
which you have measured at the former step “1”.
Actual distance between “a” and “b”
6. Set Scanner Adjustment Chart to the scanner unit, and then click [Scan].
7. A dialog to specify the scan settings is indicated.

Simply click [Scan] to scan the chart. (You do not have to change any setting this time.)
8-146
8. The scan image of Scanner Adjustment Chart is indicated in the screen of Scanner Utility.
Scan image of the chart
Reference
You can enlarge the scan image by dragging with the right button of mouse.
Press the F2 Key when you would like to go back to the reduced image.
9. Indicate the enlarged image of “a point” on the screen, which was the measuring point at the
former step “1”.
8-147
10. Click the input window of [Theoretical Distance].
A red cursor appears on the screen.
11. Click the mouse once at the measuring point.
Click on the measuring point “a”.
8-148
12. Similarly indicate the enlarged image of “c point” and click the mouse at the measuring point.
Click on the measuring point “c”.
13. Some value is indicated in [Theoretical Distance] according to 2 measuring points you
specified at both steps “9” and “10”.
This value means the distance between “a point” and “b point” of the resulting scan image.
14. Click [Calculate].

The program automatically calculates the best compensation value considering the difference
of “Actual Distance” and “Theoretical Distance”.
The calculated compensation value (motor speed) is indicated in [Feed Adjustment Value].
8-149
15. Click [Set], and the calculated Feed Adjustment Value is validated.
16. It is necessary to check the balance of original feeding between left and right after validating
the new setting.
(Left side means “a-c points” side, and right side means “b-d points” side.)
Repeat the former steps from “3” to “12” also for the right side (between “b point” and “d point”),
and compare the values of Feed Adjustment Value between left (a-c points) and right
(b-d points).
You do not have to do anymore thing if the difference between left and right is within 0.2%.
(“within 0.2%” means the difference of indicated values is within +/-20.)
Please click [Close] without clicking [Set].
17. If the difference of the values of Feed Adjustment Value between left and right is larger than
0.2%, do as follows.
a) Measure the actual distance between the center of a-b points and that of c-d points on the chart.
Center of a-b points a b
c 800 d 800
c 1000 d 1000
Center of c-d points c 1100 d 1100

c 1150 d 1150
Measure between these 2 points.
b) Repeat the former steps from “3” to “12” for the center area.
c) Click [Set] to validate the Value indicated in [Feed Adjustment Value].
8-150
8. 13. 4. 3 Position (stitching)
[Purpose of Position (stitching)]
The scanner part of TASKalfa 2420w reads the image of original with 5 - CIS (Contact Image
Sensor). As these CIS are arranged in 2 rows, there occurs a vertical gap of image among the
image blocks. Also the reading area of these 5 pieces of CIS overlaps each other some degree.
As a result there occurs the duplication of image between neighboring Image Block (same image
is commonly included in the neighboring two Image Blocks).
Gap of CIS position
Overlaps of reading area
Vertical gap of image
Duplications of image
“Position” is the solution for these kinds of phenomenon.

It is possible remove the vertical gap of image by vertical positioning process (Y offset).
And it is also possible to remove the duplication of image by horizontal positioning process
(X overlap).
TASKalfa 2420w has the function to adjust X/Y positioning by automatic. After X/Y positioning,
adjustment for the LE (leading edge) positioning should be performed manually.
Position is required when;

 After replacing;
(1) CIS
(2) Main Board
NOTE
(1) Position adjustment should be performed with Stitch Adjustment Chart (P/N: 305JG74560).
(2) Position adjustment should be performed with “Scanner Utility 1.31 or later”.
8-151
[Operation]
1. Connect the scanner unit and the PC directly with the USB 2.0 Cable.
3. Select [Automatic Adjustment] from [Adjust]. Scanner Adjustment Dialog is indicated.
NOTE
If [Automatic Adjustment] does not appear, follow the instruction below.
a) Open the properties panel for Scanner Utility

shortcut. (ex. right click on the shortcut)
b) Add the following text to the end of the target path.
c) Click [Apply].
8-152
4. Set Stitch Adjustment Chart to the scanner noting the set direction and press [OK].
Stitch Adjustment Chart
NOTE
An incorrect feeding of Stitch Adjustment Chart may result
in an error. Position Stitch Adjustment Chart with the center
of Original Table and avoid skewing.
5. After completing the scan, the following window will be displayed. Press [Close].
6. Automatic Adjustment for X/Y positioning is completed.

Continue to the next step for the LE positioning.
NOTE
After Automatic Adjustment for X/Y positioning, LE positioning is required. Be sure to follow
the later procedure to adjust the LE positioning.
8-153
7. Select [Adjust Position] from [Adjust]. Adjust Position subscreen is indicated.
8. Set Stitch Adjustment Chart to the scanner again and press [Scan].
8-154
9. A dialog to specify the scan settings is indicated.
Simply click [Scan] to scan the chart. (You do not have to change any setting this time.)
10. The scan image of Scanner Adjustment Chart is indicated in the screen of Scanner Utility.
Scan image of the chart
8-155
11. Enlarge the top center area by right dragging.
Reference
There is a gap between the leading edge of the scan image and the leading edge of the
chart at this time. This band area shows that both of the edges do not match together.
The gap will be removed after the completion of Position adjustment for the leading edge.
Leading edge
of image gap (band)
Leading edge
of original
reading start here original LE reading start here
original LE
8-156
12. Click “Origin” entry field of the subscreen. A red cross cursor appears on the scan image.
8-157
13. Click once on the top center of the chart in the scan image.
A value appears in the field.
Top center
NOTE
If you make any unintended clicks on the image, press [Close] and go back to step 8.
8-158
14. Press [Check] then [Set].
15. A dialog appears to prompt confirmation of the result. Press [OK].
8-159
16. Start Adjust Position again. Make a rescan of Stitch Adjustment Chart.
Confirm the result of the adjustment. If the gap disappears, LE positioning is completed.
No gap (band area)
NOTE
If the rescan image still has a gap, go back to step 11 to remove it completely.
Every scan image has a blank band on the leading edge by the gap.
Be sure to remove the gap completely.
gap (band)
If the image on the leading edge is missing, the reading start is too late. Go back to step 4.
reading start here reading start here
original LE original LE
Press Roller
17. The entire Position adjustment is completed.
8-160
8. 13. 5 Updating Scanner Firmware
It is possible to install a new Firmware to the TASKalfa 2420w with Scanner Utility.
1. Select [Scanner] - [Setup Update].
2. Press [Browse].
XXX
This is just an example.

Revision Level (Scanner Firmware version) may vary from the actual one.
8-161
3. Locate a folder where a firmware file is stored, and press [OK].
KM のﾄﾞｷｭﾒﾝﾄ
4. Confirm the selected file name and press [Setup].
XXX
5. Select [Scanner] - [Update Firmware].
8-162
6. Confirm the selected file name and press [Execute].
7. The transmission of the firmware file starts.

After the completion of transmission, turn off and on the machine power.
8-163
8. 14 Confirmation Wizard
Service Software includes “Wizard” function to

confirm the printer’s operation.
Press [Wizard] button to start several wizard program.
Wizard has several programs to confirm the machine operation.
LED Head Confirmation can confirm LED Head performance / adjustment

Cut Length Confirmation can confirm the cut length performance / adjustment
Image Position Confirmation can confirm the image position (placement)
Feed Sensor Check displays the current status on feed sensors
Developer Replacement displays the replacement procedure step by step (or slide show)
Procedure includes Bias Adjustment Reset
Wizard menu screen
Some pages on the wizard have “test print” button to confirm the related image
result on the page. The wizard offers “print & check” operability by following the
screen. You can make additional adjustment right there.
Additional adjustment will change the corresponding sub mode parameter in

Adjustment Mode directly in an easy interface. For the detailed information about
each sub mode, see the related subsection of [8.6.3 Setting Item Explanation].
8-164
8. 14. 1 LED Head Confirmation
“LED Head Confirmation” can be used to confirm the current result (performance) of the following
sub mode parameters.
Concerning
Title of page
Sub Mode
1/4 LED Strobe Time for IST No.011 to 013
2/4 Vertical Alignment No.014, 015
3/4 Horizontal Alignment No.772, 773
4/4 Strobe Time Adjustment on Border pixels No.778, 779
1. Press [LED Head Confirmation] on the wizard menu screen.
8-165
2. [1/4 LED Strobe Time for IST] is used to confirm the image like diagonal lines.
Make a test print to confirm diagonal lines on the image. Adjust the slide bar for clear, enough
strong diagonal lines if needed.
Ex) Block A and C looks weaker than Block B
When confirmation is done, press [Next].
8-166
3. [2/4 Vertical Alignment] is used to confirm vertical alignment of the Blocks.
Make a test print to confirm vertical alignment on the image. Tap ↑↓ buttons to adjust the amount
of shift if needed.
Ex) Block A is displaced toward TE against Block B. Block C toward LE.
8-167
4. [3/4 Horizontal Alignment] is used to confirm horizontal alignment of the Blocks.
Make a test print to confirm vertical alignment on the image. Tap ←→ buttons to adjust the
amount of shift if needed.
Ex) White line at Block border Black line at Block Border
NOTE
(1) Changes on this page will shift the related Block in 1 pixel according to Sub Mode
No.772, 773. For the detailed information, see [8.6.3 772, 773 Horizontal Alignment].
(2) A gap / overlap in less than 1 pixel cannot be fixed in this page completely.
Go to the next page.
8-168
5. [4/4 Strobe Time Adjustment on Border pixels] is used to confirm a weak black / white line at
Block borders.
Make a test print to confirm if there is such a line on the image. Select a button of degree of the
strobe time (red is the current) if needed.
Ex) black line appears by overlap in less than 1 pixel
When confirmation is done, press [End].
8-169
8. 14. 2 Cut Length Confirmation
“Cut Length Confirmation” can be used to confirm the current result (performance) of the following
sub mode parameters.
Concerning
Title of page
Sub Mode
1/3 Cut Length Adjustment (Plain Paper) No.018
3/3 Cut Length Adjustment (Tracing Paper) No.063
3/3 Cut Length Adjustment (Film) No.064
1. Press [Cut Length Confirmation] on the wizard menu screen.
8-170
2. [1/3 Cut Length Adjustment (Plain Paper)] is used to confirm the cut length on the plain paper
printing.
Make a test print to confirm the cut length of the print. Move the slide bar to adjust the cut length
if needed.
8-171
3. If you confirm the cut length on the tracing paper or film, press the desired media button on [2/3
Media Select].
Make a test print to confirm the cut length of the print. Move the slide bar to adjust the cut length
if needed.
8-172
8. 14. 3 Image Position Confirmation
“Image Position Confirmation” can be used to confirm the current result (performance) of the
following sub mode parameters.
Concerning
Title of page
Sub Mode
1/8 LE Registration / TE Margin (Roll Media) No.000 / 002
2/8 Side Registration (Roll Media) No.006
4/8 LE Registration / TE Margin (Cut Sheet) No.001 / 003
5/8 Side Registration (Cut Sheet) No.005
7/8 LE Registration / TE Margin (Paper Tray) No.780 / 781
8/8 Side Registration (Paper Tray) No.782
1. Press [Image Position Confirmation] on the wizard menu screen.
8-173
2. [1/8 LE Registration / TE Margin (Roll Media)] is used to confirm the image position (in the
media feeding direction) on the roll media.
Make a test print to confirm the image position on the print. Move the slide bar to adjust the LE
Registration or TE Margin if needed.
Ex) Shift the start point of the image by changing LE Registration
Ex) Add / remove TE Margin
8-174
3. [2/8 Side Registration (Roll Media)] is used to confirm the image position (in the sideways) on
the roll media.
Make a test print to confirm the image position on the print. Move the slide bar to adjust the side
registration if needed.
Ex) Shift the start point of the image by changing Side Registration
8-175
4. If you confirm the image position on the cut sheet, press [Continue] on [3/8 Cut Sheet].
Or press [Finish] to close the wizard.
5. For the cut sheet, the way to confirm the image position is the same with the roll media.
After scrolling the paged for the cut sheet, the wizard for the Paper Tray (option) is available if
your machine has one.
8-176
8. 14. 4 Media Feed Sensor Check
“Media Feed Sensor Check” can be used to visually check the current status of the sensors on the
media path.
This example shows that the machine is now processing a print job with a short sheet from the
roll deck. At this point, the media cut is done and the sheet goes around Registration Sensor.
1. Press [Media Feed Sensor Check.
8-177
2. The screen shows the side section figure of the media path. “State” columns are displaying
the current status of the sensors.
Make a check in a checkbox besides the sensor name, and the related sensor’s location is
illustrated as a circle in the figure. When a test print starts, the circle flashes.
Sensor’s
Current
Status
Corresponding
Sensor’s name Sensor’s function Signal Status
No.
Roll 1 Set Sensor Detects whether the leading edge is at set position No.105
Feed Encoder Detects the distance of the roll media feeding No.109
Trailing Edge Detection Detects roll media feeding at the Roll Deck region No.111
Manual Feed Sensor Detects a cut sheet set on Manual Feed Table No.008
Registration Sensor Detects media feeding at the Registration region No.100
Separation Sensor Detects media feeding at the Separation region No.010
Guide Sensor Detects the Guide Plate’s position No.005
Exit Sensor Detects media feeding at the Fuser region No.011
Paper Tray Set Sensor Detects a cut sheet set on Paper Tray (option) No.102
Paper Tray Pickup Sensor Detects cut sheet feeding via Paper Tray (option) No.101
Press [Print] to make a test print without entering Test Print mode.
8-178
8. 14. 5 Developer Replacement Procedure
“Developer Replacement Procedure” can display the procedure with simple pictures step by step
on the touch screen.
1. Press [Developer Replacement Procedure].
2. [Developer Replacement Procedure] screen appears.
Press [] button on the right side of the picture to turn the page forward.
Press [►] button to show the procedure automatically like a slide show.
To perform the actual replacement procedure, press [Login Hold].
NOTE
If you open the Upper Unit without pressing [Login Hold], the touch screen goes back to
Login screen because the interlock function shuts the communication with PW11720 PCB.
8-179
Chapter 9
Appendix
9. 1 Schematic Wiring around Controller
IPS Assy for TASKalfa 2420w (DC1 type)
USB USB USB

(relay at rear) (scanner) (relay at top)
vacant Ethernet Interface 8
VGA (UI) COM (UPS)

IPS Power
vacant USB USB
(PW11720) (UI)
Interface 8
IPS Power
Ethernet
USB to PW11720
USB Relay at rear
USB from Scanner*

USB from UI*
VGA from UI*
USB Relay at top*
* all the 4 above
(Monitor power)
(LED Head cable)
9-1
9. 2 Overall Diagram
9-2
㪠㫄㪸㪾㪼㩷㪧㫉㫆㪺㪼㫊㫊㩷㪘㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐㩷㩿㪦㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㪀㪝㫉㫆㫅㫋㩷㪬㪪㪙
,
㪛㪚㪈㪉㪭
, 㪛㪚㪈㪉㪭㪬㪪㪙

㪱㪮㪪㪎㪌㪘㪝㪄㪈㪉㪆㪡
䌄䌃䌐䋲 )0&

&%&% 㪬㪪㪙㪩㪼㪸㫉㩷㪬㪪㪙
%QPXGTV2%$ 㪟㪛㪛
+0)
0%

㪘㪚㩷㪈㪇㪇㪭㪄㪉㪋㪇㪭
㪣㪘㪥㨪㨪㪩㪡㪄㪋㪌

0%
4:& 㪤㪦㪫㪟㪜㪩㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛
, 6:&
)0& 4 㪚㪦㪤㩷㪈
㪞㪥㪛㪛㪚㪈㪉㪭 )0&
㪚㪦㪤㩷㪉 4:&
4

%65 6:&
)0&
㪝㫆㫃㪻㪼㫉㩷㩿㪦㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㪀
, 4
㪭㪞㪘
. %1/ 01
,
㪬㪪㪙
01
0% ,
㪩㪰㪎㪇㪈 %1/ 㪩㪰㪎㪇㪋 6:&

01
0% %1/ 4:& 㪬㪪㪙㪧㪚㪠
. 㪩㪰㪎㪇㪉 01 )0& 㪬㪪㪙
0%
,
5*76&190
-ǡ9
%1/
0 86#

㪭㪞㪘㪬㪪㪙
㪧㪚㩷㪚㪦㪥㪫㪩㪦㪣㩷㪧㪚㪙㪞㪥㪛
%+4%7+6$4'#-'4 ,
㪛㪚㪈㪉㪭㩿㪬㪪㪙㪈㪅㪈㪀
.+0'(+.6'4 㪚㪙㪈㪧㪮㪈㪈㪎㪉㪋
59 㪛㪚㪈㪉㪭
+0.'6㧸 ,
. 0 .
, 㪫㫆㫌㪺㪿㩷㪪㪺㫉㪼㪼㫅㩷㪣㪚㪛
5&
㪠㪥㪣㪜㪫㪣㪝㪈
+0.'60
䋱䋵䌁
5&
㩿㪬㪪㪙㪉㪅㪇㪀
㪬㪪㪙
%+5
, 722'4+0659 (75'4+0659 5'0514 5'0514 5'0514 5'0514 5'0514
/5 㪝㪘㪈㪣㪄㪚㪘㪉㪉 /5 㪝㪘㪈㪣㪄㪚㪘㪉㪉 ,
# $ # $
#%
. 䌄䌃䌐䋱㪱㪮㪛㪉㪉㪌㪧㪘㪝㪄㪇㪌㪉㪋㪆㪡 %+5$1#4& %+5$1#4& %+5$1#4& %+5$1#4& %+5$1#4&

0%
*'#6'44'.#; # $ # $
#%
0 㪉㪋㪭㪃㩷㪐㪘㩷㩿㫇㪼㪸㫂㪈㪋㪘㪀㪌㪭㪃㩷㪌㪘
4; 5&
0%
, ,
)0&

)0&

)0&

)0&

)0&

)0&
8
8
8
8
8

/#+0$1#4&
4
,

,
, 㪪㪪㪩㪈
㪘㪨㪡㪋㪈㪍㪭
,
4
㩿㪫㪿㪼㫉㪼㩷㪸㫉㪼㩷㪱㪼㫉㫆㩷㪺㫉㫆㫊㫊㪅㪀
㪝㪬㪪㪜㩷㩿㪉㪌㪇㪭㩷㪫㪊㪅㪈㪌㪘㪟㩷㪀

,
䋭
䌾
*'#6'4.#/2%'06'4 㪟㪈 554 4 4
䌍 215+6+10 %18'4 5+<' %18'4 5612
䋫
䌾
5'0514 5'0514 5'0514 5'0514 59+6%*
,
㪈㪉㪇㪭㪃㩷㪈㪊㪇㪇㪮 &1%7/'06/1614/ 㪪㪚㪘㪥㪥㪜㪩
)0&

)0&

㪟㪜㪘㪫㪜㪩㩷㪬㪥㪠㪫
4
':+6
㪪㪺㪸㫅㫅㪼㫉㩷㪬㫅㫀㫋㩷㪦㫍㪼㫉㪸㫃㫃㩷㪛㫀㪸㪾㫉㪸㫄
8
8
5'0514
6*'4/156#6 㪣㪞㪉㪋㪏㪥㪣㪈
㪝㪈
㪧㪟㪊 6*'4/+5614
㪫㪪㪈㪫㪟㪉㪫㪟㪈
/#+0 /
,
ǰ ǰ ǰ 㪛㪩㪞㪄㪍㪉㪊㪍㪄㪉㪉㪍㪜
4
5& VQ5&
8
(
䌍 ,#
%'06'4
4 4 , VQ 㪛
5+&'
, , , 㪙
VQ
, , 5&
, , 5&
, 8
)0&

()176
$4#-'

㪣
㪠 , 㪝
㪞 5& 㪘 VQ, ,
VQ VQ VQ
5& 8 VQ, , 5&
5&
)0&

㪡
VQ 㪠
,$ ,
VQ,
㪚
5&
8 㪢 VQ,
,
VQ
, 㪦
㪟 VQ,
VQ
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,㨪 ,㨪
)0&
5+&'
)0&
)0&
6:&
4:&
)0&
)0&

*'#6
)0&
%5+)+0
':+6A5
%'06'4
%2+%-5
%5'65
*'#64;
8
%56A%0
%5+)176
%2+%-5.
2#2'4%.
2+%-72%.
%5'6/.&
219'41((
*'#6/64)
*'#6/%.-
*'#6/&+4
/#+0/64)
/#+0/%.-
/#+0/&+4
8(75'
8(75'
%5'6/64)
%5'6/%.-
*'#6/.&
/#+0/.&
㪛㪚㩷㪚㪦㪥㪫㪩㪦㪣㪣㪜㪩㩷㪧㪚㪙
㪧㪮㪈㪈㪎㪉㪇
5#/2.'#0&%76
(4106&114
$+#5#0.1)
176#0.1)
176#0.1)
241%'55%0
&11412'0
8(75'
%.'#064)
4')+56%.
4'5+565
%.'#059
$+#564)
$+#559
64#0.1)
564+25
)7+&'%.
/#0+0A5
&'05#0
(''&$.
/A%764
/A%76.
/5A%764
/5A%76.
45'65
)7+&'5
*'#6$.
$+#5.&
$+#5%4
610'4/
(''&%.
4(&%.
610'45
&'055
4'0%5
4'&)'
&+5%0
*8+/
*864
*8#%
+/.&
64.&
#%.&
'4
'4
8
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
,㨪,
HTQO HTQO
㪣
,
5&
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
㪜

,
5& HTQO
4 5& HTQO
HTQO 8
5& HTQO 5&
HTQO 㪚

( 5& HTQO 㪘
5&
( HTQO 5&
㪙 HTQO HTQO
㪢 5& ,
㪛 5& 4 㪦
㪝㪠㪙㪣㪋
㪟
,
㪘㪪㪝㪥㪐㪇㪊㪎㪉
, ,
,% +25%11.+0)
$.19'4
, 5&
HTQO
5& 8
%0 %0 %0 %0
㪡 5&

)0&
%0 㪟㪠㪞㪟㩷㪭㪦㪣㪫㪘㪞㪜㩷㪧㪦㪮㪜㪩㩷㪪㪬㪧㪧㪣㪰㩷㩿㪟㪭㪧㪈㪀
HTQO
HTQO , )0&
㪜㪬㪢㪈㪤㪞㪘㪍㪇㪟㪘
, 㪠 4 , 4
㪞㧞
%64$+#5
&'8$+#5
8
%.$+#5
52$+#5
5&
8
*8
*8
*8

, ,
176276
176276
6#$
6#$
6#$
,
176276
176276
176276
5&
㪣㪜㪛㩷㪟㪜㪘㪛㩷㪠㪥㪫㪜㪩㪝㪘㪚㪜㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛
)0&

5&

㪧㪮㪈㪈㪎㪌㪌
)0&
, , ,
㪧㪟㪏
㪞㪧㪉㪰㪋㪇㪇㪈㪇㪢㪇㪝
5& 4
&'05+6;
8
( 5'0514
*'#&‫ޓ‬㨍
4 *'#&‫ޓ‬E
.
*'#&‫ޓ‬D
%
5&
,
, 8 4 4 4
, ,

4 4
,
,

, , , ,
5& , 4
,

, 㪧㪮㪍㪍㪐㪊

, , 4
/5 㪙㪣㪊 5&
,
, , , 4 #/%0#
/5
㪘㪪㪝㪥㪍㪇㪊㪎㪉
, , , 41..5'6&114 㪚㪪㪈㪘㪄㪙㪉㪚㪘 (''& 㪛㪩㪬㪤
㪧㪟㪈㪧㪟㪎㪧㪟㪐㪧㪟㪉
59+6%* $.19'4
4+)*6
*#0&&114
.'(6
/5 㪧㪪㪈㪈㪎㪜㪛㪈㪧㪪㪈㪈㪎㪜㪛㪈㪣㪞㪉㪋㪏㪥㪣㪈㪣㪞㪉㪋㪏㪥㪣㪈

㪚㪪㪈㪘㪄㪙㪉㪚㪘䌍 59+6%* 4'5+56
4'5 /#07#.5'6 )7+&' 564+2 , ,
, , 5#/2.'#0&%76 5'0514 5'0514 5'0514 5'0514
59+6%* 㪤㪪㪐㪤㪪㪏㩿㪫㪿㪼㫉㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㪸㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㪔㪟㪀㩿㪫㪿㪼㫉㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㪸㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㪔㪣㪀 4
㪚㪣㪋㪚㪣㪉㪚㪣㪈㪚㪣㪊 / 㪟㪅㪧㪅㩷㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㪧㪩㪦㪚㪜㪪㪪㪧㪩㪦㪚㪜㪪㪪㩷㪝㪩㪘㪤㪜
㪛㪪㪫㪚㪄㪋㪇㪞㪤㪚㪘㪄㪊㪇㪘㪤㪚㪘㪄㪊㪇㪘㪤㪚㪘㪄㪊㪇㪘䌍㪫㪣㪪㪈
㪩㪪㪄㪊㪏㪌㪧㪟
%766'4
㪧㪟㪋
㪣㪞㪉㪋㪏㪥㪣㪈
㪧㪟㪍
㪧㪪㪈㪈㪎㪜㪛㪈㪧㪪㪈㪈㪐㪜㪛㪈
㪧㪟㪌
㪬㪥㪠㪫
)7+&' (''& 4')+56 41..
%.76%* %.76%* %.76%* (''& / 610'4
/1614 (''&
'0%1&'4
(''&
5'0514
41..
5'6 㪧㪮㪍㪍㪊㪈
%.76%* 㪛㪤㪘㪄㪊㪈㪌㪇㪘 5'0514
610'4/1614 㪛㪜㪭㪜㩷㪬㪥㪠㪫㪚㪬㪫㪫㪜㪩㩷㪬㪥㪠㪫 5'0514 5'0514 .'(6 4+)*6 䌅䌲䋮
㩿㪫㪿㪼㫉㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㪸㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㪔㪣㪀㩿㪫㪿㪼㫉㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㪸㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㪔㪟㪀㪙㪣㪉㪙㪣㪈㪣㪜㪛㩷㪧㪚㪙
㪛㪈㪉㪝㪄㪉㪋㪙㪣㩷㪇㪌
*'#6'4$.19'4
CONFIDENTIAL Overall Circuit Diagram (USA/120V)

㪠㫄㪸㪾㪼㩷㪧㫉㫆㪺㪼㫊㫊㩷㪘㫊㫊㪼㫄㪹㫃㫐㩷㩿㪦㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㪀㪝㫉㫆㫅㫋㩷㪬㪪㪙
,
㪛㪚㪈㪉㪭
, 㪛㪚㪈㪉㪭㪬㪪㪙

㪱㪮㪪㪎㪌㪘㪝㪄㪈㪉㪆㪡
䌄䌃䌐䋲 )0&

&%&% 㪬㪪㪙㪩㪼㪸㫉㩷㪬㪪㪙
%QPXGTV2%$ 㪟㪛㪛
+0)
0%

㪘㪚㩷㪈㪇㪇㪭㪄㪉㪋㪇㪭
㪣㪘㪥㨪㨪㪩㪡㪄㪋㪌

0%
4:& 㪤㪦㪫㪟㪜㪩㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛
, 6:&
)0& 4 㪚㪦㪤㩷㪈
㪞㪥㪛㪛㪚㪈㪉㪭 )0&
㪚㪦㪤㩷㪉 4:&
4

%65 6:&
)0&
㪝㫆㫃㪻㪼㫉㩷㩿㪦㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㪀
, 4
㪭㪞㪘
. %1/ 01
,
㪬㪪㪙
01
0% ,
㪩㪰㪎㪇㪈 %1/ 㪩㪰㪎㪇㪋 6:&

01
0% %1/ 4:& 㪬㪪㪙㪧㪚㪠
. 㪩㪰㪎㪇㪉 01 )0& 㪬㪪㪙
0%
,
5*76&190
-ǡ9
%1/
0 86#

㪭㪞㪘㪬㪪㪙
㪧㪚㩷㪚㪦㪥㪫㪩㪦㪣㩷㪧㪚㪙㪞㪥㪛
%+4%7+6$4'#-'4 ,
㪛㪚㪈㪉㪭㩿㪬㪪㪙㪈㪅㪈㪀
㪚㪙㪈㪩㪞㪄㪉㪇㪏㪝㪉㪧㪮㪈㪈㪎㪉㪋
.+0'(+.6'4 59 㪛㪚㪈㪉㪭
+0.'6㧸㧝 ,
. 0 .
, 㪫㫆㫌㪺㪿㩷㪪㪺㫉㪼㪼㫅㩷㪣㪚㪛
㪣㪝㪈 5&
㪠㪥㪣㪜㪫
+0.'60
䋱䋰䌁
5&
㩿㪬㪪㪙㪉㪅㪇㪀
㪬㪪㪙
%+5
4 , 722'4+0659 (75'4+0659 5'0514 5'0514 5'0514 5'0514 5'0514
/5 㪝㪘㪈㪣㪄㪚㪘㪉㪉 /5 㪝㪘㪈㪣㪄㪚㪘㪉㪉 ,
㪛㪜㪟㪬㪤㪠㪛㪠㪝㪰㩷㪟㪜㪘㪫㪜㪩㩷㩿㪦㪧㪫㪠㪦㪥㪀㪉㪊㪇㪭㪄㪊㪅㪌㪢㱅㪆㪈㪌㪮㩷㩷㫏㩷㪋 # $ # $ 䌄䌃䌐䋱㪱㪮㪛㪉㪉㪌㪧㪘㪝㪄㪇㪌㪉㪋㪆㪡 %+5$1#4& %+5$1#4& %+5$1#4& %+5$1#4& %+5$1#4&
#%
.
&'*7/+&+(;*'#6'470+6
㪫㪪㪌 0%
㪟㪋 , 5& , ǰ , *'#6'44'.#; # $ # $
&'*7/+&+(;126+10‫ޓ‬㧔2CRGT7PKV㧕 #%
0 㪉㪋㪭㪃㩷㪐㪘㩷㩿㫇㪼㪸㫂㪈㪋㪘㪀㪌㪭㪃㩷㪌㪘
ǰ 4; 5&
0%
㪟㪉 , ,
)0&

)0&

)0&

,
)0&

)0&

㪟㪌 , 5& , 㪫㪪㪋 , )0&
,
8
8
8

8
8
㪫㪪㪊

㪟㪊 , , ǰ , /#+0$1#4&
5& 5& 4
,
ǰ
5& ,
㪫㪪㪉 , 5& ,
,
,
4
㪝㪬㪪㪜㩷㩿㪉㪌㪇㪭㩷㪫㪊㪅㪈㪌㪘㪟㩷㪀

㪪㪮㪉 ,
䋭
䌾
㪧㪘㪧㪜㪩㩷㪫㪩㪘㪰㩷㩿㪦㪧㪫㪠㪦㪥㪀 &'*7/+&+(;
*'#6'4.#/2%'06'4 㪟㪈 554 4 4
䌍 215+6+10 %18'4 5+<' %18'4 5612
2#2'4 2#2'4 *'#6'459
䋫
䌾
2#2'4 5'0514 5'0514 5'0514 5'0514 59+6%*
2+%-72 5'6 (''& ,
2#2'45'6 (''& 2+%-72 51.'01+&
/1614 %.76%* %.76%* 5'0514 5'0514 㪉㪊㪇㪭㪃㩷㪈㪊㪇㪇㪮㪪㪪㪩㪈 &1%7/'06/1614/ 㪪㪚㪘㪥㪥㪜㪩
㪞㪄㪈㪇㪌㪊㪄㪢㪈㪉㪣㪞㪉㪋㪏㪥㪣㪈㪧㪪㪈㪈㪎㪜㪛㪈
)0&

)0&

㪩㪙㪄㪊㪏㪞㪤㪄㪟㪚㪙㪇㪉㪄㪉㪋㪤㪠㪚㪌㪥㪜㪤㪠㪚㪌㪥㪜㪟㪜㪘㪫㪜㪩㩷㪬㪥㪠㪫㪘㪨㪡㪋㪉㪍㪭
4
㪪㪣㪈㪧㪟㪈㪉㪧㪟㪈㪈 ':+6
㪤㪌㪪㪺㪸㫅㫅㪼㫉㩷㪬㫅㫀㫋㩷㪦㫍㪼㫉㪸㫃㫃㩷㪛㫀㪸㪾㫉㪸㫄
8
8
㪚㪣㪍㪚㪣㪌 5'0514 㩿㪫㪿㪼㫉㪼㩷㪸㫉㪼㩷㫅㫆㫅㩷㪱㪼㫉㫆㩷㪺㫉㫆㫊㫊㪅㪀
6*'4/156#6 㪣㪞㪉㪋㪏㪥㪣㪈
㪝㪈
㪧㪟㪊 6*'4/+5614
䌍㪫㪪㪈㪫㪟㪉㪫㪟㪈
/#+0 /
,
ǰ ǰ ǰ 㪛㪩㪞㪄㪍㪉㪊㪍㪄㪉㪉㪍㪜
,
4
, , , 5& VQ5&
8
(
䌍 ,#
%'06'4
, ,
4 4 , VQ 㪛
5+&'
, , , 㪙
5&
4 5& 8 VQ
)0& , , 5&
, , 5&
, 8
)0&

()176
$4#-'
4 5&
8 㪣
㪠 , 㪝
㪞 5& 㪘 VQ, ,
VQ VQ VQ
5& 8 VQ, , 5&
5&
, )0&

㪡
VQ 㪠
,$ ,
, VQ,
㪚
5&
8 㪢 VQ,
,
VQ
, 㪦
㪟 VQ,
VQ
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,㨪 ,㨪
)0&
5+&'
)0&
)0&
6:&
4:&
)0&
)0&

*'#6
)0&
%5+)+0
%'06'4
%2+%-5
%5'65
*'#64;
8
%56A%0
%5+)176
%2+%-5.
*'#6':+6
2#2'4%.
2+%-72%.
%5'6/.&
219'41((
*'#6/64)
*'#6/%.-
*'#6/&+4
/#+0/64)
/#+0/%.-
/#+0/&+4
8(75'
8(75'
%5'6/%.-
%5'6/64)
*'#6/.&
/#+0/.&
㪛㪚㩷㪚㪦㪥㪫㪩㪦㪣㪣㪜㪩㩷㪧㪚㪙
㪧㪮㪈㪈㪎㪉㪇
5#/2.'#0&%76
(4106&114
$+#5#0.1)
176#0.1)
176#0.1)
241%'55%0
&11412'0
8(75'
%.'#064)
4')+56%.
4'5+565
%.'#059
$+#564)
$+#559
64#0.1)
)7+&'%.
564+25
/#0+0A5
&'05#0
(''&$.
/A%764
/A%76.
/5A%764
/5A%76.
45'65
)7+&'5
*'#6$.
$+#5.&
$+#5%4
610'4/
(''&%.
4(&%.
610'45
&'055
4'0%5
4'&)'
&+5%0
*8+/
*864
*8#%
+/.&
64.&
#%.&
'4
'4
8
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
,㨪,
HTQO HTQO
㪣
,
5&
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
㪜

,
5& HTQO
4 5& HTQO
HTQO 8
5& HTQO 5&
HTQO 㪚

( 5& HTQO 㪘
5&
( HTQO 5&
㪙 HTQO HTQO
㪢 5& ,
㪛 5& 4 㪦
㪝㪠㪙㪣㪋
㪟
,
㪘㪪㪝㪥㪐㪇㪊㪎㪉
, ,
,% +25%11.+0)
$.19'4
, 5&
HTQO
5& 8
%0 %0 %0 %0
㪡 5&

)0&
%0 㪟㪠㪞㪟㩷㪭㪦㪣㪫㪘㪞㪜㩷㪧㪦㪮㪜㪩㩷㪪㪬㪧㪧㪣㪰㩷㩿㪟㪭㪧㪈㪀
HTQO
HTQO , )0&
㪜㪬㪢㪈㪤㪞㪘㪍㪇㪟㪘
, 㪠 4 , 4
㪞㧞
%64$+#5
&'8$+#5
8
%.$+#5
52$+#5
5&
8
*8
*8
*8

, ,
176276
176276
6#$
6#$
6#$
,
176276
176276
176276
5&
㪣㪜㪛㩷㪟㪜㪘㪛㩷㪠㪥㪫㪜㪩㪝㪘㪚㪜㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛
)0&

5&

㪧㪮㪈㪈㪎㪌㪌
)0&
, , ,
㪧㪟㪏
㪞㪧㪉㪰㪋㪇㪇㪈㪇㪢㪇㪝
5& 4
&'05+6;
8
( 5'0514
*'#&‫ޓ‬㨍
4 *'#&‫ޓ‬E
.
*'#&‫ޓ‬D
%
5&
,
, 8 4 4 4
, ,

4 4
,
,

, , , ,
5& , 4
,

, 㪧㪮㪍㪍㪐㪊

, , 4
/5 㪙㪣㪊 5&
,
, , , 4 #/%0#
/5
㪘㪪㪝㪥㪍㪇㪊㪎㪉
, , , 41..5'6&114 㪚㪪㪈㪘㪄㪙㪉㪚㪘 (''& 㪛㪩㪬㪤
㪧㪟㪈㪧㪟㪎㪧㪟㪐㪧㪟㪉
59+6%* $.19'4
4+)*6
*#0&&114
.'(6
/5 㪧㪪㪈㪈㪎㪜㪛㪈㪧㪪㪈㪈㪎㪜㪛㪈㪣㪞㪉㪋㪏㪥㪣㪈㪣㪞㪉㪋㪏㪥㪣㪈

㪚㪪㪈㪘㪄㪙㪉㪚㪘䌍 59+6%* 4'5+56
4'5 /#07#.5'6 )7+&' 564+2 , ,
, , 5#/2.'#0&%76 5'0514 5'0514 5'0514 5'0514
59+6%* 㪤㪪㪐㪤㪪㪏㩿㪫㪿㪼㫉㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㪸㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㪔㪟㪀㩿㪫㪿㪼㫉㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㪸㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㪔㪣㪀 4
㪚㪣㪋㪚㪣㪉㪚㪣㪈㪚㪣㪊 / 㪟㪅㪧㪅㩷㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㪧㪩㪦㪚㪜㪪㪪㪧㪩㪦㪚㪜㪪㪪㩷㪝㪩㪘㪤㪜
㪛㪪㪫㪚㪄㪋㪇㪞㪤㪚㪘㪄㪊㪇㪘㪤㪚㪘㪄㪊㪇㪘㪤㪚㪘㪄㪊㪇㪘䌍㪫㪣㪪㪈
㪩㪪㪄㪊㪏㪌㪧㪟
%766'4
㪧㪟㪋
㪣㪞㪉㪋㪏㪥㪣㪈
㪧㪟㪍
㪧㪪㪈㪈㪎㪜㪛㪈㪧㪪㪈㪈㪐㪜㪛㪈
㪧㪟㪌
㪬㪥㪠㪫
)7+&' (''& 4')+56 41..
%.76%* %.76%* %.76%* (''& / 610'4
/1614 (''&
'0%1&'4
(''&
5'0514
41..
5'6 㪧㪮㪍㪍㪊㪈
%.76%* 㪛㪤㪘㪄㪊㪈㪌㪇㪘 5'0514
610'4/1614 㪛㪜㪭㪜㩷㪬㪥㪠㪫㪚㪬㪫㪫㪜㪩㩷㪬㪥㪠㪫 5'0514 5'0514 .'(6 4+)*6 䌅䌲䋮
㩿㪫㪿㪼㫉㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㪸㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㪔㪣㪀㩿㪫㪿㪼㫉㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㪸㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㪔㪟㪀㪙㪣㪉㪙㪣㪈㪣㪜㪛㩷㪧㪚㪙
㪛㪈㪉㪝㪄㪉㪋㪙㪣㩷㪇㪌
*'#6'4$.19'4
CONFIDENTIAL Overall Circuit Diagram (EUR/230V)

㪪㪠㪞
㪊㪉㪈
㪪㫎㫀㫋㪺㪿
㪪㫋㫆㫇
㪡㪈㪍
㪈㪈㪉㪭㪥㪅㪚㪅
㪚㪘㪏㪇㪋㪈㪇㪎㪁
㪪㪠㪞
㪈
㪉㪞㪥㪛
㪛㪝㪈㪊㪙㪄㪏㪧㪄㪈㪅㪉㪌㪭
㪊㪌㪭㪚㪘㪏㪇㪊㪈㪇㪌㪁
㪞㪥㪛
㪡㪈㪉㪋
㪋㪪㪠㪞
㪉
㪊㪉㪈
㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
NOTE: 1. Items shown by gray are not used.

㪚㫆㫍㪼㫉
㪌㪊㪅㪊㪭
㪡㪈㪎
㪥㪅㪚㪅
㪍㪞㪥㪛
㪪㪠㪞
㪈
㶎㩷㪙㪊㪙㪄㪧㪟㪄㪪㪤㪋㪄㪫㪙㩷㹢㩷㪡㪈㪈㪃㪡㪈㪉㪃㪡㪈㪊㪃㪡㪈㪋㪃㪡㪈㪌㪃㪡㪈㪎
㪎㪊㪅㪊㪭㪚㪘㪏㪇㪊㪈㪇㪋㪁
㪏㪞㪥㪛
㪪㪠㪞
㪊㪉㪈
㪈㪊㪉
㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
㪡㪈㪈
㪪㫀㫑㪼
㪞㪥㪛
means the cable.
㪈㪉㪭㪈
㪞㪥㪛㪉
㪌㪭㪊
㪞㪥㪛㪋
㪊㪅㪊㪭㪌
㪞㪥㪛㪍
㪊㪅㪊㪭㪎
㪞㪥㪛㪏
㪚㪠㪪㪚㪣㪢㪂㪈㪈㪚㪠㪪㪚㪣㪢㪂㪌㪭
㪪㪟㪶㪩㪉㪉㪪㪟㪶㪩㪚㪘㪎㪇㪉㪋㪈㪌㪁
㪚㪠㪪㪪㪚㪢㪄㪊㪊㪚㪠㪪㪚㪣㪢㪄㪪㪠㪞
㪊㪉㪈
㪈㪊㪉
㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
㶎㩷㪙㪉㪙㪄㪧㪟㪄㪪㪤㪋㪄㪫㪙㩷㹢㩷㪡㪈㪍
㪡㪈㪉
㪪㫀㫑㪼
㶎㩷㪛㪝㪈㪊㪙㪄㪊㪧㪄㪈㪅㪉㪌㪭㩷㹢㩷㪡㪋㪍
㪞㪥㪛㪋
SCANNER DIAGRAM
㪋㪞㪥㪛㪞㪥㪛
㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛
㪛㪇㪂㪌㪌㪛㪇㪂㪌㪭
㪡㪎
㪦㪪㪉㪈㪈㪦㪪㪉
㪛㪈㪂㩷㪍㪍㪛㪈㪂
㪩㩷㪙㪦㪘
㪘㪞㪥㪛㪉㪉㪘㪞㪥㪛㪚㪘㪎㪇㪉㪋㪈㪊㪁

㪛㪇㪄㪎㪎㪛㪇㪄㪪㪠㪞
㪊㪉㪈
㪈㪊㪉
㪦㪪㪈㪊㪊㪦㪪㪈
㪡㪉㩷㩷㪛㪝㪉㪇㪝㪄㪉㪇㪛㪧㪄㪈㪭
㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
㪡㪈㪊
㪛㪈㪄㪏㪏㪛㪈㪄
㪪㫀㫑㪼
㪛㪝㪉㪇㪝㪄㪉㪇㪛㪧㪄㪈㪭
㪩㪦㪣㪣㪜㪩㩷
㪘㪞㪥㪛㪋㪘㪞㪥㪛㪞㪥㪛

㪋
㪛㪉㪂㪐㪐㪛㪉㪂㪌㪭
㪦㪪㪇㪌㪌㪦㪪㪇
㪚㪠㪪㩷㪪㪜㪥㪪㪦㪩
㪊㪈㪄㪇㪉㪁
㪇㪉㪁
㪣㪚㪦㪂㪈㪇㪈㪇㪣㪚㪦㪂
㪡㪉㪋
㪚㪘㪎㪇㪉㪋㪈㪋㪁
㪚㪦㪥㪫㪩㪦㪣
㪤㪦㪛㪜㪍㪍㪤㪦㪛㪜
㪛㪉㪄㪈㪈㪈㪈㪛㪉㪄
㪚㪥㪏㪇㪊㪈㪄
㪡㪊㩷㪌㪉㪎㪐㪊㪄㪈㪌㪎㪇
㪪㪠㪞
㪊㪉㪈
㪈㪊㪉
㪘㪞㪥㪛㪎㪎㪘㪞㪥㪛
㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
㪡㪈㪋
㪣㪚㪦㪄㪈㪉㪈㪉㪣㪚㪦㪄
㪪㫀㫑㪼
㪞㪥㪛
㪚㪠㪪㩷㪚㪦㪥㪫
㪭㫉㪼㪽㪏㪏㪭㫉㪼㪽
㪪㪟㪠㪝㪫㩷㪚㪣㪢㪈㪊㪈㪊㪪㪟㪠㪝㪫㩷㪚㪣㪢㪌㪭
㪪㪧㪐㪐㪪㪧
㪪㪜㪩㪠㪘㪣㩷㪛㪘㪫㪘㪈㪋㪈㪋㪪㪜㪩㪠㪘㪣㩷㪛㪘㪫㪘㪚㪘㪎㪇㪉㪋㪈㪋㪁
㪪㪧㪈㪇㪈㪇㪪㪧
㪞㪥㪛㪈㪌㪈㪌㪞㪥㪛
㪚㪠㪪㩷
㪚㪣㪢㪈㪈㪈㪈㪚㪣㪢㪪㪠㪞

㪊㪉㪈
㪈㪊㪉
㪞㪥㪛㪈㪍㪈㪍㪞㪥㪛
㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
㪪㫀㫑㪼
㪡㪈㪌
㪣㪄㪭㪚㪚㪈㪉㪈㪉㪣㪄㪭㪚㪚㪞㪥㪛

㪛㪘㪫㪘㩷㪣㪘㪫㪚㪟㪈㪎㪈㪎㪛㪘㪫㪘㩷㪣㪘㪫㪚㪟
㪙㪈㪊㪈㪊㪙㪌㪭
㪩㪜㪪㪜㪫㪁㪈㪏㪈㪏㪩㪜㪪㪜㪫㪁
㪞㪈㪋㪈㪋㪞㪚㪘㪎㪇㪉㪋㪈㪊㪁
㪤㪦㪛㪜㪣㩷㪪㪜㪣㪈㪐㪈㪐㪤㪦㪛㪜㩷㪪㪜㪣
㪩㪈㪌㪈㪌㪩㪈㪈㪉㪭
㪞㪥㪛㪉㪇
2. CA
㪉㪇㪞㪥㪛
㪡㪍
㪉㪞㪥㪛
㪚㪘㪎㪇㪉㪋㪈㪇㪁㪊㪌㪭
㪞㪥㪛
㪡㪈㪉㪊
㪋
㪚㪘㪏㪇㪊㪈㪇㪏㪁
㪌㪊㪅㪊㪭
㪝㪧㪚㩷㪋㪍㪇㪇㪊㪉㪁㪍㪞㪥㪛
㪚㪠㪪㪚㪣㪢㪂㪈㪈㪚㪠㪪㪚㪣㪢㪂㪎㪊㪅㪊㪭
㪪㪟㪶㪩㪉㪉㪪㪟㪶㪩㪞㪥㪛㪚㪘㪏㪇㪊㪈㪇㪊㪁
㪏
㪈㪉㪭㪈
㪞㪥㪛㪉
㪌㪭㪊
㪞㪥㪛㪋
㪊㪅㪊㪭㪌
㪞㪥㪛㪍
㪊㪅㪊㪭㪎
㪞㪥㪛㪏
㪚㪠㪪㪪㪚㪢㪄㪊㪊㪚㪠㪪㪚㪣㪢㪄
㪪㪠㪞㪈
㪊
㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
㪞㪥㪛㪋㪋㪞㪥㪛
㪚㫆㫍㪼㫉
㪞㪥㪛㪉
㪛㪇㪂㪌㪌㪛㪇㪂
㪥㪅㪚㪅㪊
㪛㪜㪉㪇㪝㪄㪈㪇㪛㪧㪄㪈㪭
㪈㪊㪉㪈㪊㪉㪈
㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛
㪦㪪㪉㪈㪈㪦㪪㪉㪛㪈㪂㩷㪍㪍㪛㪈㪂

㪪㪠㪞㪋
㪡㪎
㪘㪞㪥㪛㪉㪉㪘㪞㪥㪛
㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
㪛㪇㪄㪎㪎㪛㪇㪄
㪩㩷㪙㪦㪘
㪩㪼㪸㫉
㪞㪥㪛㪌
㪡㪐
㪌㪭㪍
㪪
㪘㪞㪥㪛㪋㪋㪘㪞㪥㪛㪛㪉㪂㪐㪐㪛㪉㪂

㪪㪠㪞㪎
㪊㪈㪄㪇㪉㪁
㪇㪉㪁
㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
㪡㪉㪊
㪝㫉㫆㫅㫋
㪤㪦㪛㪜㪍㪍㪤㪦㪛㪜㪞㪥㪛㪏

㪛㪉㪄㪈㪈㪈㪈㪛㪉㪄
㪌㪭㪐
㪪
㪘㪞㪥㪛㪎㪎㪘㪞㪥㪛㪣㪚㪦㪄㪈㪉㪈㪉㪣㪚㪦㪄

㪭㫉㪼㪽㪏㪏㪭㫉㪼㪽㪪㪟㪠㪝㪫㩷㪚㪣㪢㪈㪊㪈㪊㪪㪟㪠㪝㪫㩷㪚㪣㪢㪥㪅㪚㪅㪈㪇
㪪㪧㪐㪐㪪㪧㪪㪜㪩㪠㪘㪣㩷㪛㪘㪫㪘㪈㪋㪈㪋㪪㪜㪩㪠㪘㪣㩷㪛㪘㪫㪘
㪪㪧㪈㪇㪈㪇㪪㪧㪞㪥㪛㪈㪌㪈㪌㪞㪥㪛
㪚㪣㪢㪈㪈㪈㪈㪚㪣㪢㪞㪥㪛㪈㪍㪈㪍㪞㪥㪛
㪚㪠㪪㩷
㪣㪄㪭㪚㪚㪈㪉㪈㪉㪣㪄㪭㪚㪚㪛㪘㪫㪘㩷㪣㪘㪫㪚㪟㪈㪎㪈㪎㪛㪘㪫㪘㩷㪣㪘㪫㪚㪟

㪙㪈㪊㪙
㪬㪙㪩㪋㪋㪄㪋㪥㪌㪚㪈㪇
㪈㪊㪩㪜㪪㪜㪫㪁㪈㪏㪈㪏㪩㪜㪪㪜㪫㪁
㪫㪦㩷㪧㪚
㪞㪈㪋㪈㪋㪞㪭㪙㪬㪪㪈
㪤㪦㪛㪜㪣㩷㪪㪜㪣㪈㪐㪈㪐㪤㪦㪛㪜㩷㪪㪜㪣㪈㪈㪉㪭
㪬㪪㪙㪉㪅㪇
㪩㪈㪌㪈㪌㪩㪛㪄㪉
㪞㪥㪛㪉㪇㪉㪇㪞㪥㪛㪉㪞㪥㪛
㪡㪍
㪡㪋
㪛㪂㪊
㪊㪌㪭
㪚㪘㪎㪇㪉㪋㪇㪐㪁㪞㪥㪛㪋
㪞㪥㪛
㪡㪈㪉㪉
㪚㪘㪏㪇㪊㪈㪇㪏㪁㪋
㪌㪊㪅㪊㪭
㪝㪧㪚㩷㪋㪍㪇㪇㪊㪉㪁㪍㪞㪥㪛
㪈㪉㪭㪈
㪞㪥㪛㪉
㪌㪭㪊
㪞㪥㪛㪋
㪊㪅㪊㪭㪌
㪞㪥㪛㪍
㪊㪅㪊㪭㪎
㪞㪥㪛㪏
㪪㪟㪶㪩㪉㪉㪪㪟㪶㪩㪏㪞㪥㪛

㪩㪜㪄㪟㪇㪉㪉㪫㪛㩷
㪄㪈㪈㪊㪇
㪡㪧㪈㩷
㪡㪎
㪦㪪㪉㪈㪦㪪㪉
㪙㪦㪘㪩㪛
㪈㪛㪈㪂㩷㪍㪍㪛㪈㪂
㪘㪩㪛
㪘㪞㪥㪛㪉㪉㪘㪞㪥㪛㪛㪇㪄㪎㪎㪛㪇㪄

㪇㪈㪁
㪩㩷㪙㪦㪘
㪤㪘㪠㪙㪦㪘㪩
㪚㪘㪏㪇㪊㪈㪄㪇㪈
㪦㪪㪈㪊㪊㪦㪪㪈㪛㪈㪄㪏㪏㪛㪈㪄


㪚㪘㪏㪇㪊㪈㪄
㪦㪪㪇㪌㪌㪦㪪㪇㪣㪚㪦㪂㪈㪇㪈㪇㪣㪚㪦㪂

㪊㪈㪄㪇㪉㪁
㪇㪉㪁
㪡㪉㪉
㪛㪝㪈㪊㪙㪄㪏㪧㪄
㪤㪦㪛㪜㪍㪍㪤㪦㪛㪜㪛㪉㪄㪈㪈㪈㪈㪛㪉㪄

㪈㪅㪉㪌㪭
㪡㪌㩷

㪤㪘㪠㪥
㪭㫉㪼㪽㪏㪏㪭㫉㪼㪽㪪㪟㪠㪝㪫㩷㪚㪣㪢㪈㪊㪈㪊㪪㪟㪠㪝㪫㩷㪚㪣㪢

㪙㪍㪙㪄㪧㪟㪄
㪚㪣㪢㪈㪈㪈㪈㪚㪣㪢
㪪㪤㪋㪄㪫㪙
㪚㪠㪪㩷
㪡㪏㩷
㪙㪈㪊㪈㪊㪙㪩㪜㪪㪜㪫㪁㪈㪏㪈㪏㪩㪜㪪㪜㪫㪁
㪞㪈㪋㪈㪋㪞㪤㪦㪛㪜㪣㩷㪪㪜㪣㪈㪐㪈㪐㪤㪦㪛㪜㩷㪪㪜㪣㪈㪈㪉㪭
㪩㪈㪌㪈㪌㪩㪞㪥㪛㪉㪇㪉㪇㪞㪥㪛㪉㪞㪥㪛
㪡㪍
㪙㪌㪙㪄㪧㪟㪄
㪪㪤㪋㪄㪫㪙
㪊㪌㪭
㪚㪘㪎㪇㪉㪋㪇㪏㪁
㪡㪉㩷
㪞㪥㪛
㪡㪈㪉㪈
㪝㪧㪚㩷㪋㪍㪇㪇㪊㪉㪁㪚㪘㪏㪇㪊㪈㪇㪎㪁㪋
㪌㪊㪅㪊㪭
㪍㪞㪥㪛
㪈
㪉
㪊
㪋
㪌
㪍
㪎
㪏

㪞㪥㪛
㪞㪥㪛
㪞㪥㪛
㪞㪥㪛
㪈㪉㪭
㪌㪭
㪊㪅㪊㪭
㪊㪅㪊㪭
㪡㪎
㪘㪩㪛
㪣㪣㪜㪩㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩

㪦㪪㪇㪌㪌㪦㪪㪇㪣㪚㪦㪂㪈㪇㪈㪇㪣㪚㪦㪂

㪡㪉㪈
㪊㪈㪄㪇㪉㪁
㪇㪉㪁
㪫㪩㪦㪣㪣㪜
㪚㪘㪏㪇㪊㪈㪇㪈㪁

㪭㫉㪼㪽㪏㪏㪭㫉㪼㪽
㪠㪪㩷㪚㪦㪥㪫㪩
㪪㪟㪠㪝㪫㩷㪚㪣㪢㪈㪊㪈㪊㪪㪟㪠㪝㪫㩷㪚㪣㪢
㪉㪋㪭㪈
㪧㫆㫎㪼㫉㩷㩿㪉㪋㪭㪀
㪜㪣㪧㪄㪇㪋㪥㪭㩷
㪪㪧㪈㪇㪈㪇㪪㪧
㪋㪊㪉㪈
㪙㪋㪧㪪㪄㪭㪟
㪞㪥㪛㪈㪌㪈㪌㪞㪥㪛
㪚㪣㪢㪈㪈㪈㪈㪚㪣㪢㪉㪋㪭㪉
㪡㪉㪏
㪚㪠㪪㩷
㪣㪄㪭㪚㪚㪈㪉㪈㪉㪣㪄㪭㪚㪚㪞㪥㪛㪊

㪛㪘㪫㪘㩷㪣㪘㪫㪚㪟㪈㪎㪈㪎㪛㪘㪫㪘㩷㪣㪘㪫㪚㪟
㪙㪈㪊㪈㪊㪙㪞㪥㪛㪋
㪩㪜㪪㪜㪫㪁㪈㪏㪈㪏㪩㪜㪪㪜㪫㪁
㪞㪈㪋㪈㪋㪞㪤㪦㪛㪜㪣㩷㪪㪜㪣㪈㪐㪈㪈㪉㪭
㪈㪐㪤㪦㪛㪜㩷㪪㪜㪣
㪪㪫㪜㪧㪧㪠㪥㪞㩷㪤㪦㪫㪦㪩
㪩㪈㪌㪈㪌㪩㪞㪥㪛㪉㪇㪉㪞㪥㪛
㪉㪇㪞㪥㪛
㪡㪍
㪙㪊㪙㪄㪯㪟㪄㪘
㪘㪈
㪋㪊㪉㪈
㪊㪌㪭
㪚㪘㪎㪇㪉㪋㪇㪎㪁㪘㪁㪉
㪡㪉㪎
㪝㪧㪚㩷㪋㪍㪇㪇㪊㪉㪁㪞㪥㪛
㪡㪈㪉㪇
㪋
㪚㪘㪏㪇㪊㪈㪇㪍㪁㪙㪊
㪌㪊㪅㪊㪭
㪞㪥㪛㪙㪁㪋
㪍
㪚㪘㪏㪇㪊㪈㪇㪉㪁
㪈
㪉
㪊
㪋
㪌
㪍
㪎
㪏
㪞㪥㪛
㪞㪥㪛
㪞㪥㪛
㪞㪥㪛
㪈㪉㪭
㪌㪭
㪊㪅㪊㪭
㪊㪅㪊㪭
㪡㪎
㪘㪩㪛
㪣㪣㪜㪩㩷㪙㪦㪘㪩
㪡㪉㩷㩷㪛㪝㪉㪇㪝㪄㪉㪇㪛㪧㪄
㪌㪇㪢㪌㪛
㪢㪯㪈㪋㪄
㪄㪈㪇㪇㪇
㪘㪞㪥㪛㪋㪋㪘㪞㪥㪛㪛㪉㪂㪐
㪡㪊
㪐㪛㪉㪂
㪡㪉㪇
㪪㩷㪚㪦㪥㪫㪩㪦㪣㪣㪜
㪊㪈㪄㪇㪉㪁
㪇㪉㪁

㪭㫉㪼㪽㪏㪏㪭㫉㪼㪽㪪㪟㪠㪝㪫㩷㪚㪣㪢㪈㪊㪈㪊㪪㪟㪠㪝㪫㩷㪚㪣㪢
㪯㪞㪏㪮㪄
㪈㪋㪋㪈
㪪㪧㪐㪐㪪㪧
㪡㪉㪍
CONFIDENTIAL
㪪㪜㪩㪠㪘㪣㩷㪛㪘㪫㪘㪈㪋㪈㪋㪪㪜㪩㪠㪘㪣㩷㪛㪘㪫㪘
㪚㪣㪢㪈㪈㪈㪈㪚㪣㪢㪞㪥㪛㪈㪍㪈㪍㪞㪥㪛
㪚㪠㪪㩷
㪚㪠㪪㩷
㪙㪈㪊㪈㪊㪙㪩㪜㪪㪜㪫㪁㪈㪏㪈㪏㪩㪜㪪㪜㪫㪁
㪯㪞㪏㪮㪄
㪈㪋㪋㪈
㪞㪈㪋㪈㪋㪞
㪡㪉㪌
㪤㪦㪛㪜㪣㩷㪪㪜㪣㪈㪐㪈㪐㪤㪦㪛㪜㩷㪪㪜㪣
㪩㪈㪌㪈㪌㪩㪞㪥㪛㪉㪇
㪡㪍
㪉㪇㪞㪥㪛
㪝㪧㪚㩷㪋㪍㪇㪇㪊㪉㪁㪚㪘㪎㪇㪉㪋㪇㪍㪁
Chapter 10
Setup Procedure
1. Paper Tray Kit 1
2. Dehumidify Kit
3. Service Kit
-1. Service Kit A
-2. Service Kit B
-3. Service Kit C
PROCEDURE (Paper Tray Kit 1)
<Service Staff only>
Ver. A.0
NOTE
Paper Tray properly works with the printer firmware version 117X06NL or later.
Upgrade the firmware as needed.
Paper tray is to be installed on the printer’s rear.
from right
This procedure includes [Installation] [Software Setup] [Operation Check].

For further detailed instructions, read the later sections.
Pater Tray Kit 1

Confirm the following parts are attached to the “Paper Tray Kit 1”.
Table Assy 1
Base Assy 1
Connector Bracket 1
Gasket 1
Bind Screw 2
Procedure 1 this leaflet
Usage Precautions 1
Dimension (approx.) 345mm (D)

(with installed, starting at printer body) 660mm (D), 50mm (H) (with the tray extended, maximum)
Power Supplied via the machine
Available Printer 2420 / 9124 / 8124
1
1 Installation
1. Remove 4 tooth washer screws (1), loosen 2 tooth washer screws (2) to remove the Rear Cover (3).
3
1
2
2. Remove 2 bind screws (4) to remove the plate (5).
Reference
The screws and the plate are not used with the Paper Tray installed.
3. Connect the harness of Connector Bracket (6) to

the machine side (7).
7
2
4. Fix Connector Bracket (6) to the machine with 2 bind screws (8).
8 8
5. Return the Rear Cover (3).
6. Remove 2 tooth washer screws (9) to remove Cover 31 (10).
10
Reference
Cover 31 is not used with the Paper Tray installed.
7. Apply Gasket (11) to the bottom center of the opening rim on the machine frame (12).
Do not apply it on Rear Cover (3).
11
11 12
12 3
11
3
3
8. Hold the both sides of Base Assy (13). First put the small bars on the front (14) to the hook part
on the machine (15) in parallel. Next push the lower part of Base Assy to the machine.
15
15
14
13
14
14
4
NOTE
(1) The Gasket (16) should come over the
Gasket (11) mentioned on step 7 like the
following figure.
16
11
(2) Be careful not to catch your finger in the space as shown below.
Correct: Puts on top Wrong: gets caught
9. Connect the connector (17) of Base Assy to

Connector Bracket.
17
10. Insert Table Assy (18) to the rear of Base Assy.
18
11. Extend the tray (housed in Table Assy). Gently open and close the printer’s Upper Unit.
Confirm that Paper Tray is installed firmly.
5
2 Software Setup
1. Turn on the machine.
2. On Home screen, press [? Help].
6
3. Press [Service]. Input “8495107” to the pad and press [ENTER].
The screen will show Setup Menu 1 screen soon.
4. On the lower left “Rolls”, choose “2”.
7
6. Press [Yes].
7. Press [Login] and next [Send Firmware].
8
8. Choose “Program Mode” from Mode Select menu if not displayed.
9. Press [Select File] to locate and open 117X06NL.mot.
117X06NL.mot
9
10. Press [Send] to transfer and upgrade the firmware. ([Send] button has been just activated)
11. Press [Back], [Logout], [Close] to go back to Home screen.
10
3 Operation Check
1. Place several pieces of the sheets on the Paper Tray.
2. Rewind or remove a roll media on the Roll Deck.
3. On Home screen, select the cut sheet size / direction. (example: A3 Portrait)
4. On Home screen, press [? Help].
Roll: not found
11
5. Press [Configuration 2].
6. Use the arrow keys to open page 3/4.

Press [A3 Vector] in “Print Test Pattern”.
12
7. The test pattern will be printed on the sheet from the Paper Tray. The leading margin of the print
should be in 1 to 5mm (approximately).
Leading Edge of print
1 - 5mm
8. Press [OK]. This is the end of check.
13
4 How to Remove
1. Remove the loaded sheets. Retract the table if extended.
2. With holding the gray levers (1) on both sides, pull Table Assy (2).
3. Disconnect the harness (3) from Connector Bracket.
4. Remove 1 screw (4) on each side to unfix the release levers.
4 4 4
14
5. With holding the release levers (5) on both sides, remove Base Assy (6).
NOTE
For reinstalling, first fix the release levers (5) with the screws (4) and next mount Base Assy
to the machine.
15
Additional Adjustment
For additional adjustment of image length or leading margin, follow the instruction below
1. Press [Service]. Input “8495107” to the pad and press [ENTER].

The screen will show Setup Menu 1 screen soon.
3. Press [Yes].
16
4. Press [Login] and next [Test Print].
5. Make test prints to confirm the installation result. Prepare cut sheets the customer will use.
Test prints should be done in the size (A2, A3, A4) that the customer will use.
5-1. Place a sheet (in the smallest size to be used) on the Manual Feeder in Portrait direction.
Select “Manual” in Deck menu. Select the size of the sheet in Size menu.
17
5-2. Select the test pattern No.1 S(0) and press [Start].
5-3. Place a sheet (in the same size on step 5-1) on the Paper Tray in Portrait direction.
Select “Paper Tray” in Deck menu. Select the size of the sheet in Size menu.
5-4. Select the test pattern No.1 S(0) and press [Start].
6. If the customer uses larger size(s), make the test prints in the same way of step 5-1 to 5-4 in
every size.
18
7. Measure the distance (between the top line and the 10th) on the leading part of the prints.
(should be almost 100mm)
Confirm whether the distance on the sample print by Paper Tray matches that of Manual Feeder.
Top line to 10th

(10mm x 10)
The sample print(s) created on step 5 and 6 usually matches the distance, go to step 8.
Please keep the result print (OK sample) for later confirmation.
If it does not match, additional compensation of Paper Tray Motor Speed may be required.
For example:
- Manual Feed: 100.0mm, Paper Tray: 99.2mm  +0.8mm to reach 100.0mm
- Manual Feed: 100.3mm, Paper Tray: 101.0mm  -0.7mm to reach 100.3mm
Follow the instructions below (7-1 to 7-5) to adjust the value of Adjustment Mode.
19
7-1. Press [Back].
7-2. Press [Adjustment].
7-3. Press the button starting with 800.
Button label may vary by firmware version
20
7-4. Select one of 0871 / 0872 / 0873 from Item Code menu.
A4：0871
A3：0872
A2：0873
7-5. Enter a possible required value and press [Apply].
If the distance on the sample print by Paper Tray is longer than that of Manual Feeder,
increase the value. If shorter, decrease.
Increasing the value by 1 makes the distance shrink in about 0.1mm.
For example:
- Manual Feed: 100.0mm, Paper Tray: 99.2mm  +0.8mm (setting value -8)
- Manual Feed: 100.3mm, Paper Tray: 101.0mm  -0.7mm (setting value +7)
Please keep the result print(s) (OK sample) for later confirmation.
21
8. Confirm the leading registration on the OK samples. (should be 3mm +2mm)
To adjust the leading registration, use the following mode No.
A4：No.868
A3：No.869
A2：No.870
To shift the start point of printing images toward the trailing edge (wider leading margin),
increase the value.
Increasing the value by 1 shifts the start point toward the trailing edge in about 0.5mm.
Value increased Value decreased
NOTE
Reducing the value too much may result in a print jam in the exit area or a dirt image.
22
9. Confirm the trailing margin on the OK samples. (should be 5mm +/-2mm)
The sample print(s) usually satisfies the correct trailing margin, go to step 10.
To adjust the trailing margin, use No.781.
For smaller trailing margin, increase the value.

Increasing the value by 1 shortens the trailing margin in about 0.5mm.
Value increased Value decreased
NOTE
Increasing the value too much may result in a print jam in the exit area or a dirt image.
23
10. Confirm the side registration on the OK samples. (should be 3mm +/-2mm)
The sample print(s) usually satisfies the correct side registration, the operation check is done.
To adjust the side registration, use No.782.
To shift the image to the right (wider side margin on the left), increase the value.
Increasing the value by 1 shifts the image to the right in about 0.1mm
Value increased
Value decreased
24
SETUP PROCEDURE (DEHUMIDIFY KIT)
1. Checking Contents
The following parts are included in “DEHUMIDIFY KIT”.
COVER 6 ASSY
DEHUMIDIFY HEATER ASSY
DEHUMIDIFY HEATER ASSY 2
SHEET (included for US/EU only)
SHEET 4 (included for US/EU only)
SEAL 8
X2
EDGE SADDLE
SWITCH INDICATION LABEL

DEHUMIDIFY LABEL
X4
STAR WASHER SCREW SETUP PROSEDURE

SWITCH
1
2. Removal of the PAPER DECK ASSY
1 1
2. Remove 3 Screws (2) on each side, and then remove the Side Cover R (3) and Side Cover L (4).
3 4
2 2
2
2
3. Close the Upper Unit.
4. Open the Roll Deck Cover (5) and move the Size Guide
(6) to the center. 5
2
5. Inside of the Roll Deck, remove 2 screws (7) on each side to remove Cover 20 (8) and Cover 19 (9).
8 9
7 7
6. Remove 2 tooth washer screws (10). Keeping the Roll Deck Cover (12) open, remove the whole Roll Deck
Assy (11).
10
10
12
11
NOTE
SWITCH
The Roll Deck Cover (12) should be kept OPEN while 12
removing / reinstalling the Roll Deck.
Otherwise the actuator part would be caught by the
microswitch to damage it.
ACTUATOR
3
3. Removing Guide Plate
1. On the right side, open 2 wire saddles (1) and remove 2 screws (2) to remove the bracket (3).
2. Remove 1 screw (4) to remove the switch cover (5).
3. On the left side, remove 1 screw (6).
4
4. Disconnect the connector (8) in the switch cover (7), and then remove the switch cover (7).
5. Remove 2 screws (9) to remove the Guide Plate C (10). Disconnect the connector (11).
11
10
5
6. With supporting the Guide Plate (12), remove 2 screws (13) on each side to remove Guide Plate (12).
Never remove the Guide Plate (12) without supporting. Otherwise Guide Plate may fall.
12
13 13
6
4. Installing Kit Components to Roll Deck Assy
4-1. Installing Dehumidify Heater Assy
White Harness DEHUMIDIFY HEATER ASSY
1. Remove the clear tape (1) from the back of the Roll Deck Assy.
2. Pass the harness (3) of the Dehumidify Heater Assy (2) through the rectangle hole on the bottom right of
the Roll Deck Assy. Attach the Edge Saddle (4) to the hole on the right side.
3. Attach the Edge Saddle (5) to another hole on the right side. Pass the harness through the hole.
HARNESS
7
4. Attach the Dehumidify Heater Assy to the Roll Deck Assy with 2 tooth washer screws (6) of the kit.
4-2. Installing Cover 6 Assy
1. Apply the Cover 6 Assy (1) to the inside of the Roll Deck Cover (2).
2
1
1
Align sides
NOTE
Match the bottom end of the Cover 6 Assy with the
Roll Deck Cover’s rim.
No jutting
8
4-3. Applying Sheet 4
NOTE
SHEET 4 as an independent part is included in US/EU model kit only.
Width : 20mm
SHEET 4
1. Noting the images below, apply the Sheet 4 (1) to the tab part of Roll Deck Cover.
1
Sponge
9
5. Installing Dehumidify Heater Assy 2
DEHUMIDIFY HEATER ASSY 2
Black Harness
1. Fix Dehumidify Heater Assy 2 (1) to the Guide Plate with 2 tooth washer screws (2) of the kit.
Pass the harness (3) of Dehumidify Heater Assy 2 through the rectangle hole on top right of Guide Plate.
10
6. Installing the parts to the machine
6-1. Applying Seal 8
1. Apply the Seal 8 (1) to the place illustrated in the pictures below.
11
6-2. Applying Sheet
NOTE
SHEET as an independent part is included in US/EU model kit only.
Width : 29mm
SHEET
1. Apply Sheet (2, wider) to the bottom of the Guide (1).
Match the double-sided tape to the step.
12
6-3. Installing Switch
1. Apply the Switch Indication Label (2) and Dehumidify Label (3) to the switch case (1).
1 2 3
2. Install the Switch (4) to the switch case with the white dot upside.
NOTE
White dot upside
13
3. Remove 3 screws (5) to remove the switch case (1).
5 5
4. Connect the connector (6) in the switch case to the back of Switch (4).
4 6
NOTE
Connect the connector in either way.
5. Reinstall the switch case with 3 screws (5).

5 5
14
7. Reinstallation of each unit
7-1. Reinstalling Guide Plate
1. Pass the harness (2) sticking out from Guide Plate (1) through the round hole (3) on the right side. Fix
Guide Plate with 4 screws (4).
2
1
1
4 4
NOTE
Fit the tab parts (5) on both sides in the notches.
5 5
15
2. Connect the connector (6).
3. Fix GUDE PLATE C (8) with 2 screws (7).
NOTE
Guide Plate C (8) should ride on the rib (9).
16
4. Return the switch cover (10) in the original position. Connect the connector (11).
10
11
5. With pressing the switch cover (10) to the arrow direction (outward and downward), fix it with 1 screw (12).
10
12
6. With pressing the switch cover (14) to the arrow direction (outward and downward), fix it with 1 screw (13).
14
14
13
17
7. Pass the harness of Dehumidify Heater Assy (16) through the round hole on the bracket (15).
Path the harness of Clutch (17) through the edge saddle (18).
15
16
17 18
8. Fix the bracket with 2 screws (19). Secure the harness (16) and the AC harness (20) with the wire saddles
(21).
19
21 20
19 16
18
7-2. Reinstalling Roll Deck Assy
1. With the Roll Deck Cover (1) open, place the Roll Deck Assy (2) in the arrow direction. Fix it with 2 tooth
washer screws (3) on each side.
3
3
NOTE
Hook the tab part (4) on both sides to the notches (5).
19
2. Connect 2 connectors (6) from the Roll Deck Assy to the connectors respectively. Secure them with the
wire saddles (7).
7
6
3. Reinstall the Cover 20 (9) and the Cover 19 (10) with 2 screws (8) on each side.
9 10
8 8
20
7-3. Reinstalling Side Cover
1. Clip off the blinder portion (2) on the Side Cover R (1).
2. Open the Upper Unit. Reinstall the Side Cover R (1) and Side Cover L (4) with 3 screws (3) each.
1 4
3 3
3
3
NOTE
See next page.
21
NOTE
The hook part (5) should be seated in the rectangular hole (6) of the machine.
6 5
3. This is the end of the procedure.
22
PROCEDURE (SERVICE KIT A)
Confirm the following parts are attached to the “SERVICE KIT A”.
IMAGE CORONA ASSY

OZONE FILTER 2 OZONE FILTER TR CORONA ASSY
NAIL CLEANING JIG PAD

Procedure
1 Service Kit A
NOTE
1. When the notification window appears in the UI screen,
the Service Notification Count must be reset in the
window once a Service Kit is installed.
2. Turn off the printer before operation.

Unplug the power cord after an interval of two minutes
for shutdown.
2. Replacement of IMAGE CORONA ASSY
1 1
2
4
4
4 4
4. Hold the handgrip (6) on both sides. Pull the Process Unit (5) to the arrow direction to remove it from the
machine.
6 6
NOTE THIS SIDE UP
1. Gently place the Process Unit (5) on a flat surface

in the correct direction. Not doing so may 7
damage the Photoconductive Drum (7) (shiny
green cylinder).
2. The Photoconductive Drum (7) is one of the most important components for the printer to obtain a
satisfactory print image quality.
- Do not expose the Photoconductive Drum to light. It is recommended to shade the whole
Process Unit with a piece of plain bond roll paper.
3
Pull and remove the IMAGE CORONA ASSY (9) from the Process Unit.
8 8
10
9
6. Install both the pins (10) to the hooks to seat the new IMAGE CORONA ASSY in position.
NOTE
Again hold the plastic area (7) on both ends to carry
7
the IMAGE CORONA ASSY.
Grabbing in the middle may deform the housing and
cause image defect.
4
7. Hold the handgrip (6) on both sides. Slightly tilt the Process Unit downward. Put the square holes (11)
onto the tapered edges of the positioning pins (12). Before inserting completely, pivot the unit upward to
face each other. Finally push the unit to the machine.
12 12
11 11
6 6
11
5
8. Completely push the Process Unit (5) in the machine to be reseated in position.
Then secure the thumb screws (4) to fix the Process Unit (5) to the machine.
4
4
4 4
6
3. Replacement of TR CORONA ASSY
1. Pick the plastic area (1) on both sides.

Pull and remove the TR CORONA ASSY (2) from the machine.
TR CORONA ASSY
1 2 1
2. Pick the plastic area (1) on both sides of the new TR CORONA ASSY.
NOTE
Again hold the plastic area (1) on both ends to carry the TR CORONA ASSY.
7
Hold here
Hold here
8
4. Replacement of OZONE FILTER
1 1
1
1
2 2
3. Slightly lift Side Cover R (3) / Side Cover L (4) up to the arrow direction to remove then from the machine.
4
3
9
4. Replace OZONE FILTER 2 (5) in Side Cover L (4) with a new one.
5
4
5. Replace OZONE FILTER (6) in the duct of the machine with a new one.
10
Return Side Cover R and Side Cover L to the machine.
3 4
1
1
NOTE
11
Hold here
Hold here
NOTE
The small top tab part (10) should fit inside of Side Cover R and Side Cover L.
10
10
10. Reinstall the rest 2 screws (1) and tighten all the screws (1) to secure Side Cover R (3) and Side Cover L (4).
3 4
1 1
1
1
12
5. Cleaning NAIL STRIPPING
1. Open Fuser Door (1).
Reference
13
3. Pinch the Nail Cleaning Jig as shown in the following pictures.
NOTE
(1) There are extremely hot parts inside the Fuser Door.
(2) Move the Nail Cleaning Jig to the arrow direction only.
(3) You do not have to remove Nail Stripping from the machine. The pictures above are shown for easy
understanding.
14
6. Reset of Service Notification Count
NOTE
Reset Service Notification Count every after a Service Kit is installed.
Follow the instruction below to reset the count.
When the notification window appears in the UI screen, the Service Notification Count must be reset in the
If the notification window disappears, see on page 17 to reset the count.
Reset on Notification Window
1. The notification window appears. Press [RESET].
notification window
2. [Install] button will appear besides the concerning Service Kit to be applied. Press [RESET].
15
(Please refer to the PASSWORD SHEET.)
4. This is the end of installing Service Kit A.
16
If Notification Window is not displayed;
1. Enter Service mode and open page [7/7]. Press [Reset].
2. [Install] button will appear besides the concerning Service Kit to be applied. Press [Install].
17
4. This is the end of installing Service Kit A.
18
PROCEDURE (SERVICE KIT B)
Confirm the following parts are attached to the “SERVICE KIT B”.
Procedure
OZONE FILTER 2 OZONE FILTER TR CORONA ASSY IMAGE CORONA ASSY
TONER BOTTLE
NAIL CLEANING JIG

DEVELOPER ASSY
PLASTIC BAG PAD
1 Service Kit B
NOTE

for shutdown.
1 1
2
4
4
4 4
machine.
6
6
NOTE THIS SIDE UP

green cylinder).
2. The Photoconductive Drum is one of the most important components for the printer to obtain a
3
Pull and remove the IMAGE CORONA ASSY (9) from the Process Unit.
8 8
10
9
6. Install both the pins (10) to the hooks to seat the new IMAGE CORONA ASSY in position.
NOTE
Again hold the plastic area (8) on both ends to carry
8
the IMAGE CORONA ASSY.
Grabbing in the middle may deform the housing and
cause image defect.
4
12 12
11 11
6 6
11
5
4
4
4 4
6
1. Pick the white plastic area (1) on both sides.

TR CORONA ASSY
1 2 1
NOTE
7
Hold here
Hold here
8
1 1
1
1
2 2
4
3
9
5
4
10
3 4
1
1
NOTE
11
Hold here
Hold here
NOTE
10
10
3 4
1 1
1
1
12
Reference
13
NOTE 注意
1. There are extremely hot parts inside the Fuser Door.
2. Move the Nail Cleaning Jig to the arrow direction only.
3. You do not have to remove Nail Stripping from the machine. The pictures above are shown for easy
understanding.
14
6. Replacement of DEVELOPER ASSY
6-1 Replacement of DEVELOPER ASSY
1. Remove 2 tooth washer screws (M4x6) (1) to remove Cover 31 (2).
2. Remove 6 tooth washer screws (M4x6) (3) to remove Cover 32 (4). (Read the column below.)
3 3
NOTE
Follow the instruction in this column to carefully remove Cover 32 (4).
1. Slightly pull Cover 32 to the rear to release 3 2. Pull Cover 32 to the arrow direction to avoid
tabs (5). Hopper Unit (6) inside Cover 32.
Continues to next page.
15
NOTE
3. Press the entire Hopper Unit on the top to check that it firmly stays on Developer Unit.
If Hopper Unit is released, it may drop and cause toner scattering just after opening the Upper Unit
on step 5.
4. Remove 1 tooth washer screws (8) on each side to remove the rail blocker R (9) / L (10).
10
8
9 9
16
11 11
NOTE
Be sure to open the Upper Unit. This will release the engagement between the DEVELOPER ASSY
and the driving system. Removing the DEVELOPER ASSY with the Upper Unit closed may damage
the drive gears.
6. Hold the handgrip (12) on both sides. Pull the DEVELOPER ASSY (13) to the arrow direction to remove it
from the machine.
12 12
13
17
15
14
8. Release 3 tabs (16) on the front. Turn the Hopper Unit (6) to the arrow direction to remove it from the
DEVELOPER ASSY (13). Cover the toner supply hole (17) on the Hopper Unit with a plastic bag (18) at
this time to avoid scattering toner.
Replace the DEVELOPER ASSY with a new one.
Rear Side
Front Side
16
6
13
18
17
Reference
18
The plastic bag that contains the Pads and the Nail Cleaning Jig can
be used as a cover (18).
18
NOTE 19
The old Developer Unit should be packed with the

empty plastic bag (19) included in the kit.
Dispose of the unit according to local regulations.
9. Remove the stickers (20) and the protection sheet (21) from the new DEVELOPER ASSY.
Pinch tab area
21
20
20
Pinch tab area
19
10. Return the Hopper Unit (6).
Again, cover the toner supply hole (17) on the Hopper Unit with a plastic bag (18) to avoid scattering toner.
Insert the hook parts of the Hopper Unit into the square holes of the DEVELOPER ASSY. Make sure that
the Hopper Unit (6) is held on the DEVELOPER ASSY by the tab parts (16).
18
17
15
Hook & square holes

16
NOTE
23
22 16
20
11. Connect the ground wire (14) and 1 connector (15).
15
14

Push the DEVELOPER ASSY (13) in the machine until it stops.
13
Rail 24
24
Rail
21
13. Slide the DEVELOPER ASSY (13) to the arrow direction (to your right hand).
13
14. Secure the rail blocker R (9) to the rail opening with the tooth washer screw (8).
9
9
NOTE
See the next page.
22
NOTE
Fully insert the rail blocker R (9). If not enough
pushed in, or if you skip step 13, it does not go into
the opening completely. Please follow the instruction
9
below to seat the DEVELOPER ASSY in position.
not fit in
1. Swing the DEVELOPER ASSY up and down.

This allows the gears between the engine and the
DEVELOPER ASSY to be engaged.
gear (engine side)

gear (Developer side)
2. Hold the handles on both sides of the DEVELOPER ASSY to slide it to your right hand.
23
15. Secure the rail blocker L (10) to the rail opening with the tooth washer screw (8).
10 10
Hold here
Hold here
24
NOTE
After replacing DEVELOPER ASSY, you must set bias adjustment by Density Compensation Process
to “1”. Otherwise a darker image appears because the adjusted values are too high voltage for the
refreshed DEVELOPER ASSY. (Resetting is described on page 28)
6-2 Adding TONER
(Not necessary to remove the Guide (2)) 1
from right
右側からの図 2
2. Shake the TONER BOTTLE (3) several times to loosen the toner.
3
NOTE
After you shake the TONER BOTTLE (3) well, proceed the later
step 3 and 4 as soon as possible.
This would disturb a smooth toner supply from the TONER
BOTTLE to the printer.
25
3. Put the dent area (4) under the holder (5) to firmly seat the bottom plate of the TONER BOTTLE to the
toner supply position.
4 from front
4. With pressing down the TONER BOTTLE (3), slide the

green lever (6) to the arrow direction until it stops.
When it stops, wait 10 seconds as it is. 3
NOTE
Gently press down the TONER BOTTLE (3). Pressing too much makes the lever (6) much heavier.
26
5. Slide the lever (6) back to its original position, and
remove the TONER BOTTLE (3).
3
NOTE
It is impossible to remove the TONER BOTTLE unless the lever (6) completely moves to the original
position. Do not attempt to remove the TONER BOTTLE by force if the lever is not at the original
position. Doing so may damage toner supply system.
another Toner Bottle
27
6-3 Reset of Auto Adjustment Level by Density Compensation Process
NOTE
Reset Auto Adjustment Level after replacing the Developer Unit. (See column on page 25)
1. Turn on printer.
2. Press [? – Help] on Home screen.
3. Press [Service].
4. On-screen Keypad appears. Input “8495107” and press [Enter].
28
7. Press [Yes].
29

Reference
The “Wizard” also has reset function of Auto
Adjustment Level. (See page 34)
30
Initializes Developer / Regulation Bias adjusted with

0006 Dev. Clear Density Compensation Process

31

The value in “Reading” area will be changed to the new value. (This is the end of reset step.)
32
14. Press [RETURN]. Operation Target screen appears.
33
Reference
The “Wizard” is also available to reset Auto Adjustment Level. Follow the instruction below.
1. [Wizard] will enter the wizard menu. Press [Developer Replacement Procedure].
2. Press [Reset] to reset Auto Adjustment Level.
3. Go back to Home Screen and press [Special Operation] to proceed the work.
Go to [6-4 Running “Toner Supply Mode”]
34
6-4 Running “Toner Supply Mode”
NOTE
For more stable print quality, run “Toner Supply Mode” twice in a row.
This can prepare a good leveling the toner in the Developer Unit to obtain a satisfactory print quality.

Toner supply / leveling starts. This will tale about 10 minutes to complete.
35
3. Once you press [AGREE], the button will turn deactivated. Press [RETURN].
4. The screen goes back to Operation Target screen. The status window shows “warm up” during toner
supply / leveling. After the completion (in 10 minutes), it changes to “standby”.
36
5. After completion of the first “Toner Supply Mode”, press [Enter] to run the second “Toner Supply Mode”.
6. After completion of the second “Toner Supply Mode”, press [Back], [Logout], [Close] to cancel Service
Mode.
37
7. UI screen will display Home screen after a short time.
38
NOTE
notification window
39
4. This is the end of installing Service Kit B.
40
41
4. This is the end of installing Service Kit B.
42
PROCEDURE (SERVICE KIT C)
Confirm the following parts are attached to the “SERVICE KIT C”.
Procedure
TR CORONA ASSY
OZONE FILTER 2 OZONE FILTER PROCESS UNIT
(with IMAGE CORONA ASSY)
TONER BOTTLE
DEVELOPER ASSY NAIL CLEANING JIG
PLASTIC BAG
PAD
1 Service Kit C
NOTE

for shutdown.
1 1
2
4
4
4 4
machine.
6
6
NOTE THIS SIDE UP

green cylinder).
2. The Photoconductive Drum is one of the most important components for the printer to obtain a
3
5. Hold the handgrip (6) on both sides to take out the new Process Unit from the container.
6. Put the Process Unit on a flat surface. Remove the desiccant (8) and the tapes (9).
10
4
12 12
11 11
6 6
11
5
4
4
4 4
6
1. Pick the white plastic area (1) on both sides.

TR CORONA ASSY
1 2 1
NOTE
7
Hold here
Hold here
8
1 1
1
1
2 2
4
3
9
5
4
10
3 4
1
1
NOTE
11
Hold here
Hold here
NOTE
10
10
3 4
1 1
1
1
12
Reference
13
NOTE
1. There are extremely hot parts inside the Fuser Door.
2. Move the Nail Cleaning Jig to the arrow direction only.
3. You do not have to remove Nail Stripping from the machine. The pictures above are shown for easy
understanding.
14
6. Replacement of DEVELOPER ASSY
6-1 Replacement of DEVELOPER ASSY
1. Remove 2 tooth washer screws (M4x6) (1) to remove Cover 31 (2).
2. Remove 6 tooth washer screws (M4x6) (3) to remove Cover 32 (4). (Read the column below.)
3 3
NOTE
Follow the instruction in this column to carefully remove Cover 32 (4).
1. Slightly pull Cover 32 to the rear to release 3 2. Pull Cover 32 to the arrow direction to avoid
tabs (5). Hopper Unit (6) inside Cover 32.
Continues to next page.
15
NOTE
3. Press the entire Hopper Unit on the top to check that it firmly stays on Developer Unit.
If Hopper Unit is released, it may drop and cause toner scattering just after opening the Upper Unit
on step 5.
4. Remove 1 tooth washer screws (8) on each side to remove the rail blocker R (9) / L (10).
10
8
9 9
16
11 11
NOTE
Be sure to open the Upper Unit. This will release the engagement between the DEVELOPER ASSY
and the driving system. Removing the DEVELOPER ASSY with the Upper Unit closed may damage
the drive gears.
6. Hold the handgrip (12) on both sides. Pull the DEVELOPER ASSY (13) to the arrow direction to remove it
from the machine.
12 12
13
17
15
14
8. Release 3 tabs (16) on the front. Turn the Hopper Unit (6) to the arrow direction to remove it from the
DEVELOPER ASSY (13). Cover the toner supply hole (17) on the Hopper Unit with a plastic bag (18) at
this time to avoid scattering toner.
Replace the DEVELOPER ASSY with a new one.
Rear Side
Front Side
16
6
13
18
17
Reference
18
The plastic bag that contains the Pads and the Nail Cleaning Jig can
be used as a cover (18).
18
NOTE 19
The old Developer Unit should be packed with the

empty plastic bag (19) included in the kit.
Dispose of the unit according to local regulations.
9. Remove the stickers (20) and the protection sheet (21) from the new DEVELOPER ASSY.
Pinch tab area
21
20
20
Pinch tab area
19
10. Return the Hopper Unit (6).
Again, cover the toner supply hole (17) on the Hopper Unit with a plastic bag (18) to avoid scattering toner.
Insert the hook parts of the Hopper Unit into the square holes of the DEVELOPER ASSY. Make sure that
the Hopper Unit (6) is held on the DEVELOPER ASSY by the tab parts (16).
18
17
15
Hook & square holes

16
NOTE
23
22 16
20
11. Connect the ground wire (14) and 1 connector (15).
15
14

Push the DEVELOPER ASSY (13) in the machine until it stops.
13
Rail 24
レール
24
Rail
21
13. Slide the DEVELOPER ASSY (13) to the arrow direction (to your right hand).
13
14. Secure the rail blocker R (9) to the rail opening with the tooth washer screw (8).
9
9
NOTE
See the next page.
22
NOTE
Fully insert the rail blocker R (9). If not enough
pushed in, or if you skip step 13, it does not go into
the opening completely. Please follow the instruction
9
below to seat the DEVELOPER ASSY in position.
not fit in
1. Swing the DEVELOPER ASSY up and down.

This allows the gears between the engine and the
DEVELOPER ASSY to be engaged.
gear (engine side)

gear (Developer side)
2. Hold the handles on both sides of the DEVELOPER ASSY to slide it to your right hand.
23
15. Secure the rail blocker L (10) to the rail opening with the tooth washer screw (8).
10 10
Hold here
Hold here
24
NOTE
After replacing DEVELOPER ASSY, you must set bias adjustment by Density Compensation Process
to “1”. Otherwise a darker image appears because the adjusted values are too high voltage for the
refreshed DEVELOPER ASSY. (Resetting is described on page 28)
6-2 Adding TONER
(Not necessary to remove the Guide (2)) 1
from right
2
2. Shake the TONER BOTTLE (3) several times to loosen the toner.
3
NOTE 注意
After you shake the TONER BOTTLE (3) well, proceed the later
step 3 and 4 as soon as possible.
This would disturb a smooth toner supply from the TONER
BOTTLE to the printer.
25
3. Put the dent area (4) under the holder (5) to firmly seat the bottom plate of the TONER BOTTLE to the
toner supply position.
4 from front
4. With pressing down the TONER BOTTLE (3), slide the

green lever (6) to the arrow direction until it stops.
When it stops, wait 10 seconds as it is. 3
NOTE
Gently press down the TONER BOTTLE (3). Pressing too much makes the lever (6) much heavier.
26
5. Slide the lever (6) back to its original position, and
remove the TONER BOTTLE (3).
3
。
NOTE
It is impossible to remove the TONER BOTTLE unless the lever (6) completely moves to the original
position. Do not attempt to remove the TONER BOTTLE by force if the lever is not at the original
position. Doing so may damage toner supply system.
another Toner Bottle
27
6-3 Reset of Auto Adjustment Level by Density Compensation Process
NOTE
Reset Auto Adjustment Level after replacing the Developer Unit. (See column on page 25)
1. Turn on Printer.
2. Press [? – Help] on Home screen.
3. Press [Service].
4. On-screen Keypad appears. Input “8495107” and press [Enter].
28
7. Press [Yes].
29

Reference
The “Wizard” also has reset function of Auto
Adjustment Level. (See page 34)
30
Initializes Developer / Regulation Bias adjusted with

0006 Dev. Clear Density Compensation Process

31

The value in “Reading” area will be changed to the new value. (This is the end of reset step.)
32
14. Press [RETURN]. Operation Target screen appears.
33
Reference
The “Wizard” is also available to reset Auto Adjustment Level. Follow the instruction below.
1. [Wizard] will enter the wizard menu. Press [Developer Replacement Procedure].
2. Press [Reset] to reset Auto Adjustment Level.
3. Go back to Home Screen and press [Special Operation] to proceed the work.
Go to [6-4 Running “Toner Supply Mode”]
34
6-4 Running “Toner Supply Mode”
NOTE
For more stable print quality, run “Toner Supply Mode” twice in a row.
This can prepare a good leveling the toner in the Developer Unit to obtain a satisfactory print quality.

Toner supply / leveling starts. This will tale about 10 minutes to complete.
35
3. Once you press [AGREE], the button will turn deactivated. Press [RETURN].
4. The screen goes back to Operation Target screen. The status window shows “warm up” during toner
supply / leveling. After the completion (in 10 minutes), it changes to “standby”.
36
5. After completion of the first “Toner Supply Mode”, press [Enter] to run the second “Toner Supply Mode”.
6. After completion of the second “Toner Supply Mode”, press [Back], [Logout], [Close] to cancel Service
Mode.
37
7. UI screen will display Home screen after a short time.
38
NOTE
notification window
39
4. This is the end of installing Service Kit C.
40
41
4. This is the end of installing Service Kit C.
42
2011
2011

TA2420w SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TA2420w SM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TA2420w SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TASKalfa 2420w

RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE

IL Y A UN RISQUE D’EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE

General warning. Warning of risk of electric shock.

Warning of high temperature.

General prohibited action. Disassembly prohibited.

Always ground the copier.

• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ............................................................................

• Remove toner completely from electronic components. .....................................................................

Chapter 1 Introduction Overview

Chapter 2 Installation Installation requirements, method of

Chapter 4 Electrical Circuit diagrams, image process system,

Chapter 5 Mechanical Parts replacement and mechanical

Chapter 6 Maintenance Field maintenance information

Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Problem resolution

Chapter 9 Appendix General Circuit Diagram

Chapter 10 Setup Procedure Options and Service Kits

1. 3 Specifications for Originals 1- 7

1. 5 Specifications for Scan Original 1-10

1. 6 Specifications for Printing Media 1-13

(10) 2 inch core plain paper support

Print size ISO (mm)

Warm up time Shorter than 2 minutes 30 seconds

Scanning speed 60mm per second (mono, 600dpi max)

1. 3. 3 “Do Not Scan” Originals

(1) Metal originals (The Scan Glass may damage)

No. Name Function

No. Name Function

Thickness 0.05mm to 0.6mm

Sticked with paste

Folded (Leading edge)

Made of metal or fabric

1. 6. 1 Papers not available to use

1. 6. 2 Keeping the paper in the custody

1. Do not expose the paper to the direct sunlight.

Humidity(%) Possible problem Necessary treatment

Normal Print Crease of paper

If the media is humidified;

Normal Print Void of image

If the media is humidified;

Cofee & Foods Cofee & Foods

ABC Cafe ABC Cafe

2. 7 Inner Feeder Unit Setup 2- 7

2. 8 LED Head Assy Setup 2- 8

2. 9 Developer Unit Setup 2-10

2. 10 Process Unit Setup 2-11

2. 11 Installing Accessory 2-13

2. 12 Supplying Initial Toner 2-13

2. 13 Creating Backup 2-15

1. Power source should be rated as:

1. Make sure to connect this equipment to a properly grounded outlet.

Site Environmental Conditions

Keep ample space around the equipment to ensure comfortable operation.

10cm/4” or larger 10cm/4” or larger

Confirm the following parts are attached to the product.

Guide Cap Assy Flange

Power Cable Shading Sheet

DVD ROM User’s Manuals Hardware Setup